JP7533732B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery to determine whether a player will win or not when a certain start condition is met, and when a player wins, the game pays out a certain gaming medium to the player in response to the fulfillment of a certain winning condition.

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display unit that can change patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change to a single color or the color of light emitted , and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the above-mentioned presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc. (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-126296 A

In order to enhance the enjoyment of such a game machine, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the presentation means , and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a first presentation means for performing a first presentation by light irradiated from at least a predetermined direction as the game progresses, a second presentation means provided on the predetermined direction side of the first presentation means for performing a second presentation which is different from the first presentation and emits light as the game progresses, a first presentation reduction means for reducing and executing the presentation range of the first presentation during a predetermined period during which the second presentation is executed when the second presentation means begins to execute the second presentation while the first presentation means is executing the first presentation, and a reduction cancellation means for canceling the reduction in the presentation range of the first presentation by the first presentation reduction means after the end of the predetermined period , and the gaming machine comprises means for reducing the amount of light of the first presentation being displayed, and means for increasing the amount of light of the second presentation while the first presentation is being executed by the first presentation reduction means, and the second presentation is executable when a transition to a predetermined gaming situation occurs .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine includes a first performance means for performing a first performance by irradiating light from at least a predetermined direction as the game progresses, a second performance means provided on the predetermined direction side of the first performance means for performing a second performance that is different from the first performance and emits light as the game progresses, a first performance reduction means for reducing the performance range of the first performance during a predetermined period during which the second performance is being performed when the second performance means starts to perform the second performance during the first performance means' performance, and a reduction cancellation means for canceling the reduction of the performance range of the first performance by the first performance reduction means after the end of the predetermined period, and the gaming machine includes a means for reducing the light amount of the first performance displayed, and a means for increasing the light amount of the second performance during the performance of the first performance by the first performance reduction means, and the second performance can be performed when a transition to a predetermined game state occurs . This has the effect of favorably increasing attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement of symbols arranged on each reel of the drum display device. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the front side of the light guide unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide unit from the rear side. 8 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp and the display area forming member with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX in FIG. 7. FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of a front light guide plate and a rear light guide plate. 13 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between a first group of decorative patterns that can be illuminated and displayed on the rear light guide plate, and the rear upper LEDs of the rear upper LED unit and the rear lower LEDs of the lower LED unit. FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of portion A in FIG. 12, and is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the rear downward diffusion lens formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate and the rear downward LED of the lower LED unit. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of portion B in FIG. 13, and is a diagram showing a schematic optical path of light through the rear downward diffusion lens. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group displayed on the rear light guide plate, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate are lit, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when, from the state of (a), the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate are additionally lit. 15(a) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group displayed on the rear light guide plate, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the left side area of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on from the state of FIG. 15(b), and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate are turned off from the state of (a). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group displayed on the rear light guide plate when the confirmation lamp is turned on, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when the confirmation lamp is not turned on and the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate are turned on, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when, from the state of (a), the confirmation lamp is turned on and the rear lower LED corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate is additionally turned on while the rear upper LED corresponding to the central region and right side region of the rear light guide plate is turned off. 17(b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the rear lower LEDs corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on, while the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left region, central region and right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off; and (b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the confirmation lamp is turned off, and the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left region and central region of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on, while the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off, from the state of (a). A schematic front view showing the relationship between the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern group and the fourth decorative pattern group that can be illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate, and the front lower LED unit, the front right LED unit and the front left LED unit. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of an optical path of light through each condenser lens. (a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative pattern group of the front light guide plate and the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group can be lit up and displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative pattern group of the front light guide plate and the direction of light in which the fourth decorative pattern group can be lit up and displayed. 1A is a diagram showing the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern group, and the fourth decorative pattern group displayed on the front light guide plate, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group when the front right LED and the front left LED are lit relative to the front light guide plate, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group when the front lower LEDs on the right and left ends of the front light guide plate are lit. 1A is a diagram showing the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group displayed on the front light guide plate, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern when the front lower LED in the center part of the front light guide plate is lit, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern when all the front lower LEDs are lit on the front light guide plate. These are diagrams showing the effects produced by the front light guide plate, the rear light guide plate, and the drum display device, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the unlit states of the first decorative pattern group, the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the unlit states of the first decorative pattern group, the second decorative pattern group, and the third decorative pattern while the fourth decorative pattern group is in a lit state. These figures show the effects produced by the front light guide plate, the rear light guide plate, and the drum display device, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern being lit, while the first decorative pattern group and the fourth decorative pattern group being unlit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the first decorative pattern group being lit, while the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group being unlit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reservation number table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of Table A of the stop pattern table, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of Table B of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing an example of Table C of the stop pattern table. A diagram showing a schematic example of a variation pattern table for misses. A diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a light guide plate lighting pattern table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of each of the retained information storage areas and the execution information storage area; FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a confirmation lamp lighting setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a light guide pattern setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 1 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of an optical path of light distributed by a rear-downward diffusion lens when a rear-downward LED of FIG. 1 is turned on. 1A is a schematic side cross-sectional view of a front light guide plate showing the light guiding pattern of light guided within the front light guide plate when a front-down LED is lit, (a) is a schematic diagram showing the light guiding pattern within the front light guide plate of light incident from a front-down LED into the front light guide plate at an upward angle of 45 degrees, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the light guiding pattern within the front light guide plate of light incident from a front-down LED into the front light guide plate at a downward angle of 45 degrees, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the light guiding pattern within the front light guide plate of light incident from a front-down LED into the front light guide plate in a direction directly ahead. 20 is a diagram showing the position of a switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate shown in FIG. 19. 10 is a perspective view showing a schematic light-guiding state within the front light guide plate of light incident on the front light guide plate at an upward angle of 45 degrees from a front right LED. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic side cross-sectional view of a light guide unit according to a second embodiment, showing a positional relationship of a drum display device with respect to the light guide unit; FIG. 13 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group and the third upward LED, the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group and the third right LED of the third right LED unit, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group and the third left LED of the third left LED unit, which can be lit up and displayed on the third light guide plate in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns of pseudo-stopping symbols that can be stopped in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" in the variable presentation of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" performed by the drum display device in the fourth embodiment, (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo stop pattern as "pseudo stop 1" is stopped, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo stop pattern as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of (a), (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach formation pattern" is stopped from the state of (b), and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a "reach display" is performed from the state of (c). FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the left reel unit in the fifth embodiment. 13A to 13C are schematic diagrams illustrating the operation principle of a stepping motor in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between excitation data and an excitation order pointer in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the driving characteristics of a stepping motor executed in a series of variable performances in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the driving characteristics of a stepping motor executed when performing a "full rotation" effect in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of a normal acceleration process in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of a special acceleration process in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving state of each reel and the output state of music during the "full spin" effect in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the progression of the "full rotation" presentation performed on a drum display device in a fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a provisional jackpot result based on a "1" symbol has stopped, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle and right reels have started to rotate with normal acceleration processing from the state of (a), (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle and right reels are rotating at a high speed and constant speed and the left reel has started to rotate with special acceleration processing from the state of (b), (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left, middle and right reels are rotating at a high speed and constant speed from the state of (c), (e) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left, middle and right reels are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, similar to the state of (d), and (f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a provisional jackpot result based on a "2" symbol has stopped from the state of (e). 13 is a flowchart showing a motor control process executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel spin start process executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. 23 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving state of each reel and the output state of music during the "full spin" effect in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving state of each reel and the output state of music during the "full spin" effect in the seventh embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 46. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, Fig. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 26) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are each released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch (not shown) that detects when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened).

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at approximately the center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance executed by the drum display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described below. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button that allows the player to select the performance content and execution timing, such as the type of so-called preview display, which is one aspect of the variable performance.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the drum display device 81, and as described below, is executed when a ball shot into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning hole (first starting hole 64a or second starting hole 64b described below; see Figure 3) (start winning). After the patterns (each of the third patterns printed on the drum display device 81 described below) are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the player is presented with the result of a lottery (whether it is a jackpot or not) held for that start winning depending on the combination of patterns that are displayed in a frozen state.

A stage is a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the drum display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "town stage," "sky stage," and "island stage." Various presentations, such as the above-mentioned variable presentations and reach presentations that are executed during the variable presentations, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no change performance is taking place, or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed changing at high speed and cannot be seen by the player. Each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the stage is changed repeatedly in the following order: "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → ... In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the "normal reach" presentation element described later is started in the variable presentation performed on the drum display device 81, when the "normal reach" presentation element progresses to the "super reach" presentation element also described later, a selection screen for the "super reach" presentation element may be displayed on the drum display device 81 during the "normal reach" presentation element.

On the selection screen, multiple candidate production elements that can be selected as the "Super Reach" production element are displayed, with one of the candidate production elements being selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected candidate production element is changed. Then, based on the candidate production element that was selected when the "Super Reach" production element develops (i.e., when the selection screen ends), the content of the "Super Reach" production element is determined, and the "Super Reach" production element is executed on the drum display device 81 according to that content.

In this embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, it may be configured as an operation lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or a "super reach" performance element may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating light-emitting means such as full-color light-emitting diodes ("Light Emitting Diodes"; hereinafter sometimes referred to as "LEDs") capable of emitting light in seven colors (white, purple, blue, blue-green, green, yellow, and red). In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby informing the player that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in a reach just before a jackpot. Additionally, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the top left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 3) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 to create a more dazzling appearance.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there is built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the shooting of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, thereby shooting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. The interval between ball launches from the ball launching unit 112a is set to approximately 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 26). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear a ball jam (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 26). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board that constitutes the main control device 110, there are provided a setting key 501 that is used when hall personnel, etc., change the probability setting value that has been set or when checking the set probability setting value, a setting change switch 502 that is used when updating the probability setting value by being operated during a setting change, a RAM erase switch 503 that is used when initializing the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 110) or when confirming (determining) the probability setting value during a setting change, and a probability display device 504 that can display the probability setting value.

The setting key 501, setting change switch 502, and RAM erase switch 503 are provided protruding from the main board through holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel without opening the board box 100. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main board covered by the board box 100.

The setting key 501 is configured to be rotatable between two positions, the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON", by inserting a dedicated key managed by a hall official or the like into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. The setting key 501 is in the off state when positioned on the off side, and in the on state when positioned on the on side. Once rotated to either state, the respective state is maintained unless rotated again by a manager or the like.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when changing the probability setting value (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is a switch that is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to erase (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10. This RAM erase switch 503 is also used when changing the probability setting value (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below) and terminating the update of the probability setting value (i.e., terminating the "setting change mode").

In the first embodiment, if this RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (i.e., when the power switch is on), a RAM erase signal is output to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data, provided that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. When the main control device 110 inputs a RAM erase signal when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and also sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 as well.

In addition, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed while the probability setting value is in an updatable state (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below), the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability setting value is to be terminated, ends the updatable state of the probability setting value, and transitions to the normal game state.

The probability display device 504 is configured to display the probability setting value when the probability setting value is being confirmed (i.e., the "setting confirmation mode" described below) or when the probability setting value is being changed (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below). This probability display device 504 is turned off in the normal state (e.g., when play is possible or the power is off) and the probability setting value is not displayed, whereas in a state in which the probability setting value should be displayed (i.e., the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" described below), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, we will explain the start-up mode when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the state of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501.

The pachinko machine 10 has four startup modes: "RAM clear mode," "setting change mode," "setting check mode," and "normal mode."

The "RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

The "setting change mode" is a mode for changing the probability setting value that has been set. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in this "setting change mode," the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504, and the probability setting value is updated each time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the setting change switch 502 is pressed during this "setting change mode," the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated, and the display of the probability display device 504 is also changed in conjunction with the update of the probability setting value.

The "setting confirmation mode" is a mode for confirming the probability setting value that has been set. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in this "setting confirmation mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The "normal mode" is a startup mode other than the "RAM clear mode," "setting change mode," and "setting check mode," and is a mode for resuming play on the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power was cut by executing various startup processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203, except when information about the power cut is not stored in the RAM 203 or when the data stored in the RAM 203 is corrupted.

In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on without turning on the RAM clear switch 503 (i.e., while it is in the OFF state) and while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in "normal mode". When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 503 on while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in "RAM clear mode".

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in "setting change mode." Also, if the setting key 501 is turned on, and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned off, and the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in "setting confirmation mode."

When data is erased in the "RAM clear mode", when updating of the probability setting value is completed in the "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or when the setting key 501 is turned off in the "setting confirmation mode", each mode ends and the game transitions to the "normal mode", and the pachinko machine 10 becomes ready for play.

In this way, if the setting key 501 is turned off when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, hall personnel can select whether the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is to be the "RAM clear mode," which is a start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, or the "normal mode," depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is left on when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, hall personnel can select whether the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is to be the "setting change mode" related to the probability setting value or the "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on or not.

In other words, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode related to the probability setting value can be selected. When the startup mode unrelated to the probability setting value is selected, the startup mode can be selected as either a "RAM clear mode" or a "normal mode" depending on whether the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on, whereas when the startup mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the startup mode can be selected as either a "setting change mode" or a "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on.

When the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability during play is changed, so if play is continued by inheriting the game state before the power was cut off, for example, there may be a discrepancy between the jackpot probability in the pending variable presentation and the jackpot probability of the variable presentation to be acquired, or the jackpots counted as the limit number of times described below may be accumulated with different jackpot probabilities, and so on, and the pachinko machine 10 may not be able to perform as specified. For this reason, when the probability setting value is changed in the "setting change mode", the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, the "setting confirmation mode" is a start-up mode that only checks the probability setting value, so the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that play can be continued by inheriting the game state before the power was cut off.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on before the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting confirmation mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 503 is kept off before the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in a "setting change mode" or a "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10. Then, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in a "RAM clear mode" or a "setting change mode" which clears the data stored in the RAM 203, the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing (turning on) the RAM erase switch 503. In other words, if hall personnel understand the meaning of each startup mode, they can easily understand what operations are required for the pachinko machine 10 in order to operate the startup mode that is about to be started.

In addition, to start up the pachinko machine 10 in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and this key is managed by the hall. This prevents players from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). Furthermore, the RAM erase switch 503 is located in a position that is normally not easily touched by players, so that also prevents players from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

Furthermore, even when starting up in the "setting change mode," there are only two switches that need to be operated at the same time, and operation is easy with both hands. As a result, hall staff can easily and simply select the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on and off the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501.

When starting up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," a condition may be that a door open switch (not shown) that detects whether the inner frame 12 is open or not is on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, i.e., that the inner frame 12 is open.

This is because, in order to change or check the probability setting value, the hall staff and the like need to visually confirm the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so the inner frame 12 needs to be open. Therefore, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is on, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", but is started up in the "normal mode" if the RAM erase switch 503 is off, and in the "RAM clear mode" if the RAM erase switch 503 is on, just as in the case where the setting key 501 is off. This makes it possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being powered up and starting up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" and not starting a game in the pachinko machine 10, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 still on. In addition, a dedicated key managed by the hall is required to open the inner frame 12. This prevents players from opening the inner frame 12 on their own, checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability, or from changing the probability setting value to a higher probability on their own.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding the ball, a general winning hole 63, a first starting hole 64a, a second starting hole 64b, a normal electric role 64c, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a resin base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) on the front of the game board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 26) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

The general winning hole 63, the first starting hole 64a, the second starting hole 64b, the normal electric role 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center part of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game area of the game board 13 is provided with multiple general winning holes 63 through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

In addition, a variable display unit 80 is disposed in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a drum display unit 81, which is a drum-type rotating device that performs a variable performance of a plurality of reels (left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR (see FIG. 4) described later) on which a third pattern is printed, in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern on the special pattern display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 64a (starting winning) or the ball entering the second starting hole 64b (starting winning), and a normal pattern display device 83, which is an LED that displays a variable normal pattern (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal pattern is referred to as a "variable display"), triggered by the ball passing through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the drum display device 81.

The drum display device 81 is assembled to the back panel unit 300 (see FIG. 5) described later, and has a drum unit 81a which is an integral configuration of a left reel unit 81a1 having a left reel LR, a center reel unit 81a2 having a center reel CR, and a right reel unit 81a3 having a right reel RR, and is variably driven by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 26) described later, to variably display each of the reels LR, CR, and RR. The effective lines on the drum display device 81 are set as the range visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) of the light guide unit 400 described later on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Multiple symbols are printed on each reel LR, CR, and RR, and these symbols scroll vertically for each reel LR, CR, and RR, allowing the third symbol to be variably displayed on the drum display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the game status display associated with the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the special symbol display device 37, while a decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed on the drum display device 81. Note that instead of a drum-type rotating device, the display device for the third symbol may be configured using, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like.

Instead of a drum-type rotating device, a display device that variably displays the third symbol may be configured using, for example, a dot matrix display device or a seven-segment display device.

Now, referring to Figure 4, the symbol arrangement on each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 will be described. Figure 4 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol arrangement on each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81. As shown in Figure 4, each reel LR, CR, RR has 16 symbol areas formed thereon, and, with some exceptions (i.e., the "543" symbol on the middle reel CR), the third symbol and blank (empty) areas are arranged alternately.

For example, the left reel LR has the following symbols arranged from top to bottom: "1" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "8" symbol, blank area, "Chance" symbol, blank area. Therefore, when the left reel LR is spun downwards, the symbols are displayed in descending numerical order: "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "6" symbol → ....

The right reel RR has the following symbols arranged from top to bottom: "8", blank area, "7", blank area, "6", blank area, "5", blank area, "3", blank area, "2", blank area, "1", blank area, "chance" symbol, blank area. Therefore, when the right reel RR is spun downwards, the symbols are displayed in ascending numerical order: "1" → "2" → "3" → ....

Furthermore, the middle reel CR has the following symbols arranged from top to bottom: "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "543" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "1" symbol, blank area, "Chance" symbol, blank area. Therefore, when the middle reel CR is spun downwards, the symbols are displayed in ascending numerical order, like the right reel RR: "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → ....

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three symbols on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. Therefore, when the reels LR, CR, and RR are all stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a total of five effective lines are set as the effective lines for the variable display of the third symbol: an upper parallel line formed by the symbols on the top of the left reel LR, the symbols on the top of the middle reel CR, and the symbols on the top of the right reel RR; a middle parallel line formed by the symbols on the middle part of the left reel LR, the symbols on the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the symbols on the middle part of the right reel RR; a lower parallel line formed by the symbols on the bottom of the left reel LR, the symbols on the bottom of the middle reel CR, and the symbols on the bottom of the right reel RR; a right-sloping line formed by the symbols on the top of the left reel LR, the symbols on the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the symbols on the bottom of the right reel RR; and a right-sloping line formed by the symbols on the bottom of the left reel LR, the symbols on the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the symbols on the top of the right reel RR.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three number symbols (third symbols, hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main symbols") and blank areas on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) described below. Therefore, when all of the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 number symbols and blank areas are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the effective lines for the variable display of the third symbol, the upper parallel lines formed by the number symbols or blank areas in the upper part of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas in the upper part of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas in the upper part of the right reel RR, the middle parallel lines formed by the number symbols or blank areas in the middle part of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas in the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas in the middle part of the right reel RR, the number symbols or blank areas in the lower part of the left reel LR, and the number symbols or blank areas in the lower part of the middle reel CR, There are five active lines: a downward parallel line formed by the number symbols or blank areas and the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the right reel RR, a downward line formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the right reel RR, and an upward line formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the right reel RR.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display (variable presentation) is performed in which the same main symbols line up on one of the effective lines, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. If a transition to a high probability state (high probability state) occurs after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to "high probability symbols") line up on one of the effective lines. On the other hand, if a transition to a low probability state occurs after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which main symbols with even numbers (corresponding to "low probability symbols") line up on one of the effective lines.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of left reel LR → right reel RR → center reel CR during each variable performance. If the third symbol stops and a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of the same main symbols) is lined up on any of the active lines, a jackpot performance (for example, a rainbow light display) is executed as a jackpot. In addition, since the symbol arrangements on the left reel LR and right reel RR are reversed (ascending and descending), the same symbol can stop on one or two active lines when the left reel LR and right reel RR stop. In other words, the system is configured to be able to generate a single reach in which the same symbol stops and displays only on one active line, and a double reach in which the same symbol stops and displays on two active lines.

Returning to Figure 3, the explanation continues. If a ball enters the first starting hole 64a while the drum display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable performance (dynamic display) of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the number of times the ball has entered (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special pattern display device 37, and is also shown in the special pattern 1 first to fourth reserved pattern display units Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved pattern display unit Db1 corresponding to the first special pattern of the reserved display unit Db provided at the bottom when viewed from the front of the drum display device 81. The first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d of special chart 1 each display one reserved pattern (in normal display mode, a "○" pattern (white circle pattern)) for one reserved ball (one reserved ball count) of the first special pattern, and the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first special pattern is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed on the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d of special chart 1.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, if one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display section Db1a of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is one, if two reserved patterns, one each in the first and second reserved pattern display sections Db1a and Db1b of Special Chart 1, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is two, if three reserved patterns, one each in the first to third reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1c of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is three, and if four reserved patterns, one each in the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is four. In addition, if no reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, this indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is 0 and there are no reserved variable effects.

In addition, if a ball enters the second starting hole 64b while the drum display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) is displaying a varying effect (dynamic display) of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the number of times the ball has entered (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to a maximum of four. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special pattern display device 37, and is also shown in the special pattern 2 first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved pattern display section Db2 corresponding to the second special pattern of the reserved display section Db provided at the bottom when viewed from the front of the drum display device 81. The first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d of special chart 2 each display one reserved pattern (in normal display mode, a "○" pattern (white circle pattern)) for one reserved ball (one reserved ball count) of the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed on the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d of special chart 2.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, if one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display section Db2a of Special Chart 2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is one, if two reserved patterns, one each in the first and second reserved pattern display sections Db2a and Db2b of Special Chart 2, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is two, if three reserved patterns, one each in the first to third reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2c of Special Chart 2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is three, and if four reserved patterns, one each in the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is four. In addition, if no reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, this indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 0 and there are no reserved variable effects.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously, and only one of the lottery games is executed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games being executed is ended, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored, respectively, the second lottery game of the second special symbol is executed preferentially over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority change). In addition, the lottery games may be executed in the order of winning (so-called winning order change), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (so-called special symbol 1 special symbol 2 simultaneous change).

The central part of the reserved display section Db is provided with an execution pattern display section Db0 that displays an execution pattern indicating that a variable performance is being performed on the drum display device 81. This execution pattern display section Db0 is provided in the central part of the reserved display section Db, that is, to the right of the special chart 1 first reserved pattern display section Db1a and to the left of the special chart 2 first reserved pattern display section Db2a, and is configured to display an execution pattern larger than each reserved pattern displayed in each reserved pattern display section Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d. In addition, this execution pattern display section Db0 displays the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 1 first reserved pattern display section Db1a or the special chart 2 first reserved pattern display section Db2a as an execution pattern by moving (shifting).

The execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display section Db0 is erased when the variable performance ends, and with the erasure of the execution pattern, the displayed reserved pattern is moved and displayed as a reserved pattern on the lower side (the right side if it is the first special pattern, and the left side if it is the second special pattern). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there is no reserved pattern of the second special pattern and there are four reserved patterns of the first special pattern, when the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display section Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 1 first reserved pattern display section Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display section Db0. Also, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 1 second reserved pattern display section Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved pattern in the special pattern 1 first reserved pattern display section Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved pattern displayed in the third reserved pattern display section Db1c of the special chart 1 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the second reserved pattern display section Db1b of the special chart 1. Also, the reserved pattern displayed in the fourth reserved pattern display section Db1d of the special chart 1 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the third reserved pattern display section Db1c of the special chart 1.

In addition, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved patterns of the second special pattern, when the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display unit Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 2 first reserved pattern display unit Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display unit Db0. In addition, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 2 second reserved pattern display unit Db2b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special pattern 2 first reserved pattern display unit Db2a. Furthermore, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 2 third reserved pattern display unit Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special pattern 2 second reserved pattern display unit Db2b. In addition, the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 2 fourth reserved pattern display section Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special chart 2 third reserved pattern display section Db2c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the ball entering the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved pattern in the reserved display unit Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in numbers on a part of a display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device, etc.) other than the reserved display unit Db, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the special pattern display unit 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the reserved display unit Db. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, each of which corresponds to the maximum number of reserved first special patterns and second special patterns, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by alternating between a "circle" and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (normal symbol) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "circle" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 64c above the second starting hole 64b as viewed from the front is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned special symbol display device 37 and is also lit up by the normal symbol reservation lamp 84. There are four normal symbol reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically above the drum display device 81. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the number of lit normal symbol reservation lamps 84.

The variable display of the normal symbols may be performed by switching on and off a number of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. Similarly, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the drum display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84 may not be lit.

More specifically, the variable display of the normal symbol may be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution part. Similarly, the normal symbol pending lamp 84 may be turned on using a part of the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution part.

On the front side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, a light guide unit 400 is provided, which is unitized by arranging, in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a display area forming member 430, a front light guide plate 410, and a rear light guide plate 420 (see Figure 8).

The display area forming member 430 is made of a transparent resin (e.g., polycarbonate) and is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400, and is also formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, which will be described later and are assembled to the light guide unit 400. In addition, the display area forming member 430 has a central opening 431 formed so that three patterns can be seen on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR in the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A predetermined lens cut 432 is applied to the periphery of this central opening 431, and is configured so that the rear side of the lens cut 432 cannot be seen or is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the lens cut 432 on the periphery of the central opening 431 clearly shows the display area and active lines of the patterns on the drum display device 81 to the player. Details of the display area forming member 430 will be described later.

The front light guide plate 410 is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic) and, like the display area forming member 430, is formed into a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and is also formed into a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and the rear light guide plate 420 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. In addition, the front light guide plate 410 is configured so that the drum display device 81 and a part of the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the front light guide plate 410 can be seen from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. Furthermore, the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes, and by lighting the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c of the lower LED unit 414, the front right LED unit 415, and the front left LED unit 416 (see Figures 8 and 9) described later, a second decorative pattern group 411, which is a pattern imitating multiple cherry blossom petals (so-called cherry blossom storm pattern), a third decorative pattern 412, which is a pattern imitating a sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413, which is a pattern imitating multiple bubbles (so-called bubble group pattern) (see Figure 17), are each configured to be displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the front light guide plate 410 will be described later.

The rear light guide plate 420, like the front light guide plate 410, is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic), and like the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410, is formed into a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer circumferential shape of the drum display device 81, and is also formed into a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Also, like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is configured so that the drum display device 81, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, can be seen from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. Furthermore, the rear side of the rear light guide plate 420 (i.e., the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes, and by lighting each of the LEDs 422c, 424 of the rear upper LED unit 422 and/or the lower LED unit 414 (see Figures 8 and 9) described later, a first decorative pattern group 421 (see Figure 12), which is a pattern imitating multiple types of fish (so-called school of fish patterns), is displayed so that it can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and/or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured to be lit and displayed during the execution of the third pattern variable performance (for example, when a reach display is formed) depending on the lottery result of the third pattern variable performance. Specifically, when a jackpot result appears in the variable presentation, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, only the third decorative pattern 412, only the second decorative pattern group 411, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are likely to be lit in this order, whereas when a loss result appears in the variable presentation, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, only the second decorative pattern group 411, only the third decorative pattern 412, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, and the first decorative pattern group 421 are likely to be lit in this order.

In more detail, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to light and display one of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413, or a combination of at least two or more of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413, during the execution of the third pattern variable performance (for example, when a reach display is formed), depending on the lottery result of the third pattern variable performance. Specifically, when a jackpot result appears in the variable presentation, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, only the third decorative pattern 412, only the second decorative pattern group 411, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are likely to be lit in this order, whereas when a loss result appears in the variable presentation, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, only the second decorative pattern group 411, only the third decorative pattern 412, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, and the first decorative pattern group 421 are likely to be lit in this order.

In other words, based on the above appearance ratios resulting from the fluctuations in the variable presentation, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is preset to increase in the following order: first decorative pattern group 421 > second decorative pattern group 411 & third decorative pattern 412 > third decorative pattern 412 only > second decorative pattern group 411 only > fourth decorative pattern group 413.

In more detail, due to the appearance rate associated with the results of the variable presentation, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is preset to increase in the following order: 4th decorative pattern group 413 < 2nd decorative pattern group 411 only < 3rd decorative pattern 412 only < 2nd decorative pattern group 411 & 3rd decorative pattern 412 < 1st decorative pattern group 421.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the appearance rate at the time of a jackpot and a miss is set, respectively, to set the jackpot expectation rate at the time of appearance of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413. Alternatively, the jackpot expectation rate of the decorative patterns may be set regardless of their appearance frequency. For example, decorative patterns may be provided that have a low appearance rate at the time of a jackpot and a low appearance rate at the time of a miss, resulting in a low jackpot expectation rate, or decorative patterns may be provided that have a high appearance rate at the time of a miss and a high appearance rate at the time of a jackpot and a high jackpot expectation rate.

In this way, each of the members 430, 410, 420 of the light-guiding unit 400 is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 located on the rear side when viewed from the front, and is configured to be able to light up (guide light) and display the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 described below. Therefore, by performing the variable performance of the third pattern in the drum display device 81 and the performance in the light-guiding unit 400 in a composite manner, a variety of performances can be performed, enhancing the performance effects of each device 81, 400, and increasing attention to the game. In addition, the light-guiding unit 400 is configured in a shape that follows the outer periphery of the performance device so that the performance device (i.e., the drum display device 81) located on the rear side when viewed from the front can be placed in the back space, thereby increasing the design freedom of the performance device located on the rear side when viewed from the front of the light-guiding unit 400.

In addition, at least the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LED 414c, the front right LED 415c, and the front left LED 416c, as well as the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c, and the rear lower LED 424 are unitized and fixed as a light guide unit 400 while being positioned using through holes and screws, etc., thereby suppressing positional deviations between the LEDs 414c, etc. and the light guide plates 410, 420, and it becomes possible to appropriately irradiate the light from the LEDs 414c, etc. onto the light guide plates 410, 420, and it is possible to accurately express the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420.

The specific selection rates of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411 & the third decorative pattern 412, the third decorative pattern 412 only, the second decorative pattern group 411 only, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421") upon a jackpot or miss will be described later in FIG. 34.

On the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the right side of the front view of the variable display unit 80, a first board decorative pattern group 60a is provided, which is a pattern similar to the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420, and on the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the left side of the front view of the variable display unit 80, a second board decorative pattern group 60b is provided, which is a pattern similar to the first decorative pattern group 421 and the first board decorative pattern group 60a provided on the rear light guide plate 420. The first board decorative pattern group 60a and the second board decorative pattern group 60b are configured to be lit up in conjunction with the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. Specifically, when performing a performance related to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the variable performance of the third pattern, first, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is first lit, then the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 is lit in order from the right side to the left side as viewed from the front, and then the second decorative pattern group 60b on the left side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is lit. By configuring in this way, in the performance related to the first decorative pattern group 421, the performance on the rear light guide plate 420 and the performance on the game board 13 are performed in an integrated manner, providing a powerful performance using the entire game board 13, and improving the interest of the game.

In more detail, in the third symbol variation presentation, when the lighting lottery for the first decorative symbol group 421 is won and the timing for lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 arrives, first, the light emission presentation on the game board 13 and drum display device 81 is stopped or suppressed, and the entire game board 13 is darkened (darkened). Then, an LED (not shown) arranged on the back side of the first decorative symbol group 60a on the right side of the game board 13 is lit up as if the first decorative symbol group 60a moves from right to left when viewed from the front. Then, when the leftmost side of the first decorative pattern group 60a on the panel is lit, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 (see FIG. 8; hereinafter, these may be simply referred to as "LEDs 422c, 424") corresponding to the rightmost side of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit up (see FIG. 8). This makes the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 visible from the front side (front side; the same applies below) of the pachinko machine 10.

At this time, the front right base 415a (see FIG. 8) of the front right LED unit 415 is configured to block light from the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the dial surface to the rear light guide plate 420 side so that the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the dial surface does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the dial surface is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), causing the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 to emit light at a stage earlier than the light emission timing.

Next, with the first decorative pattern group 60a on the panel illuminated, of the LEDs 422c, 424 (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the right-most LED 422c, 424 in a front view are illuminated sequentially from the right side as viewed from the front, and when the LED 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the right-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420 is illuminated, the LED 422c, 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is illuminated, thereby making the first decorative pattern group 421 at the rightmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right and central areas of the rear light guide plate 420 create an effect that looks as if a series of school of fish patterns are moving from the right to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

More specifically, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, when the LED 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LED 422c, 424 as viewed from the front (i.e., the center of the right region) is turned on from the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the right region, it takes over the light color that was turned on by the rightmost LED 422c, 424, and when the LED 422c, 424 located further to the left as viewed from the front (i.e., the leftmost in the right region) is turned on, it takes over the light color that was turned on by the LED 422c, 424 located on the left side as viewed from the front. For example, if the rightmost LEDs 422c, 424 in the right-side region are emitting red light, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LEDs 422c, 424 as viewed from the front will light up in red at the same timing, and further, the LEDs 422c, 424 located further to the left of the LEDs 422c, 424 as viewed from the front (i.e., the leftmost LEDs in the right-side region) will light up in red at the same timing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create an effect in which the same fish pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421 is displayed moving.

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the central region when viewed from the front are sequentially lit from the right side, and when the LED 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the LED 422c, 424 corresponding to the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, thereby making the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board are turned off in sequence from the right side when viewed from the front, when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on. As a result, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right, central, and left areas of the rear light guide plate 420 create an effect in which a series of fish school patterns of a certain width (i.e., the width of the central and right areas of the rear light guide plate 420 combined with the display width of the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board) move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the left side region as viewed from the front are sequentially lit from the right side, and when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, the LED (not shown) corresponding to the rightmost end of the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b provided on the left side of the game board 13 is lit, thereby lighting up and displaying the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b. At this time, when the LED corresponding to the leftmost end of the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b is lit, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to be turned off sequentially from the right side as viewed from the front. As a result, the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 create an effect in which a school of fish pattern of a certain width (i.e., the combined width of the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, or the combined width of the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 and the display width of the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board) moves in a continuous line from the right to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off in sequence from the right side as viewed from the front. Then, at the timing when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off in sequence from the right side as viewed from the front. Furthermore, at the timing when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the panel surface are turned off in preparation from the right side as viewed from the front. By configuring it in this way, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board, the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, and the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board create an effect in which a series of fish school patterns of a constant width move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

At this time, the front left base 416a (see FIG. 8) of the front left LED unit 416 is configured to block light from the LEDs corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the dial surface to the rear light guide plate 420 side so that the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the dial surface does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the dial surface is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410) and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 emits light at a stage later than the light emission timing.

In this way, in the presentation of the first decorative pattern group 60a, the first decorative pattern group 421, and the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board, the presentation on the rear light guide plate 420 and the presentation on the game board 13 are executed in an integrated manner, and the problem of the light from other LEDs lighting up different patterns from the lighting timing when the LEDs are turned on sequentially is eliminated, thereby providing a series of powerful presentations using the entire game board 13, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A first starting hole 64a into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first starting hole 64a, a first starting hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first starting hole switch is turned on, a lottery is held for a first special symbol jackpot by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later. Then, a display according to the lottery result is displayed by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable performance of a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is executed by the drum display device 81. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

Below the first starting hole 64a, a second starting hole 64b is provided, into which a ball can enter only when the normal electric role 64c is in an open state. When a ball enters this second starting hole 64b, a second starting hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second starting hole switch is turned on, a lottery is held for a jackpot of a second special symbol by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 26), which will be described later. Then, a display according to the lottery result is displayed by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable performance of a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is executed by the drum display device 81. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the winning holes from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters it.

As described above, above the second starting hole 64b when viewed from the front, there is a normal electric actuator 64c that can open (expand) or close (reduced) the second starting hole 64b by opening and closing two blade members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting hole 64b. The normal electric actuator 64c is normally in a closed state with its blades closed (standing upwards), making it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal pattern display device 83 stops at the "○" pattern, the normal electric role 64c is activated for a predetermined time. While the normal electric role 64c is activated, the wings of the normal electric role 64c move from an upwardly raised state to an approximately V-shaped (inverted V-shaped) state, and the second starting hole 64b is in an open state. When the second starting hole 64b is in an open state, the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b, or the ball is easier to enter than in a closed state. In other words, when the variable display on the normal pattern display device 83 stops at the "○" pattern, which is a win, and the second starting hole 64b is in an open state, the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b, allowing for many jackpot draws.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning hole (also called a large opening hole or a specific winning hole) 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the variable winning device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit to show the jackpot stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the drum display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. In this special game state, the large winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined number of times (10 times or 5 times) and for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

When the large prize opening 65a is opened, it closes when a predetermined time has passed since it was opened or when a predetermined number of wins are detected, and after it is closed, the large prize opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state (big win state) that is advantageous to the player, and by landing a ball in the large prize opening 65a, the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an added value in the game (game value).

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the large prize winning opening 65a, and a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening/closing plate to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate. The large prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large prize winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easy for balls to win the large prize winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The variable winning device 65 is disposed at a position where a ball can enter the large prize opening 65a in either left-handed or right-handed play. When a ball enters the large prize opening 65a, a large prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. By counting the number of times the large prize opening switch turns on, the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a is counted, and the closing conditions of the large prize opening 65a are determined. In addition, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the large prize opening switch being turned on. Then, by repeatedly opening and closing the large prize opening 65a due to a jackpot, many balls are easily allowed to enter the large prize opening 65a, and a larger number of prize balls than usual are paid out to the player as a grant of game value (game value). This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A specific winning opening and a large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening may be provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to a big win is lit in the special pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening is open, the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times in response to a ball entering the specific winning opening. This game state may be formed as a special game state.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. Through gates 67 have vertical through holes (not shown) for the ball to pass through. When a ball is shot into the play area and passes through through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole turns on, which causes the main control device 110 to draw a winning normal symbol.

If the ball that passed through the through gate 67 is determined to be a winner as a result of the drawing of the normal symbol, the normal symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then displays a stationary "○" symbol, and then the normal electric device 64c located above the second starting hole 64b when viewed from the front is activated. This changes the state from one in which the plate of the normal electric device 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b, closes the second starting hole 64b to one in which the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b for a specified period of time, or one in which it is easier for the ball to enter compared to the closed state.

At the upper right side of the play area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 3), a special symbol display device 37 is provided with a status LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b, which are composed of multiple LEDs that are light-emitting means. The special symbol display device 37 displays the changes (hereinafter, the change display of both special symbols may be referred to as "dynamic display") of the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2") in response to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 2), and also displays the play status of the pachinko machine 10.

The status LED group 37a indicates, by its lighting state, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been displayed as a variable display among the balls that have entered (entered) the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b described below. The number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the status LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Note that a "round" in a jackpot refers to the time from when the large prize opening 65a, which will be described later, opens to when it closes in order to separate the number of winning balls in a jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the large prize opening 65a began to open, or when 10 balls enter the large prize opening 65a while it is open.

The special LED group 37b is made up of a total of 12 LEDs, consisting of an upper LED group 37b1 made up of six LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also made up of six LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays a first special symbol that indicates the result of the first lottery game. The lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays a second special symbol that indicates the result of the second lottery game.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group 37b1 are lit one by one in sequence, starting from the top LED and followed by the lower LEDs, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first starting hole 64a provided in the center of the surface of the game board 13 has elapsed, and then displays a stopped pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

The lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the lower LED group 37b2 are lit one by one in sequence, starting from the top LED and continuing down, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the second starting hole 64b provided on the right side of the game board 13 has elapsed, after which a stop display is displayed with a pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns, depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

For either LED group 37b1 or 37b2, if the result of the judgment is a miss, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the jackpot. Details of the stop patterns of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a determination is made as to whether or not a ball that enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b is a jackpot (a jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined.

The types of jackpots that can be determined here are "Probable A" which corresponds to a "10 round (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") guaranteed jackpot," "Probable B" which corresponds to a "5R guaranteed jackpot," and "Time-saving A" which corresponds to a "10R jackpot with time-saving" (see FIG. 24(b)).

Here, the "Probable Variation A" jackpot type, which corresponds to a "10R Probable Variation Jackpot", refers to a jackpot type in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes higher than the "normal game state" until the next jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "next jackpot") occurs, and the jackpot probability of normal symbols also changes to a "probability variable state" where it becomes higher than the "normal game state" until the next jackpot occurs.

The "Chika B" jackpot type, which corresponds to a "5R Chika jackpot," is a jackpot type in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability for each special symbol becomes higher than the "normal game state" until the next jackpot (hereafter sometimes referred to as the "next jackpot") occurs, and the jackpot probability for normal symbols also changes to a "probability variable state" in which the jackpot probability becomes higher than the "normal game state" until the next jackpot occurs.

The "Time-saving A" jackpot type, which corresponds to a "10R time-saving jackpot," is a jackpot in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability for each special symbol becomes a low probability state equivalent to the "normal game state," while the hit probability for normal symbols becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of special symbols is executed 100 times (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "time-saving state").

Here, each game state will be explained in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not the "probability variable state" or the "time shortening state", and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are in a normal state (i.e., a low probability state) and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is short (so-called non-opening extended state). In other words, the "normal game state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "probability variable state", and the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability variable state" and the "time shortening state", and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is also short, so it is not a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second start hole 64b (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second start hole 64b may be referred to as the "win support state"), but is the most disadvantageous (least advantageous) game state for the player.

Next, in the "time-shortened state", the probability of winning each special symbol is low, as in the "normal game state", but the probability of winning with normal symbols is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is extended, making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b (hereinafter, the function of increasing the probability of winning with normal symbols and lengthening the opening time of the normal electric role 64c may be referred to as the "winning assistance function". Also, the state in which the probability of winning with normal symbols is increased, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is extended, making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b may be referred to as the "state in which the winning assistance function is activated"). In other words, the "time-shortened state" is a state in which the probability of winning with special symbols is the same as in the "normal game state", but winning with normal symbols is easier to derive, and the opening state of the normal electric role 64c is longer. Therefore, in the "time-shortened state," it is easier to get the shot ball to enter the second starting hole 64b, making it possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of special chart 2, and it is possible to obtain prize balls (e.g., 1 ball/entry) based on the ball entering the second starting hole 64b, thereby making it possible to play while minimizing the decrease in the number of balls in hand.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "time-shortened state" is maintained after a jackpot of the jackpot type "time-shortened A" (see FIG. 24(b)) until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) for each jackpot. After the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed the predetermined number of times (i.e., after the "electric support ends"), the machine is configured to transition from the "time-shortened state" to the "normal game state" (see FIG. 10).

Next, in the "probability change state", after the jackpot is over, the probability of each special symbol after that is increased as an added value, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, and the winning assistance function of the normal electric role 64c is activated. In other words, the "probability change state" is a state in which a jackpot result due to a special symbol is easily derived, and a winning result due to a normal symbol is easily derived, and further, the open state of the normal electric role 64c is longer. Therefore, in the "probability change state", the winning assistance function is activated and the shot ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 64b, so that the dynamic display of the special symbol 2 can be executed continuously, and the balls can be obtained based on the entry into the second starting hole 64b (for example, 1 ball/winning ball), and the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, and further, it is possible to play in a state in which a jackpot game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of the special symbol 2 is likely to occur.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LED group 37b2 for the first special symbol, a total of 64 display patterns are provided, including one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probable change A", 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probable change B", and 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time-saving A". And, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is assigned in advance. Therefore, when a player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2, he can recognize that the stop display of a miss has been stopped, but it is configured to be difficult to distinguish whether the stop display is for the jackpot type "probable change A", "probable change B", or "time-saving A".

By configuring it in this way, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special pattern display device 37, it is difficult for the player to recognize the jackpot type that has been won unless he or she understands all of the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display. Therefore, for example, even if "Probable A" is won in the lottery of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state the player is in by displaying the jackpot result corresponding to "Time-saving A" as a provisional display on the drum display device 81. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess which game state the player is playing in, thereby increasing the interest in the game, and it is possible to provide a surprising game by performing a promotion performance during or after the jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the normal symbol, the time for which the normal electric role 64c associated with the second start hole 64b is opened or the number of times the normal electric role 64c is opened in one hit with the normal symbol may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the "time-shortened state", the time for which the normal electric role 64c associated with the second start hole 64b is opened may be made longer than in the "normal game state", or the number of times the normal electric role 64c is opened in one hit may be made more than in the "normal game state". Also, in the "time-shortened state", at least two of the following may be performed simultaneously: increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, lengthening the opening time of the normal electric role 64c, and increasing the number of times the normal electric role 64c is opened.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment spaces K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Any balls that enter the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a pass through a switch for detecting balls that are provided for each winning hole, and are then guided to the ball discharge path. Any balls guided to the ball discharge path pass through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and are then discharged to the island equipment (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

In addition, numerous nails are set into the game board 13 to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on the game board.

Now, with reference to Figures 5 and 6, we will explain the base plate 60 that constitutes the game board 13, the back-of-board unit 300 that also constitutes the game board 13 and is disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base plate 60, the light guide unit 400 that is assembled to the back-of-board unit 300, and the drum display device 81 that is disposed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. Figure 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 6 is an exploded perspective view of the back-of-board unit 300.

First, as shown in FIG. 5, the game board 13 is composed of a base plate 60, a back-of-board unit 300, and a drum display device 81. The back-of-board unit 300 is attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base plate 60 that forms the game area, and the drum display device 81 is attached to the back-of-board unit 300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6 , the back panel unit 300 is composed of a back panel unit base 301, a light guide unit 400, an LED board 302 for the right side notification lamp, a right side notification lamp member 303, an LED board 304 for the left side notification lamp, a left side notification lamp member 305, a notification lamp assembly part 306, and a confirmation lamp unit 310. First, the light guide unit 400, the LED board 302 for the right-side notification lamp, the LED board 304 for the left-side notification lamp, and the confirmation lamp unit 310 are each attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the back-of-board unit base 301 by fixing them with screws, and then the right-side notification lamp member 303 is attached to correspond to the LED board 302 for the right-side notification lamp, and the left-side notification lamp member 305 is attached to correspond to the LED board 304 for the left-side notification lamp. In this state, the notification lamp assembly part 306 is fixed to the back-of-board unit base 301 with screws to form the back-of-board unit 300.

The right-side notification lamp member 303 and the left-side notification lamp member 305 are lamps for informing the player of various game conditions during the third symbol variation presentation. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, various information regarding the third symbol variation presentation and information regarding the game status can be indicated to the player by the lighting patterns and lighting colors of the right-side notification lamp member 303 and the left-side notification lamp member 305.

The confirmation lamp unit 310 is a drive type lamp for indicating the occurrence of a jackpot in the variable performance by lighting and driving the confirmation lamp 311. This confirmation lamp unit 310 is composed of the confirmation lamp 311, a confirmation lamp LED (not shown) for lighting the confirmation lamp 311, and a rotation drive motor (not shown) for rotating the confirmation lamp 311. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in the variable performance of the third pattern, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on and rotated at a timing determined by lottery, so as to clearly indicate to the player that a jackpot has occurred. In addition, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to light up in a long lighting pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is lit for a long time (for example, "10 seconds") when a jackpot that generates a "probability variable state" is won, and to light up in a short lighting pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is lit for a short time (for example, "2 seconds") when a jackpot that does not generate a "probability variable state" is won. The timing of when this confirmation lamp 311 lights up will be described later.

Now, with reference to Figs. 7 to 10, the detailed configuration of the light guide unit 400 and the positional relationship between the light guide unit 400 and the drum display device 81 will be described. Fig. 7 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400, Fig. 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide unit 400, and Fig. 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400. Fig. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line X-X in Fig. 7.

As shown in Figures 7 to 9, the light guide unit 400 is composed of a front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, a front left LED unit 416, an upper spacer 417, a lower spacer 418, a rear light guide plate 420, a rear upper LED unit 422, and a display area forming member 430.

The front light guide plate 410 is configured such that the upper and lower flat plate portions extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 are continuously formed with respect to the regular R-shaped portion that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, bending toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R32, and continuing from there, a regular R-shaped portion is formed that bulges toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R80 along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (rear light guide plate 420), and further continuing from there, a downward inverted R-shaped portion is formed that is bent toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R32, and the lower flat plate portion is formed continuously from the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

On the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 (the surface facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 10), as described above, various uneven lens cuts are applied so that the various patterns of the second decorative pattern group 411 imitating a cherry blossom snowstorm composed of multiple cherry blossom petals, the third decorative pattern 412 imitating a single sunfish, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating a bubble group composed of multiple bubbles can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by guiding the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from various directions. The second decorative pattern group 411 is formed in the left and right end regions of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, the third decorative pattern is formed in the center region of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is evenly formed on the entire lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion.

The concave-convex lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the second decorative pattern group 411 are configured to emit guided light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident upward from the lower end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LEDs 414c at both left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414. Therefore, the second decorative pattern group 411 is illuminated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident upward from both ends of the lower end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, making it visible.

The uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 is configured so that only the light incident from above among the light guided to the flat plate portion is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions (for example, the horizontal direction) is not emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411. In other words, the second decorative pattern group 411 is configured so that only the light incident from the lower end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is not emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but passes through the part where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see).

In more detail, the uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the second decorative pattern group 411 are configured so that, of the light guided to the flat plate portion, light incident from the upward direction and the downward direction when viewed from the front (light guided in the upward direction and the downward direction when viewed from the front) is emitted towards the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while light incident from the lateral direction when viewed from the front (light guided in the left direction and the right direction when viewed from the front) is not emitted towards the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411. Here, the lens cut may be shaped so that the light irradiated to the lens cut (horizontal groove) of the concave-convex shape corresponding to the pattern of the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 only when the light is incident from the upper direction as viewed from the front or the lower direction as viewed from the front (light guided in the upper direction as viewed from the front and the lower direction as viewed from the front) among the light guided to the flat plate portion, but in that case, the shape of the lens cut is required to be precise, and there is a risk of increasing the processing cost of the lens cut. Therefore, by making the lens cut of the concave-convex shape so that the light irradiated to the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of whether the light is incident from the upper direction as viewed from the front or the lower direction as viewed from the front (light guided in the upper direction as viewed from the front and the lower direction as viewed from the front), the increase in the processing cost of the lens cut can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as described above, the lens cut may be configured so that the light irradiated onto the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 only when the light is guided to the flat plate portion from either the upward direction as viewed from the front or the downward direction as viewed from the front (light guided in the upward and downward directions as viewed from the front).

In addition, since the front light guide plate 410 is disposed closer to the front side (front direction side) of the pachinko machine 10 than the rear light guide plate 420, it is more susceptible to the influence of light irradiated from the confirmation lamp 311 disposed above the front light guide plate 410 and light irradiated from the indoor lighting installed on the ceiling of the game hall than the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern group 411 (the same goes for the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) formed on the front light guide plate 410 has an uneven lens cut that does not react to light from above when viewed from the front (does not light up erroneously) and lights up (emits light) only when light is from below when viewed from the front (or from the side when viewed from the front). Furthermore, by not arranging light-guiding LEDs above the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, but arranging the front lower LEDs 414c below the front, and configuring the front lower LEDs 414c to light up the second decorative pattern group 411, it is possible to prevent erroneous lighting of the second decorative pattern group 411 due to the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 or the indoor lighting of the game hall, etc.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is lit only by the front lower LEDs 414c arranged below the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. Alternatively, the front upper LEDs may be arranged above the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, and the second decorative pattern group 411 may be lit only by the front upper LEDs, or the second decorative pattern group 411 may be lit by the front upper LEDs and the front lower LEDs 414c. The third decorative pattern 412 may also be lit by the front upper LEDs and/or the front lower LEDs 414c.

The uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 is configured to emit guided light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident upward from the lower end face of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LEDs 414c other than the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414. Therefore, the third decorative pattern 412 is illuminated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident upward from other than the two ends of the lower end face of the lower flat plate part of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the central part of the lower end face), making it visible.

The uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412, like the uneven lens cut corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411, is configured so that only the light incident from above among the light guided to the flat plate portion is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions (for example, horizontal direction) is not emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412. In other words, the third decorative pattern 412 is configured so that only the light incident from the lower end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from other directions is not emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but passes through the part where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see).

The concave-convex lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured to emit guided light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident laterally from the left end face and/or right end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 from the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b of the front right LED unit 415 and/or the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b of the front left LED unit 416. Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is illuminated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and becomes visible due to the light incident laterally from the left end face and/or right end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410.

The uneven lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured so that only the light that is incident laterally out of the light guided to the flat plate portion is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and light that is incident from other directions (for example, from below to above) is not emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413. In other words, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured so that only the light that is incident from the left end face or right end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and light that is incident from other directions is not emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but passes through the part where the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see). Details of the illumination modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 will be described later.

The rear light guide plate 420, like the front light guide plate 410, is configured by continuously forming upper and lower flat plate portions extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 with respect to a regular R-shaped portion that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, bending toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R30, and continuing from there, a regular R-shaped portion is formed that bulges toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R75 along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (front light guide plate 410), and further continuing from there, a downward inverted R-shaped portion is formed that is bent toward the front side of the game board 13 with a size of about R30, and the lower flat plate portion is formed continuously from the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

In addition, a rear upper diffusion lens 423 is provided on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, which diffuses the light emitted from the multiple rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422 in multiple directions inside the rear light guide plate 420. In addition, a rear lower diffusion lens 425 is provided on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, which diffuses the light emitted from the multiple rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 in multiple directions inside the rear light guide plate 420. Details of the irradiation (passage) mode of light by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

As described above, the rear side of the rear light guide plate 420 (the surface facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes so that the first decorative pattern group 421, which resembles a school of fish made up of multiple types of fish, can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by guiding light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 from above and/or below. This first decorative pattern group 421 is formed evenly over the entire regular R-shaped portion.

The concave-convex lens cuts corresponding to the patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 are configured to emit guided light toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident toward the lower flat plate portion and/or the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 from the rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 and/or the multiple rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422. Therefore, the first decorative pattern group 421 is illuminated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light incident from the lower end (surface) of the lower flat plate portion and/or the upper end (surface) of the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, making it visible.

The lens cuts with uneven shapes corresponding to the patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 are configured to emit light that is guided to the flat plate portion from various directions toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 will be described later.

More specifically, the lens cuts of the concave and convex shapes corresponding to the patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 are configured to emit light that is guided to the flat plate portion from directions parallel to the flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, such as the upward direction when viewed from the front, the downward direction when viewed from the front, the right direction when viewed from the front, and the left direction when viewed from the front, to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. When light is incident from the non-flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, i.e., the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light that is repeatedly reflected within the rear light guide plate 420 is guided with slightly different angles of incidence and reflection on the front and back sides when it is reflected by the R-shaped portion of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion. Therefore, even if light is incident on the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion in a lateral direction as viewed from the front, the light is not guided in a lateral direction as viewed from the front, but is guided in an obliquely upward or downward direction as viewed from the front, and the light is guided unevenly (non-homogeneously) to the first decorative pattern group 421 applied to the back side of the rear light guide plate 420, and depending on the part, the first decorative pattern group 421 may be lit with varying intensity, resulting in sparse lighting. Therefore, by illuminating the light from the end faces of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, the light can be evenly incident on the first decorative pattern group 421, and the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 can be kept uniform.

In the first embodiment, when light is incident (guided) to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is configured to be incident from the end face (part) of any flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420, and is configured not to be incident from the R-shaped part (i.e., the normal R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, or the lower inverted R-shaped part). This is because, if light is attempted to be incident from the R-shaped part, the direction of the incident light may change due to the R-shaped part, and it may be difficult or impossible to properly light up the desired pattern. In addition, LEDs and the like must be arranged along the shape of the end face of the R-shaped part, which may reduce the design freedom. Furthermore, the R-shaped part is formed along the outer shape of the performance member such as the drum display device 81 and the movable role piece, and if an LED board or the like is arranged to the side of the R-shaped part, the design freedom of the performance member may be restricted. Therefore, by introducing light into the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 that have R-shaped portions, the above problem can be effectively solved and the design freedom of each component can be increased.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are respectively made up of an upper flat plate portion (upper flat plate portion), an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, a lower inverted R-shaped portion, and a lower flat plate portion (lower flat plate portion), and the light from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 is configured to be incident from the end faces (side faces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion on the upper side as viewed from the front, the right side as viewed from the front, the left side as viewed from the front, and the lower side as viewed from the front.

The first reason is to appropriately light up each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 of each light guide plate 410 and 420. The non-flat portion of each light guide plate 410 and 420, i.e., the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, is formed with a slightly different radius of R-shape on the front and back sides by the thickness of each light guide plate 410 and 420. Therefore, when light is incident from the end face (side face) of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410 and 420, the light that is repeatedly reflected within each light guide plate 410 and 420 is reflected by the R-shaped portion of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and is guided with a slightly different angle of incidence and angle of reflection on the front and back sides. As a result, light is guided unevenly (non-homogeneously) to the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 applied to the back side of each light guide plate 410 and 420, and depending on the location, the lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, and 421 may vary in intensity, resulting in sparse lighting.

Therefore, by introducing light into the end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat parts of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light that is repeatedly reflected in each light guide plate 410, 420 is repeatedly reflected from the front or back surface of each planar light guide plate 410, 420 while being guided at least in the upper and lower flat parts, and is guided while the angle of incidence and the angle of reflection are always uniform. As a result, first, the light is guided stably in the upper and lower flat parts of each light guide plate 410, 420, and then the light is guided uniformly (homogeneously) to each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421 provided on the back side of each light guide plate 410, 420, making it possible to appropriately light up each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, 421.

The second reason is to improve the design freedom regarding the arrangement of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424. The side end faces of the R-shaped portions (i.e., the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) of each light guide plate 410, 420 in a front view are shaped to conform to the R-shaped portions, so when light is to be incident from the side end faces of the R-shaped portions, the arrangement of each LED on the LED board must also conform to the side end faces of the R-shaped portions. In particular, when the LEDs are arranged while taking into consideration the arrangement of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421, adjustments regarding the position and spacing of each LED on the LED board become complicated, which may reduce the design freedom.

Therefore, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b are arranged so that light is incident from the end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat parts of the light guide plates 410, 420, and the LED boards and LEDs are not arranged on the end faces (side faces) of the R-shaped parts of the light guide plates 410, 420. By configuring in this way, it is possible to arrange the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b in a simple arrangement (i.e., arranged in a straight line and at equal intervals) that follows the shape of the end faces of the upper and lower flat parts, improving the design freedom.

Furthermore, the third reason is to improve the design freedom of the presentation devices (drum display device 81, movable gimmicks, etc.) on the back and side of each light guide plate 410, 420. On the back and side of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, presentation devices (drum display device 81 that performs the variable presentation itself, movable gimmicks that perform various presentations in the variable presentation, etc.) related to the variable presentation of the third pattern, which is the main game of the pachinko machine 10, are arranged. Here, if an LED board is arranged on the side of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420 when viewed from the front, the installation of the LED board may restrict the design freedom of each presentation device.

Therefore, in order to allow light to enter from the end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 of the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b are arranged on the upper side of the upper flat portion as viewed from the front, and on the lower side, right side, and left side as viewed from the front of the lower flat portion, and the LED boards and LEDs are not arranged at the lateral positions as viewed from the front of the R-shaped portions of each light guide plate 410, 420. By configuring in this way, when a performance device is installed on the back side and lateral side of each light guide plate 410, 420, the LED boards etc. are not obstructed from the arrangement of the performance device, and the design freedom of each performance device can be improved.

The lower LED unit 414 is provided below the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a lower base 414a, a lower LED board 414b on which are mounted front lower LEDs 414c and rear lower LEDs 424, and a front lower focusing lens 414d.

The lower base 414a is configured to be capable of holding the lower LED board 414b with screws or the like, and is configured to be capable of positioning and fixing the front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and front lower condenser lens 414d by connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415, front left LED unit 416, and display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding them in predetermined positions with positioning bosses (ribs) or the like.

In addition, this lower base 414a has a predetermined partition rib formed so that light irradiated from the front lower LED 414c mounted on the lower LED board 414b is emitted only to the front light guide plate 410 through the front lower condensing lens 414d, and light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 is emitted only to the rear lower diffusing lens 425 formed on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. As a result, the light irradiated from each LED 414c, 424 can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, or the third decorative pattern 412 can be accurately lit at an appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as unintended lighting of decorative patterns can be suppressed. The manner in which light is irradiated (passed) by the front downward focusing lens 414d and the manner in which light is irradiated (diffused) by the rear downward diffusing lens 425 will be described in detail later.

The front right LED unit 415 is provided at the right position of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a front right base 415a, a front right LED board 415b on which multiple front right LEDs 415c (see Figure 19) are mounted, and a front right focusing lens 415d.

The front right base 415a is configured to be able to hold the front right LED board 415b with screws or the like, and is provided with positioning ribs that conform to the shapes of the right end faces of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the outer shapes of the ends of the upper flat plate portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion). The front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front right condenser lens 415d are held in their respective positions by the positioning bosses and positioning ribs, and are connected and fixed to the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like, so that they can be positioned and fixed.

In addition, the front right base 415a has a predetermined partition rib formed so that the light irradiated from the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b is emitted only to the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 via the front right condensing lens 415d. This allows the light irradiated from the front right LED 415c to be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be accurately lit at an appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as the lighting of unintended patterns can be suppressed. Details of the light irradiation (passage) mode by the front right condensing lens 415d will be described later.

The front left LED unit 416 is provided at a position to the left of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a front left base 416a, a front left LED board 416b on which multiple front left LEDs 416c (see Figure 19) are mounted, and a front left focusing lens 416d.

The front left base 416a is configured to be able to hold the front left LED board 416b with screws or the like, and is provided with positioning ribs that conform to the shapes of the left end faces of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the outer shapes of the ends of the upper flat plate portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion). The front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front left condenser lens 416d are held in their respective positions by the positioning bosses and positioning ribs, and are connected and fixed to the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like, so that they can be positioned and fixed.

The front left base 416a is formed with a predetermined partition rib so that the light irradiated from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b is emitted only to the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 via the front left condensing lens 416d. This allows the light irradiated from the front left LED 416c to be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be accurately lit at an appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as the lighting of unintended patterns can be suppressed. Details of the light irradiation (passage) mode by the front left condensing lens 416d will be described later.

The rear upper LED unit 422 is provided at a position above the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a rear upper base 422a and a rear upper LED board 422b on which rear upper LEDs 422c (see Figure 12) are mounted.

The rear upper base 422a is configured to be capable of holding the rear upper LED board 422b with screws or the like, and is configured to be capable of positioning and fixing the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 by connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415 and the front left LED unit 416 and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding them in predetermined positions with positioning bosses (ribs) or the like.

In addition, the rear upper base 422a is formed with a predetermined partition rib so that the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12) is emitted only to the rear upper diffusion lens 423 formed on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. This allows the light irradiated from the rear upper LED 422c to be accurately emitted to the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be accurately lit at an appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as the lighting of unintended patterns can be suppressed. Details of the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 will be described later.

The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 have a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm) and are formed in a flat plate shape extending in the longitudinal direction. The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 are disposed between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in order to provide a predetermined space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. In this way, by providing a space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, it is possible to make it difficult for light incident on one light guide plate 410, 420 to be incident on the other light guide plate 420, 410, and it is possible to prevent unintended lighting of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421, etc.

As described above, the display area forming member 430 is disposed in front of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when viewed from the front, and a central opening 431 is formed so that the drum display device 81 (the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420) can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a lens cut 432 is formed on the outer edge portion of the central opening 431.

The lens cut 432 is provided to clarify the display area (effective line) of the display pattern on the drum display device 81, and also to suppress (prevent) the light irradiated from the confirmation lamp 311 located in the upper part of the display area forming member 430 when viewed from the front, from being irradiated onto the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit.

Now, referring to FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship between the confirmation lamp 311 and the display area forming member 430, with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line X-X in FIG. 7. Note that in FIG. 10, for ease of explanation, the spacing between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front side, the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 are arranged in this order from the outside (the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (left side of the drawing)). A total of nine pattern display areas, three for each of the reels LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81, are visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, and the other pattern areas (third patterns) are covered by the lens cut 432 and therefore cannot be seen or are difficult to see. In addition, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to be visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 when they are lit up and displayed. Furthermore, the lower side of the lens cut 432 on the lower side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is transparent, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when it is lit up. Therefore, the display area forming member 430 clarifies the effective line of the variable performance in the drum display device 81, and when the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are lit up, they can each be seen while avoiding the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430.

The lens cuts 432 are located in the upper part (lower part, both side parts) of the positive R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420 so that when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 is not or is difficult to be guided to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, i.e., so as to block the light of the confirmation lamp 311.

More specifically, the lens cut 432 is configured with a rib shape on its rear side (the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) with multiple ribs standing continuously upright, and is configured to disperse the light incident on the lens cut 432 and reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432 area.

In addition, instead of using multiple ribs, the lens cut 432 may be configured with knurling or mirror finishing to reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432.

Lens cuts 432 may also be applied to the inner surface of the upright wall (the entire bulge) on the side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 when viewed from the front. By configuring it in this way, the display area showing the effective line of the variable performance is clarified in a square shape, and the light that may be incident on the light guide unit 400 from the side when viewed from the front is dispersed by the lens cuts 432, reducing the amount of light transmitted through the lens cuts 432.

The effect of the confirmation lamp 311 located above the light-guiding unit 400 when viewed from the front is an effect that suggests (notifies) the occurrence of a jackpot in the variable display, and is an effect that is more important in the game than the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the light-guiding unit 400 (i.e., suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot), and is therefore configured to have a brighter illumination than the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413. This is to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is more important, if these effects are combined.

The front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in a shape (regular R-shaped portion) that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. When a lamp or the like is turned on at the top or bottom of the regular R-shaped portion, the light from the lamp is incident on the regular R-shaped portion, and if each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 is abnormally lit, there is a risk of a discrepancy occurring between the lighting state of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 and the change results of the variable presentation.

Therefore, by arranging the lens cut 432 between the confirmation lamp 311 and the up-down position of the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the lens cut 432 can be diffused (weakened). Therefore, by suppressing light other than the light incident by the lighting of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, it is possible to suppress the abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a performance discrepancy such as the abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative pattern group 421, which has the highest jackpot reliability (expectation), so the front light guide plate 410 can also suppress the incidence of light entering the rear light guide plate 420 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the rear light guide plate 420 of the pachinko machine 10, the light entered by the front light guide plate 410 can be somewhat diffused (weakened), and the first decorative pattern group 421, which has a large performance discrepancy, can be suppressed from abnormally lighting up when it is erroneously displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, and 421.

Next, referring to Figures 11 to 25, the direction of light travel from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 relative to the rear light guide plate 420 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "light path"), and the light paths from the front lower focusing lens 414d, the front right focusing lens 415d, and the front left focusing lens 416d relative to the front light guide plate 410 will be explained, while the light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, the light emission mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, and the performance mode of the confirmation lamp 311, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 will be explained.

First, the positional relationship between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. Note that in FIG. 11, for ease of explanation, the arrangement of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are depicted as being arranged differently from FIG. 12, etc., which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side (left side of the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10, and the rear light guide plate 420 is located on the rear side (right side of the drawing). As described above, the front light guide plate 410 has a third decorative pattern 412 imitating a sunfish formed in the center of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and a second decorative pattern group 411 imitating cherry blossom petals formed on both the left and right sides of the regular R-shaped portion on which the third decorative pattern 412 is formed, and further, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating a bubble pattern is formed in the entire area of the lower inverted R-shaped portion continuing from the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410.

As described above, the rear light guide plate 420 has a first decorative pattern group 421 formed over the entire area of the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420, which resembles a school of fish.

Therefore, when the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are connected to form the light guide unit 400, the display areas of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to overlap (superimpose). In this way, in the presentation of the light guide unit 400, a variety of presentations can be executed in one display area, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the light guide unit 400 and increasing attention to the game.

Next, with reference to Figs. 12 to 16, the light path of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 to the rear light guide plate 420 and the light emission mode (lighting mode or display mode; the same applies below) of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. Fig. 12 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the first decorative pattern group 421 that can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c of the rear upper LED unit 422, and the rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Fig. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in Fig. 12, showing the relationship between the rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Fig. 14 is a diagram showing the light path of light by the rear lower diffusion lens. Figure 15 is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, where Figure 15(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, and Figure 15(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally lit from the state of Figure 15(a). FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally turned on from the state of FIG. 15(b), and FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16(a). Note that in FIG. 12, FIG. 15, and FIG. 16, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and the diffusion lenses 423, 425 are omitted or represented diagrammatically for convenience of explanation.

12, the rear light guide plate 420 has a first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the entire positive R-shaped portion as a school of fish pattern that is a pattern imitating a school of multiple types of fish. In addition, when light is irradiated onto the rear upper diffusion lens 423 formed on the upper end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 by the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 provided above and below the rear light guide plate 420, the light is diffused in multiple directions (three directions, left, center, and right in the first embodiment) from each of the diffusion lenses 423, 425.

The rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 are positioned such that one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are paired in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

Now, with reference to Figures 13 and 14, the manner in which light is diffused by the rear downward diffusion lens 425 (rear upper diffusion lens 423) will be described. Figure 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in Figure 12, and is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the rear downward diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear downward LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Figure 14 is a schematic enlarged view of part B in Figure 13, and is a diagram showing the optical path of light by the rear downward diffusion lens 425. Note that the configuration of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is the same as the configuration of the rear downward diffusion lens 425, so a description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are configured with exactly the same shape, with the only difference being that they are positioned at the upper end face and the lower end face of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when molding the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 can be molded using the same forming process (manufacturing process, same mold, etc.), which can suppress increases in the manufacturing costs of the rear light guide plate 420.

In addition, since the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 have the same shape, the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light diffused from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are the same, and it is easy to set (understand) the destination of the optical path of the light diffused by each of them and the overlapping part of the optical path of the light at the design stage. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the optical path of the light irradiated from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light irradiated from the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may overlap one or more in the positive R-shaped part of the rear light guide plate 420. More specifically, for example, in the optical path of the light irradiated from one front direction diffusion part 425b of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, all optical path parts overlap with the optical path of the light irradiated from the front direction diffusion part (no reference number) facing the rear upper diffusion lens 423. The optical path of the light irradiated from the leftward diffusion section 425a of one of the rear downward diffusion lenses 425 overlaps with the optical path of the light irradiated from the leftward diffusion section (no number) of the opposite recess of the rear upward diffusion lens 423, and also overlaps with the optical path of the light irradiated from the frontward diffusion section (no number) of the recess immediately to the left of the opposite recess. Furthermore, the optical path of the light irradiated from the rightward diffusion section 425c of one of the rear downward diffusion lenses 425 overlaps with the optical path of the light irradiated from the rightward diffusion section (no number) of the opposite recess of the rear upward diffusion lens 423, and also overlaps with the optical path of the light irradiated from the frontward diffusion section (no number) of the recess immediately to the right of the opposite recess. As a result, it becomes easier to arrange the decorative patterns on the rear light guide plate 420, the decorative patterns on the rear light guide plate 420 can be accurately illuminated, and the decorative patterns that you want to highlight can be arranged in the overlapping areas, allowing you to highlight the decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 13, rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 are formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 so as to correspond to the multiple rear-downward LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. As shown in FIG. 14, the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 is formed so as to have multiple recesses connected together, and each recess is composed of a leftward diffusion section 425a, a frontward diffusion section 425b, and a rightward diffusion section 425c, which have the same side length.

The front diffusion section 425b is formed in a plane perpendicular to the direction of irradiation of light from the rear lower LED 424. The left diffusion section 425a is formed in a plane inclined about 50 degrees (θ1 = 50°) to the left with respect to the front diffusion section 425b. The right diffusion section 425c is formed in a plane inclined about 50 degrees (θ1 = 50°) to the right with respect to the front diffusion section 425b. A recess formed by the left diffusion section 425a, the front diffusion section 425b, and the right diffusion section 425c is formed in the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 continuously for the width of the light emitting surface of at least one rear lower LED 424.

In the first embodiment, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). When the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, the light path of the light incident on the front-direction diffusion section 425b from the rear-downward LED 424 is emitted straight (to the upper side of the drawing in FIG. 14) into the inside of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident on the left-direction diffusion section 425a from the rear-downward LED 424 is refracted in a direction inclined to the left by about 20 degrees (θ2 = 20°) with respect to the light emitted from the front-direction diffusion section 425b and emitted into the inside of the rear light guide plate 420, and the light incident on the right-direction diffusion section 425c from the rear-downward LED 424 is refracted in a direction inclined to the right by about 20 degrees (θ3 = 20°) with respect to the light emitted from the front-direction diffusion section 425b and emitted into the inside of the rear light guide plate 420.

The rear-downward diffusion lens 425 has a plurality of recesses formed by the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c, each of which is at least as wide as the light-emitting surface of the rear-downward LED 424. Therefore, the light irradiated from one rear-downward LED 424 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the front direction, the direction tilted 20 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the direction tilted 20 degrees to the right from the front direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 by the plurality of recesses of the rear-downward diffusion lens 425. In addition, since the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c are each configured with the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also configured to be the same. As a result, when one LED is turned on, multiple first decorative pattern groups 421, each formed at a position corresponding to each of the diffused light paths, can be made to emit light in the same color, and even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of effects can be produced, enhancing the effects of the rear light guide plate 420 and drawing attention to the game.

Here, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 will be described with reference to Fig. 51. Fig. 51 is a schematic enlarged view of Fig. 14, which shows a schematic diagram of the light distribution pattern of the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c.

As shown in FIG. 51, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 is composed of a leftward diffusion section 425a, a frontward diffusion section 425b, and a rightward diffusion section 425c, each of which is formed with a predetermined side length (for example, the side that irradiates light in the forward direction is 50 micrometers, and the side that irradiates light in the left and right directions is 62.5 micrometers. Hereinafter, micrometers may be referred to as "μm"). Each diffusion section 425a to 425c is configured so that the light path width of the light irradiated from each diffusion section 425a to 425c is the same. Specifically, in each recess, the side length that irradiates light in the forward direction is configured to be the same length (for example, 50 μm), and the side lengths that irradiate light in the left and right directions are each configured to be the same length (for example, 62.5 μm), so that the light path width of the light irradiated from each diffusion section 425a to 425c is all the same. A plurality of such recesses are configured in a continuous line. That is, the horizontal width of the first recess is 130.35 μm, which is the sum of the length of the front diffusion section 425b (50 μm) and the horizontal width X (cos50°=x/62.5. x=40.175. X=2x=80.35 μm) of the left diffusion section 425a and the right diffusion section 425c. Therefore, for example, if the light emitting surface (illumination width) of the first LED 424 is 3 millimeters wide, approximately 23 rear downward diffusion lenses 425 for the first LED 424 will be formed.

Here, when the rear lower LED 424 emits light and the light is irradiated to each recess, the width of the light distributed in the front direction by the front diffusion portion 425b in the recess 1 is irradiated with 50 μm, the width of the light distributed in the left direction by the left diffusion portion 425a in the recess 1 is also irradiated with 50 μm, and the width of the light distributed in the right direction by the right diffusion portion 425c in the recess 1 is also irradiated with 50 μm. Then, the light distributed in the front direction, left direction, and right direction by each recess is gathered together for each recess, forming an optical path of at least a predetermined width (for example, 50 μm x 26 = 1300 μm). In this case, for example, the front diffusion section 425b constituting recess 1 and the front diffusion section 425b constituting the recess adjacent to the right of the recess are separated by the horizontal distance between the right diffusion section 425c constituting recess 1 and the left diffusion section 425a constituting the recess adjacent to the right, so the front light paths distributed from the front diffusion section 425b constituting recess 1 and the front diffusion section 425b constituting the recess adjacent to the right are also separated by the above horizontal distance, but the light distributed from the right diffusion section 425c and the left diffusion section 425a, and the light distributed from the front diffusion section 425b itself, cause the light to be distributed comprehensively within the front light guide plate 410.

As a result, when one rear-lower LED 424 is illuminated, the light diffused by the rear-lower diffusion lens 425, which is composed of multiple recesses, can cause the multiple first decorative pattern groups 421, each formed (arranged) at a position corresponding to each optical path of the diffused light and the periphery of the optical path, to emit light in the same color, and it is possible to light up a wider range of the first decorative pattern groups 421 than the light-emitting surface of one rear-lower LED 424. As a result, even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of effects can be performed over a wide range, enhancing the presentation effect of the rear light guide plate 420 and increasing attention to the game. In addition, by configuring the side lengths of each of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c so that the light path width of the light irradiated from each of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c is the same, the light path width of the light irradiated from each of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c is the same, making it easier to set (understand) the light path of the light guided into the rear light guide plate 420, and making it easy to understand the pattern arrangement that allows the first decorative pattern group 421 to emit light accurately during the setting stage.

Returning to FIG. 12, the explanation will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, nine rear upper LEDs 422c and nine rear lower LEDs 424 are provided, and one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are arranged so as to overlap vertically. Therefore, the light irradiated from one rear upper LED 422c to the lower side as viewed from the front (lower side of the drawing) via the front direction diffusion portion (not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the light irradiated from one rear lower LED 424 to the upper side as viewed from the front (upper side of the drawing) via the front direction diffusion portion 425b (see FIG. 14) of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are configured to overlap (superimpose). In addition, the light irradiated (diffused) to the left or right from one rear upper LED 422c through the leftward or rightward diffusion section (both not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 is configured to overlap (superimpose) with the light irradiated in each direction from the other rear upper LEDs 422c through each diffusion section (not shown) of the rear upper diffusion lens 423, and with the light irradiated in each direction from the rear lower LED 424 through each diffusion section 425a, 425b, 425c of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, at the portion where the respective optical paths intersect.

Specifically, for example, when the LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c are lit in three colors, starting from the right, namely, "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", and "green", and the LEDs of the rear lower LED 424 are lit in three colors, starting from the right, namely, "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", and "green", the "red" light is diffused in a light path of a predetermined width from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the rightmost LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, and the "red" light is diffused in a light path of a predetermined width from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the rightmost LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the second LED from the right (i.e., the eighth from the left) of the upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the third LED from the right (i.e., the seventh from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (i.e., the sixth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width. From the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the fifth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the fifth LED from the left (i.e., the fifth from the left; center) of the rear lower LED 424, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the sixth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the sixth LED from the left (i.e., the fourth from the left) of the rear lower LED 424, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width. From the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the seventh LED from the right (i.e., the third from the left), red light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the eighth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (i.e., the second from the left), blue light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the ninth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (i.e., the leftmost) LED, green light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 includes a portion where the optical path of the "red" light and the optical path of the "red" light overlap ("dark red"), a portion where only the optical path of the "red" light is displayed ("light red"), a portion where the optical path of the "red" light and the optical path of the "blue" light overlap ("purple"), a portion where the optical path of the "red" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("yellow"), and a portion where the optical path of the "red" light, the optical path of the "blue" light, and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("yellow"). Each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 different display colors: a portion where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "blue" light overlap ("dark blue"), a portion where only the optical path of the "blue" light is displayed ("light blue"), a portion where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("blue-green"), a portion where the optical path of the "green" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("dark green"), and a portion where only the optical path of the "green" light is displayed ("light green"). Each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is then arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even with a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (e.g., three colors), the light is diffused by the diffusion lenses 423, 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused light overlap, making it possible to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme, while differentiating the emitted colors in the non-overlapping and overlapping areas. Thus, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted colors, the LED emission control is simplified and the control burden for LED emission control can be reduced. In particular, when the above control is performed by arranging multiple types of monochromatic light-emitting diodes rather than using full-color LEDs, costs can be reduced by using monochromatic light-emitting diodes that are less expensive than full-color LEDs, and the LED emission control is simplified and the control burden for LED emission control can be reduced.

Furthermore, pattern 1 of first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged so as to overlap with the optical path of light of color 1 in a specified portion, while being arranged so as to overlap with the optical path of light of other colors in portions other than the specified portion. In other words, by forming pattern 1 of first decorative pattern group 421 so as to fit within a size range of multiple optical path widths, the luminescent color of each portion of pattern 1 can be made different, and pattern 1 can be expressed in a variety of colors.

Here, the lighting (presentation) mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described with reference to Figures 15 and 16. Figure 15 is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and Figure 15 (a) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, and Figure 15 (b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally lit from the state of Figure 15 (a). FIG. 16 shows the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally turned on from the state of FIG. 15(b). FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16(a).

First, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused with a predetermined light path width in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in sequence from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right rear upper LED 422c is lit in "red," the central rear upper LED 422c is lit in "blue," the left rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green," and the right rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red," the central rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue," and the left rear lower LED 424 is lit in "green," for a total of three colors, the part where the light path of "red" and the light path of "red" overlap (intersect; the same applies below) is "dark red," and the part where the light path of "red" and the light path of "blue" overlap is "dark red." Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red light path overlaps with the green light path, "yellow" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the green light path, "white" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the blue light path, "dark blue" where the blue light path overlaps with the green light path, "blue-green" where the green light path overlaps with the green light path, "dark green" where only the red light path overlaps, "red" where only the blue light path overlaps, "blue" where only the blue light path overlaps, and "green" where only the green light path overlaps.

More specifically, among the multiple fish patterns that make up the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is lit up in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

The first decorative pattern group 421 includes small patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of light 1, medium patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of light 2, and large patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of light 3 or more. With regard to the first decorative pattern group 421 of 1, small patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of display color 1 are lit up in a single display color, and when each part of the medium pattern or large pattern is located within the range of the optical path width of multiple display colors, each part of the medium pattern or large pattern is lit up in the luminous color of the optical path where it overlaps. Therefore, in the first decorative pattern group 421 composed of multiple patterns, by expressing each pattern in a different color or expressing pattern 1 in multiple colors, it is possible to provide a colorful and varied presentation.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on from the state shown in FIG. 15(a), and further the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right-hand side, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the central and right-hand regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused with a predetermined light path width in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) inside the rear upper diffusion lens 423 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in sequence from the right, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right rear upper LED 422c is lit in "red," the central rear upper LED 422c is lit in "blue," and the left rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green," and the right rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red," the central rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue," and the left rear lower LED 424 is lit in "green," for a total of three colors, the portion where the light path of "red" and the light path of "red" overlap is "dark red," and the portion where the light path of "red" and the light path of "blue" overlap is "dark red." Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red light path overlaps with the green light path, "yellow" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the green light path, "white" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the blue light path, "dark blue" where the blue light path overlaps with the green light path, "blue-green" where the green light path overlaps with the green light path, "dark green" where only the red light path overlaps, "red" where only the blue light path overlaps, "blue" where only the blue light path overlaps, and "green" where only the green light path overlaps.

More specifically, among the multiple fish designs that make up the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish design is lit up in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(a), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on from the state of FIG. 15(b), and further the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left, central and right regions (i.e. the entire region) of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused with a predetermined light path width in three directions (i.e. the downward right direction, the downward front direction and the downward left direction) inside the rear upper diffusion lens 423 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in sequence from the right, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward right direction, upward front direction, and upward left direction) inside the rear lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in each of the entire regions of the rear light guide plate 420 (i.e., the left region, the center region, and the right region), if the right-side upper rear LED 422c is lit in "red," the central upper rear LED 422c is lit in "blue," the left-side upper rear LED 422c is lit in "green," and the right-side lower rear LED 424 is lit in "red," the central lower rear LED 424 is lit in "blue," and the left-side lower rear LED 424 is lit in "green," for a total of three colors, the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "red" light path will be "dark red," and the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "blue" light path will be "dark red." The first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red and green light paths overlap; "yellow" where the red, blue and green light paths overlap; "white" where the blue and blue light paths overlap; "dark blue" where the blue and green light paths overlap; "blue-green" where the blue and green light paths overlap; "dark green" where the green and green light paths overlap; "red" where there is only the red light path; "blue" where there is only the blue light path; and "green" where there is only the green light path.

More specifically, among the multiple fish patterns that make up the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish pattern is lit up in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

Next, as shown in FIG. 16(b), when, from the state of FIG. 16(a), the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on while the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused with a predetermined light path width in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off in sequence from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in each of the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right-side rear upper LED 422c is lit in "red," the central rear upper LED 422c is lit in "blue," and the left-side rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green," and the right-side rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red," the central rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue," and the left-side rear lower LED 424 is lit in "green," for a total of three colors, the portion where the light path of "red" and the light path of "red" overlap is "dark red," and the portion where the light path of "red" overlaps with the light path of "blue" is "dark red." Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red light path overlaps with the green light path, "yellow" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the green light path, "white" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the blue light path, "dark blue" where the blue light path overlaps with the green light path, "blue-green" where the green light path overlaps with the green light path, "dark green" where only the red light path overlaps, "red" where only the blue light path overlaps, "blue" where only the blue light path overlaps, and "green" where only the green light path overlaps.

More specifically, among the multiple fish designs that make up the first decorative pattern group 421, each fish design is lit up in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is not illuminated because light from the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, making them difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, even if the light emission of the rear upper LEDs 422c and the rear lower LEDs 424 is controlled with only about three colors, the overlap of the light diffused by each diffusion lens 423, 425 allows the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 to be expressed with lighting colors equal to or greater than the above-mentioned light emission colors. Therefore, even with light emission control using only a few light emission patterns, colorful expressions can be produced, and a variety of effects can be implemented to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, of the three rear upper LEDs 422c and three rear lower LEDs 424 arranged in each of the right, center, and left regions of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightmost rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are lit in sequence, in order, to the central rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, and the left rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, creating an effect that makes it appear as if the school of fish, which is the first decorative pattern group 421, is swimming from right to left.

Furthermore, by lighting the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 sequentially from the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the first board surface decorative pattern group 60a and the second board surface decorative pattern group 60b (see Figure 3) on the base plate 60 of the game board 13, the presentation on the rear light guide plate 420 and the presentation on the game board 13 surface can be executed in an integrated manner, providing a powerful presentation using the entire game board 13 surface and increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to Figures 17 and 18, the optical path of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 to the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit will be described, as well as the light emission mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420.

Figure 17 is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on. Figure 17(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on and the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on. Figure 17(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when, from the state of Figure 17(a), the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally turned on, while the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the central area and right side area of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a typical lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on. FIG. 18(a) shows a state in which the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be turned on from the state shown in FIG. 17(b), and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally turned on, while the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left region, central region, and right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off. FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. 18(a) and the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left region and center region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally turned on while the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot occurs in a variable performance, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at some timing during the variable performance, clearly informing the player that a jackpot will occur. In addition, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 may be lit to indicate to the player the reliability of the jackpot in the variable performance.

Here, the notification by the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 is an effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur, and is the so-called jackpot confirmation effect. On the other hand, the notification by the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 is an effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot will occur, and does not definitively suggest that a jackpot will occur. Therefore, in terms of the importance of the effects in the game on the pachinko machine 10, the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is considered to be more important than the notification by the first decorative pattern group 421.

However, when an effect using the confirmation lamp 311 is executed while an effect using the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, there is a risk that the effect using the first decorative symbol group 421 will be hindered (poor visibility, poor recognition, etc. due to overlapping effects) by the effect using the confirmation lamp 311, which is more important in terms of gameplay. In addition, when an announcement using the confirmation lamp 311 is to be executed, it is possible to consider measures such as not executing the effect using the first decorative symbol group 421, or not executing the announcement using the confirmation lamp 311 while the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, but this would result in restrictions on the presentation, an increased control burden, and a reduced presentation variation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the performance by the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed, so that the performance by the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is made to stand out. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, by making the side where the confirmation lamp 311 is located (i.e., the upper side when viewed from the front of the rear light guide plate 420) in the first decorative pattern group 421 unlit or lighted to a small extent, the performance of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the performance of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, and the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, it can be configured not to obstruct the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game. In addition, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effects using the confirmation lamp 311 and the effects using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

From here, we will explain the specific performance mode by the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421. First, as shown in Figure 17 (a), when the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit (turned off), when the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially lit from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused with a predetermined light path width in three directions (i.e., downward right direction, downward front direction, and downward left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in sequence from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is lit in "red", the central rear upper LED 422c is lit in "blue", the left rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green", and the right rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red", the central rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is lit in "green", for a total of three colors, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap (intersect; the same applies below) is "dark red", the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path intersect is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path intersect is "dark red". The first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the light paths overlap, "yellow" where the red light path and the green light path overlap, "white" where the red light path, the blue light path and the green light path overlap, "dark blue" where the blue light path and the blue light path overlap, "blue-green" where the blue light path and the green light path overlap, "dark green" where the green light path and the green light path overlap, "red" where there is only the red light path, "blue" where there is only the blue light path, and "green" where there is only the green light path.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 17(a), when the rear downward LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and further the rear downward LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear downward LEDs 424 corresponding to the central and right side regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward rightward, upward frontward, and upward leftward) inside the rear downward diffusion plate 420 according to the shape of the rear downward diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of the rear downward diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state shown in FIG. 17(a), the rear upper LED 422c arranged to correspond to the right area of the rear light guide plate 420 switches from a lit state to an unlit state, and the rear upper LED 422c arranged to correspond to the central area of the rear light guide plate 420 also does not light up (is unlit).

That is, among the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged in a position far from the confirmation lamp 311, only the rear lower LEDs 424 provided in the central region and right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, and the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged in a position close to the confirmation lamp 311 are turned off.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is lit up, while the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 if the rear upper LED 422c emitted light is not lit (is turned off).

Here, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, close to the confirmation lamp 311, is not provided in a position that is lit by the light emitted by the rear lower LED 424 (there are only a few of them), and many of them are formed in a position that is lit by the light emitted by the rear upper LED 422c.

On the other hand, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, which is far from the confirmation lamp 311, is provided at a position where it is lit by the emission of the rear lower LED 424 (there are a large number of them provided). Note that the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, which is far from the confirmation lamp 311, may be provided in a position where it is lit by the emission of the rear upper LED 422c, or may be provided in a position where it is not lit by the emission of the rear upper LED 422c.

Therefore, when the rear upper LED 422c is turned on, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view can be (easier to be) lit, and when the rear lower LED 424 is turned on, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the lower part of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view can be (easier to be) lit. On the other hand, among the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 in the front view is not (hard to be) lit even when the rear lower LED 424 is turned on, and is not (hard to be) lit when the rear upper LED 422c is turned off. The lit pattern is thinned out.

By configuring it in this way, the first decorative pattern group 421 in the upper part of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, which is adjacent to the confirmation lamp 311, can be switched on or off depending on whether the rear upper LED 422c is lit or not. Then, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, even if the first decorative pattern group 421 is being executed, by turning off the rear upper LED 422c, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light emission of the confirmation lamp 311 and the light emission of the first decorative pattern group 421 do not interfere with each other.

For example, in the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, when the right rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red", the central rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is lit in three colors, the first decorative pattern group 421 is lit in seven colors: the overlapping parts of the "red" and "blue" light paths are "purple", the overlapping parts of the "red" and "green" light paths are "yellow", the overlapping parts of the "red" and "blue" light paths are "white", the overlapping parts of the "blue" and "green" light paths are "blue-green", the overlapping parts of only the "red" light path are "red", the overlapping parts of only the "blue" light path are "blue", and the overlapping parts of only the "green" light path are "green".

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because the light from the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 does not reach it, and it remains difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18(a), if the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state of FIG. 17(b), when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the central and right side regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and further the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left side region, central region and right side region (i.e. the entire region) of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e. the upper right direction, the upper front direction and the upper left direction) inside the rear lower diffusion lens 425 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of the rear lower diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, if the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state shown in FIG. 17(b), the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the left, center, and right areas (i.e., the entire area) of the rear light guide plate 420 are not lit (are turned off).

In other words, only the rear lower LED 424 arranged in a position far from the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the rear upper LED 422c arranged in a position close to the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off.

In this case, similar to FIG. 17(b), the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is lit up, while the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 if the rear upper LED 422c emitted light is not lit (is turned off).

For example, in each of the left, center, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, when the right rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red," the center rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue," and the left rear lower LED 424 is lit in three colors, the first decorative pattern group 421 is lit in seven colors: the overlapping parts of the "red" and "blue" light paths are "purple," the overlapping parts of the "red" and "green" light paths are "yellow," the overlapping parts of the "red" and "blue" light paths are "white," the overlapping parts of the "blue" and "green" light paths are "blue-green," the overlapping parts of only the "red" light path are "red," the overlapping parts of only the "blue" light path are "blue," and the overlapping parts of only the "green" light path are "green."

Next, as shown in FIG. 18(b), when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. 18(a), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused with a predetermined light path width in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front and downward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off in sequence from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) inside the rear lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in each of the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right-side rear upper LED 422c is lit in "red," the central rear upper LED 422c is lit in "blue," the left-side rear upper LED 422c is lit in "green," and the right-side rear lower LED 424 is lit in "red," the central rear lower LED 424 is lit in "blue," and the left-side rear lower LED 424 is lit in "green," for a total of three colors, the portion where the light path of "red" and the light path of "red" overlap is "dark red," and the portion where the light path of "red" overlaps with the light path of "blue" is "dark red." Each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red light path overlaps with the green light path, "yellow" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the green light path, "white" where the red light path overlaps with the blue light path and the blue light path, "dark blue" where the blue light path overlaps with the green light path, "blue-green" where the green light path overlaps with the green light path, "dark green" where only the red light path overlaps, "red" where only the blue light path overlaps, "blue" where only the blue light path overlaps, and "green" where only the green light path overlaps.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is not illuminated because light from the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, making them difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, when the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (during execution), the scale of the performance by the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed, so that the performance by the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, stands out. Specifically, when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, by making the side where the confirmation lamp 311 is located (i.e., the upper side when viewed from the front of the rear light guide plate 420) in the first decorative pattern group 421 unlit or lighted to a small extent, the performance of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the performance of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, and the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, it can be configured not to obstruct the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game. In addition, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effects using the confirmation lamp 311 and the effects using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

Next, referring to Figures 19 to 21, the optical paths of light from the front lower condenser lens 414d, the front right condenser lens 415d, and the front left condenser lens 416d (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each condenser lens 414d, 415d, 416d") relative to the front light guide plate 410, and the light emission modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410 will be described. Figure 19 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, and the lower LED unit 414, the front right LED unit 415, and the front left LED unit 416. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing the optical path of light by each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d. Fig. 21(a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light that can light up the second decorative pattern group 411, and Fig. 21(b) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light that can light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 as a cherry blossom snowstorm pattern imitating multiple cherry blossom petals is formed on both left and right end regions except the center portion of the regular R-shaped portion, a third decorative pattern 412 as a sunfish pattern imitating a sunfish is formed in the center portion of the regular R-shaped portion, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 as a bubble group pattern imitating multiple bubbles is formed on the entire area of the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

In addition, when the front lower LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 irradiates the lower end face of the front lower condenser lens 414d arranged on the lower side of the front light guide plate 410, the light is configured to proceed straight (upward) without being diffused from the upper end face of the front lower condenser lens 414d. Furthermore, when the front right LED 415c provided on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 irradiates the right end face of the front right condenser lens 415d arranged on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, the light is configured to proceed straight (leftward) without being diffused from the left end face of the front right condenser lens 415d. In addition, when light is irradiated onto the left end face of the front left focusing lens 416d disposed on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front left LED 416c disposed on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, the light is configured to travel straight (to the right) from the right end face of the front left focusing lens 416d without being diffused.

The front right LEDs 415c and front left LEDs 416c are positioned so that one front right LED 415c and one front left LED 416c form a pair in the left-right direction (horizontal direction).

In addition, in the front light guide plate 410, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the normal R-shaped portion or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, but none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion. This is because, if a decorative pattern to be displayed by light guide is arranged in the switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, it is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the part arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the part arranged in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, it may appear in an unintended way. Therefore, by configuring the device so that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are placed at the transition point (area) between the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the expression of the light-guiding displayed pattern can be made appropriate, and a performance without discrepancies can be performed.

The arrangement of the decorative pattern at the switching point (hereinafter referred to as "switching point P") of the front light guide plate 410 will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 52, 53, and 54. Figure 52 is a schematic side cross-sectional view of the front light guide plate 410 showing the light guide state of the light guided within the front light guide plate 410 when the front lower LED 414c is turned on, Figure 52(a) is a diagram showing the light guide state within the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c, and Figure 52(b) is a diagram showing the light guide state within the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees from the front lower LED 414c, and 52(c) is a diagram showing a light guide state in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the back of the pachinko machine 10), and FIG. 52(c) is a diagram showing a light guide state in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c in a straight front direction (vertically upward direction of the pachinko machine 10). FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 shown in FIG. 19. Furthermore, FIG. 54 is a perspective view showing a light guide state in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front right LED 415c at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the front of the pachinko machine 10). For the sake of convenience, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 described in FIG. 52 is configured to be illuminated by light incident in the upward direction from the front lower LED 414c, in addition to light incident in the horizontal direction from the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c. Also, in FIG. 54, a case is described in which the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be lit by light incident in the left direction from the front right LED 415c, and a description of light incident in the right direction from the front left LED 416c is omitted, but the light incident in the right direction from the front left LED 416c also has the same action and effect as the light incident in the left direction from the front right LED 415c.

First, as shown in FIG. 52, the front light guide plate 410 is composed of a flat plate portion on the lower side when viewed from the front (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "front lower flat plate portion 410a"), a lower inverted R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front lower flat plate portion 410a (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b"), a regular R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "front regular R-shaped portion 410c"), an upper inverted R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front regular R-shaped portion 410c (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "front upper inverted R-shaped portion"), and an upper flat plate portion formed continuously from the front upper inverted R-shaped portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as the "front upper flat plate portion").

Furthermore, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the back side (lower side in FIG. 52) of the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, and a second decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed on the back side of the front normal R-shaped portion 410c. When the front lower LED 414c is lit, the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 becomes visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in FIG. 52), and when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are lit, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 becomes visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10.

52(a) to 52(c), the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the front of the pachinko machine 10; see FIG. 52(a)), a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the back of the pachinko machine 10; see FIG. 52(b)), and directly ahead (vertically above the pachinko machine 10; see FIG. 52(c)) is guided within the front lower flat plate portion 410a. The fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the back side of the front lower flat plate portion 410a is configured so that, as described above, it does not or does not reflect light in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in Figure 52) due to the light from the front lower LED 414c, and is therefore configured so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is difficult or impossible to see from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 due to the light emitted (guided) from the front lower LED 414c.

The light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees, a downward angle of 45 degrees, and directly in the front direction is repeatedly reflected in the front lower flat plate portion 410a, or reaches the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b directly. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 40 degrees) smaller than the reflection angle (e.g., 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a. On the other hand, the light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 50 degrees) larger than the reflection angle (e.g., 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a.

Then, the light guided through the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b next reaches the front positive R-shaped portion 410c, which is an R-shaped portion in the opposite direction to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front positive R-shaped portion 410c on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 50 degrees) larger than the reflection angle (e.g., 40 degrees) when it collides with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. On the other hand, the light that collides with the surface of the front positive R-shaped portion 410c on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 40 degrees) smaller than the reflection angle (e.g., 50 degrees) when it collides with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b.

That is, the light guided to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c via the front lower flat portion 410a impinges on the front surface of the front light guide plate 410 in a dense manner at the switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c (hereinafter, the switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c may be referred to as the "switching point P").

Here, as shown in Figures 52(a) to 52(c) and 53, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is arranged at the transition point (portion) between the front lower flat portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, while none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 is arranged at the transition point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c.

As mentioned above, this is because the amount of light that strikes the rear surface of the front light guide plate 410 at the transition point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c tends to be sparse, and even if the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 is positioned at the point P, the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 will not emit light appropriately, and there is a risk that the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 will not be visible at the appropriate time from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 is configured to be illuminated (visible) only by light from a specific direction. However, if the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are placed at the point P, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 may be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to irradiation with light from a direction in which they would not normally be illuminated, and there is a risk of inconsistency in the performance content due to lighting at an unintended timing. Therefore, by not placing any of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c, each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 can be made visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at the appropriate timing, and inconsistency in the performance content can be made less likely to occur, making it possible to provide an appropriate game.

Next, as shown in Figure 54, when light irradiated from the front right LED 415c is incident on the right end face of the front lower flat portion 410a of the front light guide plate 410 via the front right focusing lens 415d at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10; see Figure 54), while being guided within the front lower flat portion 410a, the light is repeatedly reflected by the front side and back side of the front light guide plate 410, and is guided straight to the left as viewed from the front, arriving at the left side of the front light guide plate 410. As described above, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 is configured to reflect light from the front right LED 415c in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be clearly seen from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front right LED 415c.

On the other hand, if an LED and a condenser lens are provided on the right side of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b of the front light guide plate 410 as viewed from the front, and light is incident from the right end face of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. See FIG. 54.) When the light guided within the front light guide plate 410 collides with the front side surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left as viewed from the front, but is reflected to the upper side of the front light guide plate 410 as viewed from the front, in accordance with the R-shape. Then, when the reflected light then collides with the back side surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left as viewed from the front, in accordance with the R-shape, but is reflected further upward of the front light guide plate 410. Then, the light is guided to the left side of the front light guide plate as viewed from the front, while repeating the above reflection several times. In such a case, if a decorative pattern is placed near the transition point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c of the front light guide plate 410, there may be a portion where the light is not guided, and the light cannot be guided accurately to the decorative pattern, making it difficult to achieve the desired light emission mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the LED and the condenser lens are not arranged in the lateral direction of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b when viewed from the front, and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b is not irradiated from the lateral direction when viewed from the front, and the decorative pattern is not arranged near the transition point P, so that each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 may be configured not to be placed at the transition point (portion) between the front normal R-shaped portion and the front upper inverted R-shaped portion. By configuring in this way, an effect equivalent to the above effect can be achieved.

It is also possible to configure the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 not to be placed at the transition point (part) between the front lower flat part 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b, or at the transition point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped part and the front upper flat part. Since the amount of light that strikes the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 may be sparse (sparse) at the transition point (part) between the front lower flat part 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped part 410b, or at the transition point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped part and the front upper flat part, the same effect as the above can be achieved by configuring the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 not to be placed at the transition point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped part and the front upper flat part.

Here, referring to Figure 20, the manner in which light is focused by the front downward focusing lens 414d, the front right focusing lens 415d, and the front left focusing lens 416d will be described. As shown in Figure 20, each of the focusing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d has a first end face (the lower end face in Figure 20) that is formed in a straight line shape (or a nearly straight line shape), while the other second end face (the upper end face in Figure 20) that is formed on the opposite side of the first end face is formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes formed by continuing semicircular shapes.

The front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA) like the rear light guide plate 420, and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, light incident on the first end face of each focusing lens 414d, 415d, 416d is emitted in a straight direction (or almost straight; toward the upper side of the drawing in Figure 20) from the second end face. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each condenser lens 414d, 415d, 416d can be emitted in one direction in a condensed state without being diffused from the second end face side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, so that when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 to be displayed are turned on, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are not turned on, and only the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 to be displayed can be appropriately turned on. In particular, when attempting to turn on the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot reliability, if the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and have a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are turned on, there is a risk that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content, and the gameplay will not be realized according to the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d, 416d not to diffuse the light for the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low probability of winning, it is possible to display only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 at the appropriate time, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are provided for the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and are configured to irradiate the respective condensed light. In contrast, for the decorative pattern group with a high expectation of a jackpot, i.e., the third decorative pattern 412, etc., a diffusing lens such as that used for lighting the first decorative pattern group 421 may be adopted instead of a condensing lens. The third decorative pattern 412 is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81 that the player focuses on during the game, so it is necessary to comprehensively irradiate the third decorative pattern 412 with light by the diffusing lens so that the player can clearly recognize the third decorative pattern 412. In addition, when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit, if the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, is lit, a discrepancy in presentation will occur. However, when the third decorative symbol 412 is lit, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412, is lit, the player focuses on the execution of the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and does not pay much attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, so a discrepancy in presentation is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by using the condenser lenses 415d and 416d for the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, and using the diffusing lens for the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, the presentation effect of the front light guide plate 410 can be enhanced and attention to the game can be increased.

Now, referring to FIG. 21, the decorative symbols 411, 412, and 413 that are illuminated in the direction of light guided into the front light guide plate 410 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be illuminated in response to light in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are configured to be illuminated in response to light in the vertical direction (up and down direction) of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. Note that the third decorative symbol 412 that can be illuminated in response to light in the vertical direction when viewed from the front is illuminated by light in the same direction as the second decorative symbol group 411, so for convenience of explanation, the explanation of the third decorative symbol 412 will be omitted and only the second decorative symbol group 411 will be described.

21(a), the bubble pattern 1 forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be able to express the bubble pattern 1 by forming multiple continuous vertical grooves (convex and concave) along the pattern of the bubble pattern in the front light guide plate 410 in the vertical direction as seen from the front. By configuring it in this way, the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 in the horizontal direction (left and right direction) as seen from the front (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) collides with the vertical grooves and is reflected (emitted) to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the bubble pattern is visibly illuminated and displayed from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, even if light (for example, light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) guided in the vertical direction (up and down direction) in front view inside the front light guide plate 410 collides with the vertical groove, it is not reflected or is difficult to be reflected to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is configured so that it is not visible or is difficult to be seen as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

21(b), one cherry blossom pattern forming the second decorative pattern group 411 is configured to be able to be expressed by forming multiple horizontal grooves (concave and convex) in the horizontal direction as seen from the front on the front light guide plate 410 in a continuous manner along the pattern of the cherry blossom pattern. By configuring it in this way, light guided in the vertical direction (up and down direction) as seen from the front inside the front light guide plate 410 (for example, light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) collides with the horizontal grooves and is reflected (emitted) to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the cherry blossom pattern is visibly illuminated and displayed from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, light guided in the lateral direction (left-right direction) when viewed from the front inside the front light guide plate 410 (for example, light emitted from the front left LED 416c) is not reflected or is difficult to be reflected to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 even if it collides with the above-mentioned lateral groove, and is configured so that it cannot be seen or is difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In this way, by configuring one front light guide plate 410 so that the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that can be lit and displayed differ depending on the direction (incident direction) of the light guided into the front light guide plate 410, the multiple decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 can be individually lit and displayed on one front light guide plate 410, improving the expressive power of one light guide plate and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, by using the entire front light guide plate 410 of one unit to perform effects using the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 on the front side and periphery of the drum display device 81, effects can be performed in an area expanded from the location of the drum display device 81. As a result, powerful effects can be performed using the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the front light guide plate 410 may be configured to be able to express two decorative patterns (for example, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) in the same area (for example, the area on the front side of the drum display device 81 (i.e., the front positive R-shaped area)), and one decorative pattern (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413) may be illuminated in response to light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the horizontal direction, and the other decorative pattern (for example, the third decorative pattern 412) may be illuminated in response to light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the vertical direction. However, in order to illuminate different decorative patterns in one area in this way in response to light from multiple directions, the unevenness in that area must be configured with a complex shape, and it is necessary to note that this is more difficult to design than when one decorative pattern is expressed in one area.

Next, referring to Figures 22 and 23, the lighting (presentation) modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 will be described. Figure 22 is a diagram showing the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 displayed on the front light guide plate 410, where Figure 22(a) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are lit with respect to the front light guide plate 410, and Figure 22(b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411 when the front lower LEDs 414c on the right and left ends of the front light guide plate 410 are lit. FIG. 23 shows the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 that are displayed on the front light guide plate 410. FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern 412 when the front lower LEDs 414c in the center part of the front light guide plate 410, excluding the right and left ends, are lit, and FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 when all the front lower LEDs 414c are lit on the front light guide plate 410.

First, as shown in FIG. 22(a), when the front right LED 415c located on the right side of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit in "light blue", the light emitted from the front right LED 415c is focused by the front right focusing lens 415d and is irradiated straight to the left onto the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in a range equivalent to the vertical width of the front right focusing lens 415d. In addition, when the front left LED 416c located to the left of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit in light blue, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c is focused by the front left focusing lens 416d, and is irradiated straight to the right on the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in the same range as the vertical width of the front left focusing lens 416d.

In this case, the light irradiated straight to the left and right by the front right focusing lens 415d and the front left focusing lens 416d onto the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the vertical grooves of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the horizontal light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, causing the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be visibly lit up in "light blue" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410. At this time, the light focused by each focusing lens 415d, 416d does not reach the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are not visible or are difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, light incident from the side of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front right focusing lens 415d and the front left focusing lens 416d is guided straight through the lower flat portion in the left-right direction and is diffused slightly upward when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, reaching the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, but does not or has difficulty reaching the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front right focusing lens 415d and the front left focusing lens 416d illuminates and displays only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 arranged on the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 so that they can be seen from the player's line of sight at the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the horizontal position where the drum display device 81 is disposed), while the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 arranged on the normal R-shaped portion are invisible or difficult to see from the player's line of sight at the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c may be sequentially lit from bottom to top to control the illumination so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 appears to float from below to above the front light guide plate 410.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(b), when the right and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink," the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c is focused by a semicircular portion at the right end and left end of the front lower focusing lens 414d, respectively, and is irradiated straight upward to the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 with a light path width in the same range as the horizontal width of the semicircular portion.

In this case, the light irradiated by the front lower focusing lens 414d straight up on the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the horizontal grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the second decorative pattern group 411 is lit up and displayed visibly in "pink" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right and left ends is focused by the front lower focusing lens 414d, the focused light does not reach the third decorative pattern 412, and the third decorative pattern 412 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In more detail, light incident on the lower side of the right and left parts of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion, and is diffused slightly in the left and right directions when viewed from the front in the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion; however, because the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, the light does not reach the position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the normal R-shaped portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d illuminates and displays only the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged on the right and left parts of the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, making the third decorative pattern 412 arranged in the center of the positive R-shaped portion invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed by vertical grooves is formed on the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, which are the optical path of light irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. However, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is configured in a shape that does not or makes it difficult for light irradiated vertically from the front lower LEDs 414c at the right and left ends to exit to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit up on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is not visible or is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(a), when the front lower LEDs 414c located other than the right end and the left end among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "green", the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c is focused by the semicircular parts other than the right end and the left end of the front lower focusing lens 414d, and is irradiated straight upward to the lower flat part, the lower inverted R-shaped part, the normal R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, and the upper flat part of the front light guide plate 410 with a light path width in the same range as the width of the semicircular part corresponding to the emitting front lower LED 414c.

In this case, the light irradiated by the front lower focusing lens 414d straight up on the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the horizontal groove of the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the third decorative pattern 412 is lit up and displayed visibly in "green" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c located in a position other than the right end and the left end is focused by the front lower focusing lens 414d, the focused light does not reach the second decorative pattern group 411, and the second decorative pattern group 411 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In more detail, light incident on the lower side of the central part of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat portion, and is diffused slightly in the left and right directions when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat portion; however, since the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, the light does not reach the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 in the normal R-shaped portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d illuminates and displays only the third decorative pattern 412 located in the center of the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 so that it can be seen, while the second decorative pattern group 411 located on the right and left sides of the positive R-shaped portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

In addition, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed by vertical grooves is formed on the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, which are the optical path of light that is irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion. However, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is configured in a shape that does not or makes it difficult for light irradiated vertically from the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right and left ends to exit to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit up on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is not visible or is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(b), when the right and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink," the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c is focused by one semicircular portion at the right end and left end of the front lower focusing lens 414d, respectively, and is irradiated straight upward onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in the same range as the horizontal width of the one semicircular portion. In addition, when the front lower LEDs 414c located other than the right and left ends of the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit green, the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c is focused by the semicircular portions other than the right and left ends of the front lower focusing lens 414d, and is irradiated straight upwards on the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 with a light path width in the same range as the width of the semicircular portion corresponding to the emitting front lower LED 414c.

In this case, the light irradiated by the front downward focusing lens 414d in a straight upward direction onto the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the horizontal grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the second decorative pattern group 411 is visibly lit up in "pink" and the third decorative pattern 412 is visibly lit up in "green" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In more detail, the "green" light incident on the lower side of the central part of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat portion, and is diffused slightly in the left and right directions when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat portion; however, because the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, the light does not reach the position of the second decorative pattern 411 in the normal R-shaped portion. In addition, the ``pink'' light incident on the lower side of the right and left parts of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat plate portion, and is diffused slightly in the left and right directions when viewed from the front in the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat plate portion. However, since the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the position of the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, it does not reach the position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the normal R-shaped portion. As a result, when the different decorative patterns 411, 412 arranged in the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are illuminated by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d, even if light is guided to each decorative pattern 411, 412 in a different illumination color, the lights do not mix and each can be illuminated in its own individual display color.

Meanwhile, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are optical paths for light that is irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion. The fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed by vertical grooves is formed on the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, but the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is configured in a shape that does not or makes it difficult for the light irradiated vertically from the front downward LED 414c to exit to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. For this reason, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit up on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is not visible or is difficult to see.

In this way, when multiple decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed on one front light guide plate 410, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is concentrated and irradiated, and the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are configured to be visible or not visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the direction of light incidence. By configuring in this way, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that are desired to be lit and displayed according to the game results are lit at the appropriate timing, and the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that are not desired to be lit and displayed are reliably not lit, so that a performance that utilizes the entire (full surface) of the front light guide plate 410 can be executed while preventing any inconsistency in the performance, thereby enriching the variety of performances and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest probability of winning, is formed in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only with horizontal light. In addition, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which have a higher probability of winning than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are formed in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), and the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are configured to be visible only with vertical light. Here, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the vertical light, the vertical light is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, are turned on, and even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, there is little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize the inconsistency in the presentation and provide the player with a comfortable game.

Next, referring to Figures 24 and 25, the performance mode by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 of the first embodiment will be described. Figure 24 is a diagram showing the performance performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and Figure 24 (a) is a diagram showing the non-illuminated state of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413, and Figure 24 (b) is a diagram showing the non-illuminated state of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, and the third decorative pattern 412 while the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is in the lit state. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81. FIG. 25(a) is a diagram showing the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 in a lit state, while the first decorative pattern group 421 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 in a non-lit state. FIG. 25(b) is a diagram showing the first decorative pattern group 421 in a lit state, while the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 in a non-lit state. Note that in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424, and the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are omitted.

24(a), the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, are in a non-illuminated (off) state. Therefore, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are not visible or are difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

24(a), the display contents (stop state) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed can be seen. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row, and an "8" on the bottom row, and the center reel CR and right reel RR display a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row, and an "8" on the bottom row, which can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation rate, is formed in the front light guide plate 410 at the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible only with horizontal light. Also, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are formed in the front light guide plate 410 at the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with vertical light. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed on the back side of the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion) of the front light guide plate 410, and the drum display device 81 that executes the variable performance of the third pattern, which is the main performance of the game, is arranged. In this way, the drum display device 81 that executes the variable performance of the third pattern, which is the main performance of the game, is arranged on the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion) of the front light guide plate 410, and is configured to display the first decorative pattern group 421, which is the performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance, so that the display results of the variable performance, which is important for the game, and the performance with a high expectation of a jackpot are not hindered, and the performance effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 can be enhanced, and the attention to the game can be increased.

24(b), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are both lit in "light blue", while the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the LEDs 414c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are not lit (turned off). Therefore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, and the third decorative pattern 412 are not visible or are difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

24(b), similarly to FIG. 24(a), the display contents (stop state) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed are visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row, and an "8" on the bottom row, and the center reel CR and right reel RR display a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row, and an "8" on the bottom row, which can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the third pattern variable presentation is performed on the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, a presentation is performed using the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 create an integrated, three-dimensional, powerful presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of each device 81, 410 and increasing attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(a), the right-hand and left-hand extreme front lower LEDs 414c corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink", and the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right-hand and left-hand extreme front lower LEDs 414c corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "green", while the LEDs 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are unlit (off). Therefore, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the first decorative pattern group 421 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are not visible or are difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

25(a), similarly to FIG. 24(a) and FIG. 24(b), the display contents (stop state) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed are visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row, and an "8" on the bottom row, and the center reel CR and right reel RR display a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row, and an "8" on the bottom row, respectively, which can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the third pattern variable presentation is performed on the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, a presentation is performed using the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 create an integrated, three-dimensional, powerful presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of each device 81, 410 and increasing attention to the game.

25(b), the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in "red", "blue" and "green", respectively, while the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are not lit (turned off). Therefore, the first decorative pattern group 421 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are not visible or difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

25(b), similarly to Figs. 24(a), 24(b) and 25(a), the display contents (stop state) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the position where the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed are visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row and an "8" on the bottom row, and the center reel CR and right reel RR display a "7" on the top row, a "blank pattern" on the middle row and an "8" on the bottom row, respectively, which can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the third pattern variable presentation is performed on the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, a presentation using the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420 is performed, and the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420 create an integrated, three-dimensional, powerful presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of each device 81, 420 and increasing attention to the game.

In this way, by combining the third pattern variation presentation on the drum display device 81 with the presentation on the light guide unit 400 having the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, a variety of presentations can be performed, enhancing the presentation effects of the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420, respectively, and increasing attention to the game.

In more detail, by executing a performance related to the third pattern variation performance (e.g., the expectation of a jackpot) on the front side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) of the drum display device 81 where the third pattern variation performance is executed and in its surrounding areas (the top, bottom, left and right areas when viewed from the front of the display area of the drum display device 81), the performance area of the third pattern variation performance can be expanded two-dimensionally and three-dimensionally, and a powerful third pattern variation performance can be executed.

In addition, when configuring the performance indicating the probability of winning a jackpot in a variable performance to be executable in multiple patterns, the performances with a low probability of winning a jackpot (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while the performances with a high probability of winning a jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on the other light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420). This prevents the performances with a high probability of winning a jackpot from being lit up due to noise or the viewing angle of the player, etc., when a performance with a low probability of winning a jackpot is executed, and a performance without discrepancies can be executed.

In more detail, if a performance with a high jackpot expectation (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) and a performance with a low jackpot expectation (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) are provided on the same light guide plate, when trying to light up a performance with a low jackpot expectation, if the player's viewing position with respect to the light guide plate differs depending on the player's height or posture, depending on the viewing angle, it may appear as if a performance with a high jackpot expectation is being lit up by the light for lighting the performance with a low jackpot expectation. If such an event occurs, the player will expect a jackpot, even though the jackpot expectation of the variable performance of the third pattern is low, as if a performance with a high jackpot expectation has been executed, but on the other hand, because a jackpot does not occur in the variable performance, the player may mistakenly believe that the performance with a high jackpot expectation is low.

Therefore, when configuring the performance indicating the probability of winning a jackpot in a variable performance to be executable in multiple patterns, the performances with a low probability of winning a jackpot (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while the performances with a high probability of winning a jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on the other light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420). This prevents misunderstandings caused by noise or differences in viewing position depending on the player's height or posture when executing a performance with a low probability of winning a jackpot, and provides the player with a performance that matches the design values.

Furthermore, when multiple light guide plates 410, 420 are used to configure multiple patterns of effects that indicate the likelihood of a jackpot in a variable effect, the focusing lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are utilized in one light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front light guide plate 410) to configure multiple types of effects (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) to be individually executable, and the diffusing lenses 423, 425 are employed in the other light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420) to configure one effect (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) to be executable in a variety of ways. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute effects that are greater than the number of light guide plates 410, 420, and to enrich the variety of effects and increase attention to the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and is primarily a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

The MPU 201 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to various solenoids 209, including the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, a large prize opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the large prize opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a normal electric solenoid for driving the normal electric role 64c, and the like, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing lots for jackpots for each special symbol, setting the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, setting the variable presentation on the drum display device 81, drawing lots for the display results of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, and setting the jackpot probability for each special symbol. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 also stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reserved number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Now, referring to FIG. 27, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, the setting of the variable performance of the drum display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. In addition, in the explanation of the various counters, we will also explain the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 32.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the variable presentation setting of the drum display device 81 use a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type of the jackpot symbol, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the presentation mode of the variable presentation, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 4 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 39), and the updated values are appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Details will be described later, but the RAM 203 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the second special pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 64a. In addition, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting hole 64b.

Here, referring to FIG. 28(a), the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 28(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot random number table 202a in the first embodiment is divided into two types for each setting value: one for a low probability state that is used when the game state is a low probability state of a special pattern in which the game state is a "normal game state" or a "time-saving state", and one for a high probability state that is used when the game state is a "probability-varying state" that is a high probability state of a special pattern in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state of a special pattern.

The number of jackpot random number values included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently for each set value. Also, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values required to transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated for by the number of miss random number values corresponding to misses. In this way, by making the number of jackpot random number values different depending on the game state, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 50, and the values "0 to 49" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") of each special symbol with a set value of "1" is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5/100 (i.e., 0.5%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and the values "0 to 499" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol with a set value of "1" is 500/10000 = 5/100 (i.e., 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times easier to win than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9950 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values are specified (set) as "50 to 9999" in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in a high probability state is the remaining 9500 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values are specified (set) as "500 to 9999" in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "1" is set to 9950/10000 = 99.5/100 (i.e., 99.5%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol is set to 9500/10000 = 95/100 (i.e., 95%).

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the values "0 to 51" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a set value of "2" is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52/100 (i.e., 0.52%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "2", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 520, and the values "0 to 519" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "2" is 520/10000 = 5.2/100 (i.e., 5.2%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times easier to win than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9948 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "52 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the high probability state is the remaining 9480 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "520 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "2" is set to 9948/10000 = 99.48/100 (i.e., 99.48%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol is set to 9480/10000 = 94.8/100 (i.e., 94.8%).

The setting value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a therefore has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the values "0 to 53" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a set value of "3" is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54/100 (i.e., 0.54%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 540, and the values "0 to 539" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol with a set value of "3" is 540/10000 = 5.4/100 (i.e., 5.4%), and the high probability state of the special symbols is set to be 10 times easier to win than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9946 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "54 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the high probability state is the remaining 9460 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "540 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "3" is set to 9946/10000 = 99.46/100 (i.e., 99.46%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol is set to 9460/10000 = 94.6/100 (i.e., 94.6%).

The setting value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a therefore has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "2".

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the values "0 to 55" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a set value of "4" is set to be 56/10000 = 0.56/100 (i.e., 0.56%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 560, and the values "0 to 559" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol with a set value of "4" is 560/10000 = 5.6/100 (i.e., 5.6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times easier to win than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9944 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "56 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the high probability state is the remaining 9440 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "560 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "4" is set to 9944/10000 = 99.44/100 (i.e., 99.44%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol is set to 9440/10000 = 94.4/100 (i.e., 94.4%).

The setting value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a therefore has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "3".

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the values "0 to 57" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a set value of "5" is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58/100 (i.e., 0.58%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 580, and the values "0 to 579" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol with a set value of "5" is 580/10000 = 5.8/100 (i.e., 5.8%), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 10 times easier to win than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "58 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the high probability state is the remaining 9420 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "580 to 9999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "5" is set to 9942/10000 = 99.42/100 (i.e., 99.42%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol is set to 9420/10000 = 94.2/100 (i.e., 94.2%).

The setting value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a therefore has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "4".

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the values "0 to 59" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a set value of "6" is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6/100 (i.e., 0.6%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that will result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 600, and the values "0 to 599" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol with a set value of "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (i.e., 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbols is set to be 10 times easier to win than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9940 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values are specified (set) as "60 to 9999" in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be a miss in the high probability state is the remaining 9400 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values are specified (set) as "600 to 9999" in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-saving state") of each special symbol with a setting value of "6" is set to 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (i.e., 99.4%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") of each special symbol is set to 9400/10000 = 94/100 (i.e., 94%).

The setting value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a therefore has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the setting value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "5".

In this way, by changing the probability of winning a jackpot for each probability setting value and changing the ease of winning a jackpot, it is possible to change the payout rate for each probability setting value, and to change the amount of game value that can be awarded to a player. This increases the variety of gameplay that can be played on the pachinko machine 10, and increases the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will continue. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)).

Then, when the ball enters the first starting hole 64a, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved area, which is the same as the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a. Also, when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved area, which is the same as the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), that is, if it is a random number that results in a miss (miss random number value), the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the type of stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a miss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), the variation pattern in the variable presentation and the stop type will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. This jackpot type table 202b is commonly referenced in the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 28(b). FIG. 28(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (common) stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which jackpot types are associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the types of jackpots include a "10R sure-variable jackpot" that corresponds to a "probability-changing state" in which the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol and the probability of a hit with a normal symbol are both in a high probability state until the next jackpot after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, a "5R sure-variable jackpot" that corresponds to a "probability-changing state" in which the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol and the probability of a hit with a normal symbol are both in a high probability state until the next jackpot after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, and a "10R normal jackpot" that corresponds to a "time-shortened state" in which the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is in a low probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines that jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in FIG. 28(b), the jackpot type counter C2 value "0 to 39" corresponds to a "10R special jackpot", the jackpot type counter C2 value "40 to 59" corresponds to a "5R special jackpot", and the jackpot type counter C2 value "60 to 99" corresponds to a "10R normal jackpot".

That is, in the lottery for each special symbol, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, or the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the first reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2 of the same first reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", the jackpot type is determined to be "10R certain jackpot", if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "45", the jackpot type is determined to be "5R certain jackpot", and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "78", the jackpot type is determined to be "10R normal jackpot".

Therefore, if you win a jackpot with the dynamic display of each special symbol, the winning percentages are 40% for the "10R special jackpot" type, 20% for the "5R special jackpot" type, and 40% for the "10R regular jackpot" type.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is set appropriately for each machine type. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is specified in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

The probability of a jackpot type being selected may be changed depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 27, we will continue to explain the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e. "99").

In the first embodiment, the general presentation mode of the variable presentation displayed on the drum display device 81 at the time of a big win or a miss is selected based on the number of reserved variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, five presentation modes are selected: a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode in which no "reach display" occurs, a "normal reach" presentation mode in which only the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed as a "reach display", a "super reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "super reach", and a "special reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of a "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "special reach".

Here, each of the presentation modes will be explained in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode may be collectively referred to as "non-reach" presentation mode) are presentation modes in which, after a "high-speed change" variable element in which the three reels LR, CR, and RR (see FIG. 4) are changed as a special symbol change display is performed, the same third symbol does not stop on any of the activated lines of the two reels that stop first (for example, the left reel LR and the right reel RR), and no "reach display" is generated.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element refers to, for example, a variable element in which the third symbol displayed on each reel LR, CR, and RR is rotated and scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed during the third symbol fluctuation presentation performed on the drum display device 81. In this "high-speed fluctuation," the third symbol is fluctuated so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and a presentation is executed in which the stopped results of the previously stopped and displayed fluctuation presentation are randomly mixed up (shuffled).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed except for a specific presentation mode (the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode).

The "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element refers to a variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a slow speed that is visible to the player after the "fast-speed fluctuation" variable element in the third symbol fluctuation performance performed by the drum display device 81. In this "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, each reel LR, CR, and RR are stopped and displayed in order while the player is made to recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops on the two pattern rows that are stopped and displayed first (for example, the left reel LR and the right reel RR), it is considered that a "reach display" has occurred and the variable element develops into a "normal reach" variable element, while if different third symbols stop on the two reels LR and RR that are stopped and displayed first, the remaining reel CR is stopped and the fluctuation performance is terminated. Details of the "fast-speed fluctuation" variable element and each variable element including the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed first, followed by the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, with each reel LR, CR, and RR stopping in turn, and different third symbols stopping on the two reels LR and RR that stop first, and the remaining reel CR stopping, ending the first variable presentation. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, each reel LR, CR, and RR stop simultaneously, and different third symbols stopping on the two reels LR, CR, and RR (for example, the two reels LR and RR that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode), the other reel CR also stopping, ending the first variable presentation.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "reach display" in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed immediately after the same third pattern stops on the two reels LR and RR that are stopped first in the third pattern variation presentation on the drum display device 81, and does not develop into other "reach displays", i.e., variable elements of the "super reach" or "special reach" variable elements.

More specifically, the variable element of a "normal reach" is that the center reel CR scrolls slowly, and when the variation starts, it moves at the same slow speed until it reaches a predetermined stopping pattern, and when it reaches that stopping pattern, it stops.

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are executed.

More specifically, the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are scrolled at an even slower speed (for example, ultra-slow scrolling or frame-by-frame scrolling) than the slow scrolling of the variable elements of a "Normal Reach", and the elements scroll at this slow speed until they reach a predetermined stopping pattern at the start of the fluctuation, and then stop when they reach that stopping pattern.

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" develop into the variable elements of a "Special Reach."

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, when the ball enters the first start port 64a, it is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64a. Also, when the ball enters the second start port 64b, it is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 64b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that references the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to differ depending on whether the variable performance is successful, the current game state, and the number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently on hold. In other words, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected depending on the number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently on hold, etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variable presentation, first, based on the reserved number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, one of the stop pattern tables 202d is selected that corresponds to the success or failure of the variable presentation, the current game state, and the current number of variable presentations (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a presentation mode that is a rough mode of the variable presentation is selected. After that, based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable presentation is determined.

These multiple stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the presentation mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason for providing multiple stop pattern tables 202d is to change the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the variable presentation depending on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the game status, and the number of reserved balls. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode is changed depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the acquired third pattern, (2) whether the current game status of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability variable state," "time shortening state," or "normal game status," and (3) how many reserved balls there are for the reserved variable presentation.

The first reason for this is to change the expectation of a jackpot for each presentation mode. That is, by configuring the stop patterns, i.e., the ratio of selection of the "non-reach" presentation mode, the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode, to be different between when the jackpot lottery is won and when it is lost, the expectation of a jackpot is changed for each presentation mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" presentation mode or the "normal reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected.

By configuring it in this way, the "Super Reach" presentation mode and the "Special Reach" presentation mode can be made to be presentations that are easy to hit, while the "Normal Reach" presentation mode and the "Non-Reach" presentation mode can be made to be presentations that are difficult to hit or that do not result in a hit, making it possible to differentiate the likelihood of a hit for each presentation mode. Therefore, when a presentation that is easy to hit appears in a variable presentation, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a hit occurring while that presentation that is easy to hit is being performed, increasing the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, the device is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) that is the general content of the variable performance based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, when the obtained lottery result is a miss, the device is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) of the variable performance based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it difficult to select a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when the lottery result of the third symbol is notified to the player in the variable performance, if a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable performance is likely to produce a jackpot, and if a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable performance is unlikely to produce a jackpot. By setting a difference in the expected value of a jackpot for each performance mode (stop pattern), the interest in the game can be increased during the execution of the variable performance.

The second reason is to minimize the number of wasted balls (so-called overflow winnings resulting in no special symbol being drawn) that result from a ball entering the first starting hole 64a when the number of waiting times for the first special symbol variable performance has reached its upper limit, or a ball entering the second starting hole 64b when the number of waiting times for the second special symbol variable performance has reached its upper limit.

To be more specific, the number of waiting times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol variable performance is set to a maximum of four times, and the variable performance is executed for at least a certain time, so that in the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 64b in the "probability variable state" and the "time shortened state", the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, the ball will frequently enter the second starting hole 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has been reached, and even if the ball enters the second starting hole 64b, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. Also, in the "normal game state", if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected when the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol has been reached, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is not consumed during the execution of the variable performance, so that even if a ball enters the first starting hole 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. When this happens, the player will determine that they will not gain any gaming value by putting the ball into the first starting hole 64a, and will stop shooting balls and suspend play until the variable performance is over and they can obtain the reserved balls again. If play is suspended, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will have an impact on the business of the amusement parlor.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d, which tends to select a short variable time, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls for the third pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is likely to be reached, or in a number of reserved balls close to (or equal to) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to suppress balls from entering the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that the execution time is set long and the end of the variable performance is delayed, so that the state in which the variable performance is being executed can be maintained for a long time. To be more specific, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small (none), the next variable performance cannot be started unless a new ball is inserted into either the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b within the variable time of the variable performance being executed, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the drum display device 81. If the variable performance is not performed on the drum display device 81 even though the player is playing by firing a ball, the player cannot get the interest related to the lottery for the big win that the player is looking for, and loses interest in the game. In addition, because the variable performance is not performed on the drum display device 81, the player may recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is one in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b, and may judge that it is a machine in which it is difficult to obtain game value, and may stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d, which is likely to select a long variable time, when the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is small. This makes it difficult for a situation to occur in which the variable presentation is not being performed on the drum display device 81, and makes it possible to maintain the execution state of the variable presentation on the drum display device 81 for a long time.

Here, the details of the reserved number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the reserved number table 202c in schematic form. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a variable performance is performed based on the ball entering the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b, the reserved number table 202c is referenced based on the success or failure of the variable performance, the game state at that time, and the total reserved number of the variable performance of the special chart 1 and the special chart 2 at that time, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected. Then, the general performance mode of the variable performance is determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c in FIG. 29, when a miss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3", or when a miss is extracted in the "probability fluctuating state" or "time shortening state" and the total number of reserved balls is "1", table A 202d1 (see FIG. 30(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when a miss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of reserved balls is "4 to 8", or when a miss is extracted in the "probability fluctuating state" or "time shortening state" and the number of reserved balls is "2 to 8", table B 202d2 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the game state (i.e., "normal game state," "probability fluctuation state," or "time-saving state") and the number of reserved balls (i.e., 1 to 8), table C 202d3 (see FIG. 30(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In other words, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (table C 202d3) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls or game status at that time, and only if no jackpot is won (i.e., if there is a miss), the stop pattern table 202d (table A 202d1 or table B 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and game status at that time.

In addition, even when a jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when a jackpot is won and there are many reserved balls, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to select a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, a "super reach" presentation mode or a "special reach" presentation mode in which the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is 5 seconds).

In this case, in each performance mode in which the "reach display" is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a variable performance is started with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special pattern being 4, even if the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed for 5 seconds, at the time when the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends (the time when it is recognized as the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element), a "reach display" may occur in that variable performance. Therefore, even if a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, by configuring so that a performance mode in which a "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is executed, it is possible to make it unclear at the time when the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed whether the variable performance will be a big hit or a miss.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic example of an A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, FIG. 30(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic example of a B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 30(c) is a diagram that shows a schematic example of a C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), in A table 202d1 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98" and "99". Note that in A table 202d1, no value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(b), in table B 202d2 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98, 99". Note that in table B 202d2, no value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is set not to be selected.

That is, in table A 202d1, the selection rates are set to be 75% for the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode. In addition, in table B 202d2, the selection rates are set to be 75% for the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

Therefore, in table A 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected, and in table B 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode.

Therefore, it can be said that table A 202d1 is more likely to have a relatively long variable effect time when selected compared to table B 202d2. In other words, table B 202d2 is more likely to have a relatively short variable effect time when selected compared to table A 202d1.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode are set equally for table A 202d1 and table B 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the presentation mode of the variable performance is selected based on the number of reserved balls for the pending variable performance. For example, when there are many reserved balls for the variable performance, a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode with a short variable performance time is selected. This makes it possible to increase the execution efficiency of the variable performance by shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times the variable performance is executed when there are many reserved balls for the variable performance.

Also, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small, a "non-reach (long)" performance mode with a longer variable performance time than the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected in order to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. This allows the "non-reach (long)" performance mode with a longer variable performance time to be performed than when the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected, making it easier to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and by increasing the possibility of a new start winning occurring during the execution time of the variable performance on the drum display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is being executed can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, when selecting the presentation mode for a losing variable presentation, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is configured to be different, but the presentation mode is configured to be substantially the same when determining the variable presentation based on the ball entering the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b and when determining the variable presentation based on the start of the variable presentation based on the ball entering the hole.

Specifically, in the case of a losing variable presentation, either A table 202d1 or B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation, but the values of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode are the same in A table 202d1 and B table 202d2, and the values of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the other presentation modes are also set to the same.

In other words, the only difference is whether a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable presentation, so essentially the same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning and the presentation mode selected at the start of the variable presentation are essentially the same presentation mode, even if the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). As a result, even if a pre-reading notice is made based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a presentation in which there is no discrepancy with the contents of the pre-reading notice in the variable presentation that is the subject of the pre-reading notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30(c), in C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "4", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "40" to "99". Note that C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a jackpot, and a "reach display" always occurs, so none of the "non-reach" presentation modes are selected.

That is, in table C 202d3, the selection rates are set to be 5% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 35% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 60% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

Therefore, in the variable presentation when a jackpot is won, the selection rate is set to be "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode, and in the variable presentation when a loss occurs, the selection rate is set to be "Normal Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Special Reach" presentation mode. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot when each "reach display" appears is configured so that the probability of a jackpot display result appearing increases in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode. This makes it possible to show the player the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the type of presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the player can feel the excitement of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed.

As described above, by determining the presentation mode of the variable performance to be executed based on whether the variable performance is successful, the game state at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable performance at that time, it is possible to select a presentation mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable performance by shortening the execution time of the variable performance and increasing the number of times the variable performance is executed based on the situation in which the game is being played.

When the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the "high-speed change" performance element of each "reach display" is shortened. Also, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the "slow change" performance element is omitted in each performance mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each performance mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable performance. However, when the selection rate of each performance mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable performance, the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding to execute the pre-reading notice may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time the variable performance that is the target of the pre-reading notice is executed. In such a case, a process is required to maintain consistency between the contents of the pre-reading notice and the contents of the variable performance, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 9", for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the first starting hole 64a, it is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a. In addition, when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b, it is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation performance. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the detailed variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the variation performance. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the drum display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and also determine whether or not to execute the preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation presentation and determines only the variation time. By configuring it in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance lottery required to execute the variation presentation, so the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation presentation can be reduced. In addition, the main control device 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation presentation, so the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can increase the freedom to select the variable presentation by determining the detailed pattern of the variable presentation based on the variable time (rough variable pattern) determined by the main control device 110. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variable presentation at any time in response to the changes, and an appropriate presentation can be executed according to the game state.

Now, referring to Figures 31 and 32, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, there are provided a loss variation pattern table 202e1 which is used in common in all game states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and a jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 which is used in common in all game states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpots.

Figure 31 is a diagram showing an example of a loss variation pattern table 202e1 stored in ROM 202, and Figure 32 is a diagram showing an example of a big win variation pattern table 202e2 stored in ROM 202. As shown in Figures 31 and 32, each variation pattern table 202e1, 202e2 is grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the presentation modes at the time of a miss are divided into "E0: Non-reach (long)" which is referenced when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is determined, "E1: Non-reach (short)" which is referenced when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is determined, "E2: Normal reach" which is referenced when the "normal reach" presentation mode is determined, "E3: Super reach" which is referenced when the "super reach" presentation mode is determined, and "E4: Special reach" which is referenced when the "special reach" presentation mode is determined. In addition, the presentation modes at the time of a jackpot are divided into "E5: Normal reach" which is referenced when the "normal reach" presentation mode is determined, "E6: Super reach" which is referenced when the "super reach" presentation mode is determined, and "E7: Special reach" which is referenced when the "special reach" presentation mode is determined. The values of the variation type counter CS1 are then associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), or when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), that is, when the value is a loss in either case, the reserved number table 202c is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the reserved ball number at that time, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referenced in the loss variable pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In that group of the losing variation pattern table 202e1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the variation pattern for the variation performance held in that holding area.

Here, we will explain each variable element that makes up the variable pattern. A variable element is a part of one variable performance, and one variable performance is composed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements provided are a "high-speed variable" variable element, a "low-speed variable" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, and a "re-variation" variable element.

As mentioned above, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls (rotates) at such a high speed that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance when a "non-reach (short)" performance mode or the like is selected (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"), and is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance when a "non-reach (long)" performance mode or the like is selected (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). Note that when this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element described below is started (executed), or the variable performance ends as it is.

The "slow fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that starts after the execution of the "high speed fluctuation" variable element of "5 seconds" or "10 seconds", and scrolls the third symbol visibly to show whether or not a "reach display" will occur. This "slow fluctuation" variable element is not executed if the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected, and is executed "5 seconds" after the "high speed fluctuation" variable element if a presentation mode other than the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (for example, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode) is selected.

In other words, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "slow fluctuation" variable element is performed, causing the final stopped reel of the drum display device 81 (in the first embodiment, the middle reel CR (see Figure 4)) to stop while decelerating, whereas in the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, each reel LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81 is configured to stop rapidly (so-called a perfect stop) without going through the "slow fluctuation" variable element. Note that when this "slow fluctuation" variable element ends, the variable presentation is configured to end as is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern that includes a "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" variable element and a "5-second" "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. Also, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern that includes only a "5-second" "high-speed fluctuation" variable element.

A "pseudo fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that executes a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element again when a predetermined stop is provisionally displayed in the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. That is, in the "slow fluctuation" variable element, when the right reel RR stops, a third symbol with a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is displayed on one of the active lines (for example, the third symbol "7" is displayed on the left reel LR and the third symbol "8" is displayed on the right reel RR), and then, when the center reel CR stops, a third symbol identical to the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is displayed (for example, the third symbol "7" is displayed on the left reel LR and center reel CR, and the third symbol "8" is displayed on the right reel RR (i.e., the stopping number "778" corresponds to this case. Hereinafter, this combination is referred to as "chance number pattern"), the "slow twirling" variable element becomes a "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, the execution symbol (reserved symbol) displayed in the reserved display section Db is not consumed, and the variable performance continues.

This "pseudo fluctuation" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" like the "slow fluctuation" variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element is executed, a symbol that always generates a "reach display" (for example, a situation in which the third symbol displayed in a stopped state on the left reel LR and the right reel RR are the same and the fluctuation of the center reel CR continues. Hereinafter, this will be referred to as a "reach forming symbol") is displayed, and the variable element is configured to develop into a "normal reach" variable element, which will be described later. Note that the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element may be configured to end the variable performance by displaying a "miss display" without displaying a "reach forming symbol".

Therefore, when a chance symbol is displayed as a variable element of this "pseudo fluctuation" that is the same as the variable element of the "slow fluctuation", the variable element of the "fast fluctuation" starts again from that chance symbol, and an effect is executed as if the fluctuation effect had started once more.

In the first embodiment, the variable performance is configured to be able to execute a maximum of one "pseudo consecutive" performance. Note that the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" may be executed multiple times in one variable performance.

The "normal reach" variable element is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the fluctuation results of the remaining reel CR when the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "reach forming symbol") is displayed stopped on the active line of either of the two reels LR or RR that stop first in the "slow fluctuation" variable element. This "normal reach" variable element occurs "5 seconds" after the "slow fluctuation" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "super reach", a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "special reach", and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed first and then a "re-variation" variable element is executed.

The "Super Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining reel CR fluctuations continue, and a predetermined effect (for example, a "battle effect") is performed on the drum display device 81 to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is first displayed and then the variable element of "re-variation" is executed.

The "Special Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining reel CR fluctuations continue, and a special effect (for example, a "race effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect is performed on the drum display device 81 to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed and then "varies again."

It is configured so that after the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed, they develop into the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach". However, instead of this configuration, when the reach forming symbol stops after "slow fluctuation", it may be configured so that it develops straight into the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach" without going through the variable elements of the "normal reach". It may also be configured so that the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed after the variable elements of the "super reach" are executed.

The "re-change" variable element is a variable element that develops and is executed after a "miss display" appears once in any of the "reach displays", causing a "jackpot display" to appear. This "re-change" variable element occurs "5 seconds" after any of the "reach displays".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after the execution of the "re-variation" variable element.

The "re-change" variable element is configured to occur only when a jackpot game is won. In other words, in the case of a "miss display", the "re-change" variable element is configured not to be executed. This is because the "re-change" variable element is a variable element that changes a temporarily stopped "miss display" to one of the "jackpot displays", and if it is executed in the case of a "miss display" where a jackpot has not been won, a discrepancy in presentation will occur. Therefore, the "re-change" variable element is configured to be selected only in the jackpot variable pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 32), and not in the miss variable pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 31, in the failure fluctuation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when the first special pattern and the second special pattern fail, "E0: Non-reach (long)" has one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time; hereinafter, it is of course possible to replace "fluctuation pattern" with "fluctuation time") prepared for "E0: Non-reach (long)" with a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" consisting of "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: Non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'Fast fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow fluctuation'", and only "Fluctuation element of 'Fast fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

In other words, in any game state, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when executing the first special pattern and second special pattern variation presentation, the "variation element of "fast variation (long)" + "slow variation" variable element" is associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode in the first special pattern and second special pattern variation presentation, the variation pattern that is always selected is "variation element of "fast variation (long)" + "slow variation" variable element."

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, "E1: Non-reach (short)" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with "only the fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'" with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds".

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: Non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only the fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'", and it is set so that only "only the fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'" can be selected.

In other words, in any game state, when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when executing the first special pattern and second special pattern variation presentation, "only the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element" is associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode in the first special pattern and second special pattern variation presentation, "only the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, for "E2: normal reach", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'normal reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" and "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'pseudo fluctuation' + "high-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'normal reach'" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 6" for "Fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach", and "7 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "pseudo fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation factor of "slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "normal reach".

In other words, in any game state, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when executing the variation presentation of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the variation pattern of "variable elements of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable elements of "slow-speed variation" + variable elements of "normal reach"" is set to be selected 70%, and the variation pattern of "variable elements of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable elements of "pseudo variation" + variable elements of "high-speed variation (short)" + variable elements of "slow-speed variation" + variable elements of "normal reach"" is set to be selected 30% of the time.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected when a miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation elements is likely to be selected (70% of the time). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation elements" to also be selected, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which a miss can occur from any of the fluctuation patterns.

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, for "E3: Super Reach", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" and "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 7" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Super Reach", and "8, 9" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Super Reach".

In other words, in any game state, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when executing the variation presentation of the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the variation pattern of "Fast variation (long)" + "Slow variation" + "Super Reach" variation elements" is set to be selected 80%, and the variation pattern of "Fast variation (long)" + "Pseudo variation" + "Fast variation (short)" + "Slow variation" + "Super Reach" variation elements" is set to be selected 20% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when a miss occurs, the "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach" fluctuation factors" pattern is likely to be selected (80% of the time). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern to be selected as "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach" fluctuation factors", it is possible to provide a gameplay in which a miss can occur from any of the fluctuation patterns.

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, for "E4: Special Reach", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" and "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "50 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 8" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Special Reach", and "9" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Pseudo fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Special Reach".

In other words, in any game state, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when executing the first special pattern and second special pattern variation presentation, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Special Reach' variation element" is set to be selected 90%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Pseudo variation' variation element + 'High-speed variation (short)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Special Reach' variation element" is set to be selected 10% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when a miss occurs, the "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Special Reach" fluctuation factors" pattern is likely to be selected (90% of the time). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern to be selected as "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Special Reach" fluctuation factors", it is possible to provide a gameplay in which a miss can occur from any of the fluctuation patterns.

Note that the specified variation pattern when a miss occurs (for example, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode) is determined as the variation pattern as is, so the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. Also, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, multiple variation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selecting whether or not to display a preview, etc.).

Next, referring to FIG. 32, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot, and when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot, the reserved number table 202c is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202d based on the game state at that time and the reserved ball number at that time, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above-mentioned stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In that group of jackpot fluctuation pattern tables 202e2, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation performance held in that holding area.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Normal Reach" has a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element," a total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element," and a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation" Four selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element" and "Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds. A value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E5: normal reach" is "0" for "Fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Fluctuation factor of "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach"", "1, 2" for "Fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation"", "3 to 5" for "Fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach"", and "6 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation"".

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed in any game state, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'low-speed variation' variation element + 'normal reach' variation element" is 10%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'low-speed variation' variation element + 'normal reach' variation element + 're-variation' variation element" is 10%. It is set to be selected at the following rates: 20%, the fluctuation pattern of "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "fast fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element" is selected at 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "fast fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" is selected at 40%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the variation pattern "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'Slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element + 'Re-fluctuation' variable element" is likely to be selected (40% of the total). In addition, the variation patterns "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element", "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element + 'Re-fluctuation' variable element", and "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'Slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element" are also configured to be selected, providing gameplay in which a jackpot can be expected from any of the variation patterns.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super Reach" has a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation element," a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element," and a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation" There are four selectable fluctuation patterns: "Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation element" and "Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Fluctuation element of "Fast fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "45 seconds. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E6: Super Reach" is "0, 1" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super Reach" fluctuation element", "2 to 4" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Super Reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element", "5, 6" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Super Reach" fluctuation element", and "7 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Super Reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed in any game state, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Super Reach' variation element" is 20%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Super Reach' variation element + 'Re-variation' variation element" is 40%. It is set to select the following patterns at a rate of 30%, 20% for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Fast Fluctuation (Short)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Super Reach" fluctuation element, and 30% for the "Fast Fluctuation (Long)" fluctuation element + "Pseudo Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Fast Fluctuation (Short)" fluctuation element + "Slow Fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Super Reach" fluctuation element + "Re-Fluctuation" fluctuation element.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the following variation patterns are likely to be selected (30% of the total): "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation" or "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation". Also, by configuring the game to select each of the variation patterns: "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach", or "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach"", it is possible to provide a game that allows players to expect a jackpot from any of the variation patterns.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special Reach" has a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" and includes "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Special Reach" fluctuation elements, "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Special Reach" fluctuation elements + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "45 seconds", and "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation elements with a total fluctuation time of "50 seconds". There are four selectable fluctuation patterns: "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation element" and "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "55 seconds. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E7: Special Reach" is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation element", "3, 4" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element", "5 to 7" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element", and "8, 9" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed in any game state, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Special Reach' variation element" is 30%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Special Reach' variation element + 'Re-variation' variation element" is 10%. The pattern is set to be selected at the following rates: 20%; "Fluctuation factor of 'Fast fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fast fluctuation (short)' + "Slow fluctuation' + "Special reach'" fluctuation factor" pattern is selected at 30%; and "Fluctuation factor of 'Fast fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fast fluctuation (short)' + "Slow fluctuation' + "Special reach'" fluctuation factor + "Re-fluctuation'" fluctuation factor" pattern is selected at 20%.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the variation patterns "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'low-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Special Reach' variable element" or "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Special Reach' variable element" are likely to be selected (both 30% of the total). Also, by configuring the variation patterns "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Special Reach' variable element + 're-fluctuation' variable element" or "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'Special Reach' variable element + 're-fluctuation' variable element" to be selected, it is possible to provide a game in which a jackpot can be expected from any of the variation patterns.

In this way, when a jackpot is won, a relatively long variation pattern is likely to be selected, and the content of the variation presentation when a jackpot occurs is enhanced, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Also, when a jackpot is not won, that is, when a miss occurs, a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected, and the content of the variation presentation when a miss occurs is shortened, allowing the variation presentation to be consumed efficiently.

Returning to Figure 27, we will continue the explanation. The regular random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and returns to "0" after it reaches a maximum value (i.e. "99"). Also, when the regular random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the regular random number counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 39).

The value of the regular hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is stored in one of the regular reserve areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular reserve ball storage area (not shown) of RAM 203. Then, the data is shifted to the regular reserve ball execution area (not shown) in the order in which it was stored in the regular reserve ball storage area, and a hit determination is made for the value of the regular hit random number counter C4 stored in the regular reserve ball execution area.

The random number value for a normal symbol winning is set by a normal symbol winning random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (e.g., 1/100 in a low probability state, 50/100 in a high probability state, etc.), and a win is determined when the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 matches the random number value for a winning set by the normal symbol winning random number table. Then, a normal symbol variable table (not shown) is referenced according to the game state, and the variable display time for the normal symbol is set (e.g., 30 seconds when the winning assistance function is not activated, 3 seconds when the winning assistance function is activated, etc.), and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a "○" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (normal symbol) lit up. Then, depending on the game status, an electric role opening table (not shown) is referenced, and the opening time of the normal electric role 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning assistance function is not activated, and 5 seconds when the winning assistance function is activated), and during this opening time, the normal electric role 64c is opened, during which time the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the regular winning counter C4 stored in the regular winning reserve area does not match the value of the random number that is set as a winning number by the regular winning random number table (not shown), it is determined to be a loss. Then, the regular winning variable table (not shown) is referenced according to the game status to set the variable display time, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the regular symbol display device 83, an "X" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (regular symbol).

Returning to FIG. 26, the explanation will continue. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 27, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (I/O) values, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 39) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 37) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved ball count counter 203a, a second reserved ball count counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, and a reserved ball execution area 203f.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the first special pattern (variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern performed on the drum display device 81) performed on the special pattern display device 37 up to a maximum of four times, based on the entry of a ball into the first start hole 64a (hereinafter, the entry of a ball into the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b may be referred to as a "start entry") detected during a timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) that is executed periodically every 4 milliseconds.

This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning is detected in the first start hole 64a and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S303 in FIG. 41). Meanwhile, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern is executed (see S408 in FIG. 42).

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (the variable presentation of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern displayed on the drum display device 81) up to a maximum of four times based on the start winning into the second start hole 64b detected during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) that is executed periodically every 4 milliseconds.

Like the first reserved ball counter 203a, the second reserved ball counter 203b is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning is detected in the second start hole 64b and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern increases, the counter is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value of "4" (see S307 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern is executed (see S405 in FIG. 42).

The value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) or the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S310 in FIG. 41). This reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1, and includes data on the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and data on the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 by using the reserved ball number command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of each special pattern without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, by sending a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected, even if the reserved ball number of the dynamic display (variable performance) of each special pattern managed by the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the reserved ball number of the actual dynamic display (variable performance) reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 sends a reserved ball count command to the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved ball count command includes not only the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b that has been incremented by 1, but also the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 27) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b.

In other words, when a start win occurs, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113 by the reserved ball number command.

The audio lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command before the change performance based on each value is executed, and determines what the change performance will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change performance is executed. Then, based on the results of this read-ahead judgment, it is possible to decide the execution of various performances, and to determine the performance content and execution time (timing) of the "reserved change notice" that changes the reserved pattern (executed pattern) displayed on the reserved display section Db of the drum display device 81.

It may be configured to transmit a reserved ball count command indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable performance and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separate from the reserved ball count command, a reserved ball count command may be generated at the timing of a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and commands similar to the variable pattern command and stop type command based on the ball (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command may be reused to facilitate program creation.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning in the first start hole 64a. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data (counter values C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to one start winning of the first special pattern can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning in the second start hole 64b. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) in the second start hole 64b during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data (counter values C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to one start winning of the second special pattern can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is a memory for storing data (the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referenced when starting an execution, or when performing a jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol during execution, or when setting the dynamic display and variable effects of the special symbol display device 37 and drum display device 81, etc.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the variable performance of the first or second special symbol, in order to execute the processing such as the lottery for the big win of the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, and the setting of the variable performance, among the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above (counter C1-C3, CS1 values), if data corresponding to the start winning of the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data corresponding to the first start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, if data corresponding to the start winning of the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e and data corresponding to the start winning of the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data corresponding to the first start winning of the data is shifted to this reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed preferentially, and the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is not on hold. Note that, in the first embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring again to FIG. 27, the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described in detail. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, and to set the dynamic display and variable presentation of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the variable type counter CS1 used for determining the variable pattern are used for setting the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, and the variable presentation. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when the ball enters the first start hole 64a (start winning), and the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when the ball enters the second start hole 64b (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are all stored together in a single reserved ball storage area 203d, 203e, but multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each counter C1 to C3, CS1.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores up to four pieces of data (the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1) acquired when a ball enters any of the first starting holes 64a (start winning), and in this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1-4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest start winning in the first starting hole 64a is stored, and the first reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start winning in the first starting hole 64a.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e also stores up to four pieces of data (the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1) acquired when a ball enters the second start port 64b (start entry), and in this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1-4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 64b is stored, and the second reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 64b.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, if data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when it is time to start executing the variable performance and no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the MPU 201 shifts the data stored in the first reserved first area to each of the areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 43), and a jackpot lottery is held based on the reference data and the game status, and a fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the drum display device 81 performs a variation performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that the timing for starting execution of the variable performance has arrived, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area as a result of the determination, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the second reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. For example, assume that the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is "4" when the start decision of the variable performance is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this state, when the data of the second reserved 1st area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data of the second reserved 2nd area is shifted to the second reserved 1st area, the data of the second reserved 3rd area is shifted to the second reserved 2nd area, and the data of the second reserved 4th area is shifted to the second reserved 3rd area.

For example, if the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second reserved area 2 to the second reserved area 1, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the second reserved areas (3rd to 4th) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, each data in the second holding area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create a program.

On the other hand, when the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variable performance is reached, it then determines whether data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If the result of the determination is that data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number 1 smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the first reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d where data is stored (reserved).

Here, the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be explained. For example, assume that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when the start decision of the variable performance is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In this state, when the data of the first reserved 1st area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data of the first reserved 2nd area is shifted to the first reserved 1st area, the data of the first reserved 3rd area is shifted to the first reserved 2nd area, and the data of the first reserved 4th area is shifted to the first reserved 3rd area.

For example, if the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the first reserved second area to the first reserved first area, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, each data in the first holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 26, the explanation will be continued. The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208, including switches and sensors for detecting balls that have entered the winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a, and balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the outlet 66, a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, a setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value by being pressed in the "setting change mode", and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203. The input/output port 205 is also connected to various solenoids 209, including a large winning hole solenoid (not shown), a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, and a normal symbol hold lamp 84, on the output side. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503, and the state of the setting key 501.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched at intervals of approximately 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lights on and off from the lamp display device (illumination section 29-33, display lamp 34, confirmation lamp 311, each notification lamp 303a, 305a, front lower LED 414c, front right LED 415c, front left LED 416c, rear upper LED 422c, and rear lower LED 424, etc.) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the effects performed by the drum display device 81, such as variable effects and continuous preview effects.

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc. Details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 will be described later.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are each connected to the input/output port 225. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and that commands cannot be sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to each other.

The audio and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage of the performance displayed on the drum display device 81 or to change the back image of the "Super Reach" performance mode, etc., and instructs the display control device 114 to execute the content based on the pressing of the frame button 22 on the drum display device 81.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and controls the third pattern variation presentation and the continuous preview presentation on the drum display device 81 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 44). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

Now, referring to FIG. 33, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, and a reel control table 222g as fixed value data.

Of these tables 222a to 222g, tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute a read-ahead process based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in response to a start winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, as well as the jackpot random number table 222a, jackpot type table 222b, stop pattern table 222c and fluctuation pattern table 222d.

Then, this pre-reading process determines what type of effect the pending variable effect that was the subject of the pre-reading process will result in (whether it will be a jackpot, whether it will be a "reach display", etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and controls are executed to decide whether to execute various effects, and to determine the effect content (and execution time (timing)) of the "hold change notice" that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the hold display section Db.

The voice lamp control device 113 is also configured to draw the execution of a "setting suggestion effect" that suggests to the player the probability setting value of a jackpot, and to draw the content (type and timing) of the "setting suggestion effect", based on the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 and the probability setting value, etc.

The light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to execute and what the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 will be, based on the success or failure of the variable performance, the variable pattern, etc., and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, which will be described later. Details of this light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e will be described later.

The confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f is a table that is referenced to determine the timing of lighting the confirmation lamp 311 during the execution of the variable performance, based on the success or failure of the variable performance and the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e, which will be described later. Details of this confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f will be described later.

Furthermore, the reel control table 222g is a table that is referenced to determine the drive pattern of the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 according to the change pattern of the third symbol change performance and the stopped symbol.

The RAM 223 is provided with at least a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b, a sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c, a light guide pattern selection counter 223d, a confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e, a first reserved information storage area 223f, a second reserved information storage area 223g, and an execution information storage area 223h.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag that indicates that a fluctuation performance should be started when it is in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned ON, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 47). It is then turned OFF when the fluctuation performance is set in the drum display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 48).

When the change start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 performs a process of setting the change performance (see S1402 to S1415 in FIG. 48) to execute the change performance that is on hold if a change performance is on hold.

The sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the first special pattern variable performance (dynamic display) performed on the drum display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) and that is reserved in the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on a command (reserved ball command) sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect is increased by a ball entering the first starting hole 64a and the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and stores the incremented value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect reserved in the main control unit 110) in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a change pattern command and a stop type command corresponding to the change presentation of the first special pattern transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and when setting the manner of the change presentation of the first special pattern in the drum display device 81 in response to the reception of the command, subtracts (updates) the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 (see S1406 in FIG. 48). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in conjunction with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, so that the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated in synchronization with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110.

The sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the second special pattern variable performance (dynamic display) performed on the drum display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) and that is reserved in the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern is increased by a ball entering the second starting hole 64b and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is incremented in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and stores the incremented value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

In addition, when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command corresponding to the change presentation of the second special pattern transmitted from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the change presentation of the second special pattern in the drum display unit 81 in response to the reception of the command, the voice lamp control unit 113 subtracts (updates) the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c by 1 (see S1409 in FIG. 48). In this way, the voice lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c according to the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, so that the value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated in synchronization with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c are used to display the reserved pattern and the execution pattern on the drum display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c in response to receiving the reserved ball number command (see S1211 in FIG. 47), and updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c in response to receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command (see S1406 or S1409 in FIG. 48), and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls to be displayed, it controls the drawing of images so that the reserved patterns corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, i.e., the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution pattern indicating the variable performance currently being executed, are displayed on the reserved display section Db (see Figure 3) of the drum display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control unit 110, and the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed in the reserved display section Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first reserved ball counter 203a and the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the drum display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable performance is reserved.

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is a counter used to draw a lottery as to whether or not the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is to be lit.

The value of this light guide pattern selection counter 223d is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then in the counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 46) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, the value is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99"), and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d is updated (e.g., incremented by one) once each time the main process loops.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the variable presentation of the third pattern, it refers to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e to draw lots as to whether or not to light and display the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, depending on the content of the variable presentation (e.g., win/lose, presentation mode, variable elements, etc.) (see Figure 50).

Here, the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e in the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e based on the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d at that time, and determines the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420.

As shown in FIG. 34, the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e classifies the variable presentation of each special symbol into a "miss" case and a "jackpot" case. The divided groups are then further divided into presentation modes, and the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d corresponding to the lighting modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are assigned, respectively.

Specifically, when the variable effect is a miss, the groups are divided into a group for the "non-reach" effect mode, a group for the "normal reach" effect mode, a group for the "super reach" effect mode, and a group for the "special reach" effect mode, which can be selected when the variable effect is a miss. Also, when the jackpot is won, the groups are divided into a group for the "normal reach" effect mode, a group for the "super reach" effect mode, and a group for the "special reach" effect mode. In the divided groups, the possible values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are associated with each of the lighting patterns, namely, "bubbles" representing the fourth decorative pattern group 413, "cherry blossoms" representing the second decorative pattern group 411, "sunfish" representing the third decorative pattern 412, "cherry blossoms and sunfish" representing the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, and "school of fish" representing the first decorative pattern group 421.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "non-reach" performance mode when "missing" occurs is associated with only "none", where none of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 (hereinafter, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 may be collectively referred to as "each of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421") are lit, and no values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are assigned to "bubbles", "cherry blossoms", "sunfish", "cherry blossoms & sunfish", and "school of fish".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d in the "non-reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is associated with the illuminated symbols as "0 to 99" for "none." Note that since no value is assigned to "bubbles," "cherry blossom," "sunfish," "cherry blossom & sunfish," and "school of fish," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "non-reach" presentation mode for a "miss" is selected, the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode in which none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 are lit is set to be selected 100% of the time, and the lighting modes of "bubbles", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish" are set to be selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 in the "non-reach" performance mode upon a "miss", the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode is selected without exception (100%), and the other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 are set not to light up.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, for the "normal reach" presentation mode when "missing", the values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are associated with "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossom", and "sunfish", and no values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are assigned to "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0 to 39" for "none," "40 to 69" for "bubbles," "70 to 89" for "cherry blossoms," and "90 to 99" for "sunfish." Note that since no value is assigned to "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "miss", the "none" (non-lighting) mode is set to be selected 40% of the time, the "bubbles" lighting mode 30%, the "cherry blossoms" lighting mode 20%, the "sunfish" lighting mode 10%, and the "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish" lighting modes 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Normal Reach" performance mode when a "miss" occurs, the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is likely to be selected (40%), but it is also configured so that "bubbles", "cherry blossoms" or "sunfish" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d is not associated with the "non-reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs, and the "normal reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs, which will be described later, so that the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms and sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "cherry blossoms and sunfish" or "school of fish" are lit up, it is determined that the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "super reach or higher" presentation mode) will be executed in the variable presentation. Therefore, in the "non-reach" presentation mode in which "super reach or higher" does not appear, and in the "normal reach" presentation mode, the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms and sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d correspond to "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," "sunfish," "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "school of fish" in the "super reach" performance mode when "missing," and no value is assigned to "none" in the light guide pattern selection counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0-39" for "bubbles," "40-69" for "cherry blossoms," "70-89" for "sunfish," "90-97" for "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "98,99" for "school of fish." Note that since no value is assigned to "none," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "miss", the lighting mode of "bubbles" is set to be selected 40%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossoms" 30%, the lighting mode of "sunfish" 20%, the lighting mode of "cherry blossoms & sunfish" 8%, the lighting mode of "school of fish" 2%, and the lighting mode of "none" (non-lighting) 0%.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Super Reach" performance mode on a "miss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubbles" is most likely to be selected (40%), but it is also configured so that "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" or "school of fish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d correspond to "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," "sunfish," "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "school of fish" in the "special reach" performance mode when "missing," and no value is assigned to "none" in the light guide pattern selection counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light-guiding pattern selection counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Special Reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0-49" for "bubbles," "50-79" for "cherry blossoms," "80-94" for "sunfish," "95-98" for "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "99" for "school of fish." Note that since no value is assigned to "none," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode for a "miss" is selected, the "bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 50%, the "cherry blossoms" lighting mode 30%, the "sunfish" lighting mode 15%, the "cherry blossoms & sunfish" lighting mode 4%, the "school of fish" lighting mode 1%, and the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Special Reach" performance mode on a "miss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubbles" is most likely to be selected (50%), but it is also configured so that "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" or "school of fish" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d is not associated with the "Super Reach" presentation mode and the "Special Reach" presentation mode so that the "none" lighting mode is not selected. This is to ensure that, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "Super Reach or higher" presentation mode is executed, some kind of presentation is executed in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. As a result, when the "Super Reach or higher" presentation mode is executed, some kind of presentation is always executed in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the combination of the "reach display" presentation and the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 presentation is set to be able to suggest to the player the probability of a jackpot in the variable presentation in a composite manner.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot", the values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are associated with "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossom", and "sunfish", just as in the case of a "miss", and no values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are assigned to "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0-9" for "none," "10-29" for "bubbles," "30-59" for "cherry blossoms," and "60-99" for "sunfish." Note that since no value is assigned to "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode for a "Big Win" is selected, the "None" lighting (non-lighting) mode is set to be selected 10%, the "Bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 20%, the "Cherry Blossom" lighting mode is set to be selected 30%, and the "Sunfish" lighting mode is set to be selected 40%, while the "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" and "School of Fish" lighting modes are set to be selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each of the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "normal reach" performance mode upon a "jackpot", the lighting mode of the "sunfish" is most likely to be selected (40%), but it is also configured so that "none", "bubbles", "cherry blossom" or "sunfish" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d is not associated with the "normal reach" presentation mode during a "jackpot" so that the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms and sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "cherry blossoms and sunfish" or "school of fish" are lit up, it is determined that the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "super reach or higher" presentation mode) will be executed in the variable presentation. Therefore, even if a jackpot occurs, the "normal reach" presentation mode during a "jackpot" in which "super reach or higher" does not appear is set so that the lighting modes of "cherry blossoms and sunfish" and "school of fish" are not selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot", the values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are associated with "bubbles", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish", just as in the case of a "miss", and no value is assigned to "none" in the light guide pattern selection counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0,1" for "bubbles", "2-9" for "cherry blossoms", "10-19" for "sunfish", "20-49" for "cherry blossoms & sunfish", and "50-99" for "school of fish". Note that since no value is assigned to "none", it is represented as "-".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot", the lighting mode for "bubbles" is set to be selected 2% of the time, the lighting mode for "cherry blossoms" 8%, the lighting mode for "sunfish" 10%, the lighting mode for "cherry blossoms & sunfish" 30%, the lighting mode for "school of fish" 50%, and the lighting mode for "none" (non-lighting) 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Super Reach" performance mode upon a "Big Win", the lighting mode of "School of Fish" is most likely to be selected (50%), but it is also configured so that "Bubbles", "Cherry Blossom", "Sunfish" or "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "Big Win", the values of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d are associated with "Bubbles", "Cherry Blossom", "Sunfish", "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" and "School of Fish" in the same way as at the time of a "Miss", and no value is assigned to "None" in the light guide pattern selection counter 223d.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0-4" for "bubbles," "5-19" for "cherry blossoms," "20-39" for "sunfish," "40-59" for "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "60-99" for "school of fish." Note that since no value is assigned to "none," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode for a "Big Win" is selected, the "Bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 5% of the time, the "Cherry Blossom" lighting mode 15%, the "Sunfish" lighting mode 20%, the "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" lighting mode 20%, the "School of Fish" lighting mode 40%, and the "None" lighting (non-lighting) mode 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Special Reach" performance mode upon a "Big Win", the lighting mode of "School of Fish" is most likely to be selected (40%), but it is also configured so that "Bubbles", "Cherry Blossom", "Sunfish" or "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" can also be selected.

In this way, by combining the "reach display" presentation with the front light guide plate 410 or rear light guide plate 420 presentation, it is possible to comprehensively suggest to the player the likelihood of a big win in the variable presentation, and by executing the variable presentation on multiple presentation devices, it is possible to enrich the variety of presentations and increase the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will continue. The confirmation lamp timing selection counter 223e is a counter used to select whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and the timing at which it is lit during the variable performance of the third symbol.

The value of this fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then, in the counter update process of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1112 in FIG. 46), it is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99"), and returns to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99") The value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is updated (e.g., incremented by 1) once each time the main processing loops.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the variable performance of the third pattern, it refers to the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f to draw lots to determine whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 will be lit and the lighting timing in the variable performance, depending on the content of the variable performance (e.g., win/lose, performance mode, variable elements, etc.) (see Figure 49).

Here, referring to FIG. 35, the details of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110, when a "jackpot" occurs in the variation performance, the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f is referenced based on the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e at that time, and the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 is determined. In the first embodiment, when the variation performance is a miss, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light up at any timing, while when a jackpot is won in the variation performance, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to always light up at any timing in the variation performance. Note that even if a jackpot is won, a pattern may be configured in which the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit.

As shown in FIG. 35, the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f classifies the variable presentation of each special symbol into a "miss" case and a "jackpot" case. The divided groups are further divided into presentation modes, and within them, values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e corresponding to the timing of "from the start of the variation to the end of the high-speed variation" during the execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation", the timing of "reach formation to before development" during the execution of the variable element of "pseudo variation" or "slow variation" to the variable element of "normal reach", the timing of "after development to before re-variation" during the execution of the variable element of "super reach" or "special reach", and the timing of "re-variation to confirmation" during the execution of the variable element of "re-variation" or when the symbol is determined.

Specifically, at the time of a jackpot, the display modes are divided into groups for "normal reach", "super reach", and "special reach". In each group, the possible values of the confirmation lamp timing selection counter 223e are associated with each lighting timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-fluctuation", and "re-fluctuation to confirmation". Note that since the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light up when the fluctuation performance is a "miss", all possible values of the confirmation lamp timing selection counter 223e are associated with the lighting timing "none" for all performance modes that can be selected at the time of the "miss".

In the confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 222f, for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot", the value of the confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e is associated only with "re-fluctuation to confirmed", and no value of the confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e is assigned to "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation", "reach formation to before development", and "after development to before re-fluctuation".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the confirmation lamp timing selection counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0 to 99" for "re-fluctuation to confirmation." Note that since no values are assigned to "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation," "reach formation to before development," and "after development to before re-fluctuation," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot", the lighting timing of "re-change - confirmation", which is just before the change presentation ends, is set to be selected 100% of the time, and the lighting timing of "start of change - end of high-speed change", "reach formation - before development", and "after development - before re-change", which are in the middle of the change presentation, is set to be selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the "normal reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot", the "re-change - confirmation" lighting timing is always selected (100%), and the confirmation lamp 311 is set not to light up at any other lighting timing.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "super reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is associated with the values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e, respectively, from "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation," "reach formation to before development," "after development to before re-fluctuation," and "re-fluctuation to confirmation."

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing selection counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0-9" for "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "10-29" for "from reach formation to before development", "30-59" for "after development to before re-fluctuation", and "60-99" for "re-fluctuation to fixed".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot," the lighting timing is set to be selected 10% of the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation, 20% from the formation of a reach to before development, 30% from after development to before re-fluctuation, and 40% from re-fluctuation to confirmation.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot", the lighting timing of "re-change to confirmation", which is the last part of the change presentation, is most likely to be selected (40%), but it is also configured so that "from the start of the change to the end of the high-speed change", "from the formation of the reach to before development", or "after development to before re-change" can also be selected.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is associated with the values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e, respectively, from "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation," "reach formation to before development," "after development to before re-fluctuation," and "re-fluctuation to confirmation."

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0 to 19" for "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "20 to 39" for "from reach formation to before development", "40 to 69" for "after development to before re-fluctuation", and "70 to 99" for "re-fluctuation to confirmation".

In other words, if the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "Big Hit", the lighting timing is set to be selected at the following ratios: "From the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" 20%, "From the formation of reach to before development" 20%, "After development to before re-fluctuation" 30%, and "Re-fluctuation to confirmation" 30%.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot", the latter half of the variation presentation, "After development to before re-variation" or "Re-variation to confirmation", is likely to be selected (30%), but the first half of the variation presentation, "From the start of variation to the end of high-speed variation" or "Reach formation to before development", is also configured to be more likely to be selected than the "Super Reach" presentation mode.

In this way, when a jackpot is hit in the variable presentation, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at various times to indicate to the player that a jackpot will occur, creating an element of surprise and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the lottery regarding the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 and the lottery regarding the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are conducted separately. Therefore, depending on the results of each lottery, there are patterns in which the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are lit, a pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are both lit, and a pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are lit. This configuration makes it easier to calculate the probability of a big win for each performance, facilitating the design of game specifications.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will continue. The first reserved information storage area 223f is an area for storing information for performing the variation presentation of the reserved first special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 related to the variation presentation of the first special symbol that are obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a variable presentation of the first special symbol using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The second reserved information storage area 223g is an area for storing information for performing the variable presentation of the reserved second special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 related to the variable presentation of the second special symbol obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a variable presentation of the second special symbol using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223g and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The execution information storage area 223h is an area for storing information on the variable presentation of the first or second special symbol being executed on the drum display device 81, that is, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it shifts the information for performing the variable performance (the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) stored in the first pending information storage first area of the first pending information storage area 223f described above or the second pending information storage second area of the second pending information storage area 223g to this execution information storage area 223h in order to execute the settings for the variable performance of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Here, the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h.

The first pending information storage area 223f has four areas, the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223f2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

The second pending information storage area 223g, like the first pending information storage area 223f, has four areas, the first to fourth second pending information storage areas. Each of the first to fourth second pending information storage areas includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, the execution information storage area 223h includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently executed first special pattern or second special pattern variable performance is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variable type counter storage area 223h4 in which the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223h is an area corresponding to the first special symbol or second special symbol variable performance currently being executed. Also, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the first reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances, the first reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the second oldest reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances, the first reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the third oldest reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances, and the first reserved information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the fourth oldest reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances. Furthermore, the second reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that is the first in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special patterns, the second reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that is the second oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special patterns, the second reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that is the third oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special patterns, and the second reserved information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that is the fourth oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special patterns.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 and the corresponding special pattern from the reserved ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the extracted values of each counter C1 to C3, and CS1 in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, 223g1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, 223g2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, 223g3, and the variable type counter storage area 223f4, 223g4 of the corresponding first reserved information storage area 1 to 4 or the second reserved information storage area 1 to 4 that corresponds to the reserved ball number included in the reserved ball number command.

Specifically, if the reserved ball count command contains a reserved ball count of X (1≦X≦4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, then the number of variable effects of the first special symbol reserved at that time is X, and the values of the counters C1-C3, CS1 contained in the reserved ball count command correspond to the variable effects of the first special symbol that were reserved Xth in time among the variable effects of the reserved first special symbol, so the counters C1-C3, CS1 values corresponding to the counter storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first reserved information storage Xth area are stored. At this time, the main control unit 110 stores the values of the counters C1-C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the first reserved Xth area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In other words, the same values as the counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the first reserved Xth area of the main control unit 110 are stored in the first reserved information storage Xth area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command and a stop type command indicating the start of a change performance from the main control device 110, it executes a process of shifting the information stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g to the execution information storage area 223h. In other words, if there is pending information regarding the second special symbol, the execution of the change performance of the second special symbol that was reserved first in time is started, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first second pending information storage area corresponding to the change performance of the second special symbol that was reserved first are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the change performance currently being executed. On the other hand, if there is no reserved information for the second special symbol and only reserved information for the first special symbol, the execution of the variable performance of the first special symbol that was reserved first in time is started, and the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first reserved information storage first area that correspond to the variable performance of the first reserved first special symbol are moved to the storage areas 223h1-223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h that correspond to the variable performance currently being executed.

In addition, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area. Then, the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1-223g4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223g1-223g4 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1-223g4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223g1-223g4 of the second pending information storage third area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110. Also, the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 and the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 and the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, respectively. In other words, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3, CS1 corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and being reserved in the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223h, the first reserved information storage area 223f, and the second reserved information storage area 223g.

When the voice lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (not shown), it grasps the number of reserved first special symbol and second special symbol variable effects (reserved ball count) that are reserved from the sub reserved ball count counter 223b and the sub reserved ball count counter 223c. Then, based on the reserved ball count, it reads ahead the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the areas in which the first special symbol or second special symbol variable effects are reserved among the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 and the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, and determines whether or not the variable effects will result in a jackpot, the variable time, etc. For example, if the value of the sub-1 reserved ball counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub-2 reserved ball counter 223c is "0", the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable performance is 1 and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable performance is 0, so the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved information storage first area are read ahead and a judgment is made. Also, if the value of the sub-1 reserved ball counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub-2 reserved ball counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable performance is 0 and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable performance is 4, so the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved information storage fourth area are read ahead and a judgment is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are sent in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 cannot access the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. In contrast, the sound lamp control device 113 provides a first reserved information storage area 223f and a second reserved information storage area 223g, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable performance of the first special pattern and the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. By referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved information storage area 223f and the second reserved information storage area 223g, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute a pre-reading process. In other words, when the variable performance of the reserved first special pattern and/or second special pattern is executed, it is possible to determine the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) before the variable performance is executed, and to determine the execution of various performances.

The above-mentioned shift process in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h, moves (shifts) data only for the areas corresponding to the pending variable effects among the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 and the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4, based on the number of pending balls when the variable pattern command and the stop type command are received (the values of the sub-first pending ball number counter 223b and the sub-second pending ball number counter 223c before the update based on the reception of the variable pattern command and the stop type command).

For example, assume that the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4", and data is stored in all areas of the first reserved information storage area 223f (first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4). In this case, the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, the data in the second reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, the data in the first reserved information storage area 3 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 2, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 4 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, and the data shifting is completed. As described above, in this embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved information storage areas 3 and 4, where no variation performance is reserved, so that the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each data in the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4 is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller (execution information storage area 223h or the first pending information storage areas 1 to 3 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 3) regardless of whether data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (pending) in each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4, making it easier to create programs.

Let's return to Figure 33 to continue the explanation. RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to those commands is performed.

The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and controls the special pattern change performance and continuous preview performance on the drum display device 81 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113, controls the lighting of various lamps 311, etc. on the lamp display device 227 while the change performance is being performed, and further controls the audio output from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the progress of the change performance.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 37 to 44. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are started when the power is turned on, main processes that are executed after the start-up processes, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 2 millisecond period in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. This startup process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this startup process, first, the initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). For example, permission to access RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S102). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 503 (see FIG. 26) provided on the main control unit 110 is turned on (S104). If the result of the determination is that the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), it is possible that the processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case, the processing proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S116.

As will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 39, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 203 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S107: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S108) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is off and the setting key 501 is on when the power is turned on, so in order to start up the startup mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first the display of the probability setting value is started on the probability display device (not shown) (S110), and then it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), and the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is ended (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is ended, and the process proceeds to S113. In addition, in the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the process skips the processes of S110 to S112 and proceeds to S113 in order to start up the startup mode in "normal mode."

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S113), and then an interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 39) described later.

The setting value command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process described below (see S201 in FIG. 40). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this setting value command, it is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a memory for storing probability setting values provided in the RAM 223.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S104 that the RAM clear switch 503 is on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on or not in order to determine whether the startup mode is to be the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode" (S115).

If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 to start up the startup mode in "RAM clear mode."

In the process of S116, the initialization process of RAM 203 (S116, S117) is executed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, regardless of whether settings have been changed, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the RAM 203 initialization process (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), i.e., in the "RAM clear mode," the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (for example, the first reserved ball counter 203a is cleared to "0") (S117). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), a setting change process is performed to change the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Now, referring to FIG. 38, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode", and is a process for accepting and confirming changes (updates) to the probability setting value from hall personnel, etc.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of displaying the current probability setting value is set on the probability display device (not shown) (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. This setting to start displaying the probability setting value causes the probability display device to start displaying the probability setting value.

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value, rather than the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off. In other words, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which are intermediate values of the probability setting values, or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. This allows hall personnel, etc. to change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode," the probability display device may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value while taking into account the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

In addition, when the start-up mode becomes the "setting change mode", the probability display device may start displaying the probability setting value as "3" if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "3" or more, and may start displaying the probability setting value set before the power was cut off as is if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is less than "3". For example, when the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is high, such as "5" or "6", there are many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value slightly (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value starts displaying as the probability setting value set before the power was cut off as is, the following problem occurs. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and when the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6", the probability setting value is returned to "1". Therefore, for example, if you want to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", you must go through almost one cycle of the probability setting value while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. In contrast, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is high, the probability setting value can be displayed starting at "3," thereby updating the probability setting value while minimizing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and if it is not in the predetermined range, i.e., the probability setting value is abnormal (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123) and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which are intermediate values of the probability setting value, or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if the result of the process of S122 indicates that the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is normal, so the process of S123 is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), it is then determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

If it is determined as a result of S125 that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S126) and the process returns to S122.

The update of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, is performed by adding 1 to the probability setting value if the previous probability setting value is between "1" and "5", and by returning the probability setting value to "1" if the previous probability setting value is "6". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device.

The loop process of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the process of S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes). Then, if it is determined in the process of S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the upcoming game (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a is set according to that probability setting value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, or it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, as a result of the processing of S129, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is set (S130), and this setting change processing (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 37), proceeds to S116, executes RAM203 initialization process (S116, S117), and erases (clears) the data in RAM203. In this way, by having the hall staff turn on the RAM erase switch 503 in the process of S124 to confirm the probability setting value, the hall staff can be made strongly aware that the data in RAM203 will be erased thereafter.

In addition, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value was confirmed by detecting that the RAM erase switch 503 is on, but it may be configured to confirm the probability setting value by detecting that the setting key 501 is off.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not interrupted. In such a case, therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, "9999" and "99"), the counter is cleared to "0". The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c of the RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as the processing of S207 (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt processing described later (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

While this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) to be described later is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the big prize winning opening 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of normal patterns is controlled by the normal pattern display device 83. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting variable display on the special pattern display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high probability or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at each time.

The above-mentioned processes of S152 and S153, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the regular random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to provide randomness to the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular random number counter C4, which use these as the initial values for updating.

In the processing of S151, if power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power was interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 output a power outage signal SG1, which resulted in the execution of the NMI interrupt processing described later in FIG. 44. Therefore, the processing at the time of power interruption from S154 onwards is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S155). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored (S156), and access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), continuing the infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed-up stack area and working area of RAM 203.

The processing of S151 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processing of S152 and S153, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power outage occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is completed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the processing can be started from the processing of S151 after the start-up processing is completed. In other words, the processing can be started from the processing of S151, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up processing.

Therefore, in processing when the power is cut off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer saved; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S101), and processing can start from S151. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and main process (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be sent to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, the signal is output to a device corresponding to the signal (for example, an external output terminal board (not shown) for connecting the hall computer and the pachinko machine 10, etc.). In the external output process of S201, the output data of the command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the signal is output to various devices.

After processing S201, the winning ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then a winning process is executed to execute processing when each special pattern is hit (S203).

After S203, the normal electric role control process is executed to execute the drive control process of the normal electric role 64c (S204). In simple terms, the normal symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. If the normal symbol display results in a winning symbol (e.g., a "○" symbol) appearing and a winning state is reached, the normal electric role 64c is opened for a predetermined time, whereas if a losing symbol (e.g., an "X" symbol) appears, the normal electric role 64c is kept closed.

After the processing of S204, the process of reading the various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Also, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of won balls to be sent to the payout control unit 111 is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203. As a result, the predetermined prize ball command is sent to the payout control unit 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "9999"), it is cleared to "0". The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "99"), it is cleared to "0", and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the normal random number counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the normal random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "9999", "99", "99", "9", and "99", respectively), they are each cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4 has completed one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process is executed in response to a win in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (S208). Details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, a gate passing process is executed to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S209). If it is determined in this gate passing process (S209) that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the regular winning counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the regular winning counter C4 is stored in a regular reserved ball storage area (not shown), and the regular reserved symbol lamp 84 displays the number of reserved regular symbols that are variable in display.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a special symbol change process is executed (S210) to set a process for dynamically displaying a special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and a change pattern of the third symbol by the drum display device 81 based on the process contents of the start winning process (S208). Details of the special symbol change process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), a hit/miss determination is made for the normal symbol, and a normal symbol change process is executed (S211), which is a setting process for performing a variable display of the normal symbol based on the result of the determination on the normal symbol display device 83. In this normal symbol change process (S211), the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10). Then, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the hit/miss result, and the display result according to the hit/miss result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83.

After executing the normal map change processing (S211), the launch control processing is executed (S212), and then other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

The launch control process (S212) is a process that determines whether ball launch is on or off when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the control handle 51 and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When ball launch is on, the ball launch signal information is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to send a ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. However, some or all of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., every 2 milliseconds) in the main process. For example, some or all of the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S202), winning process (S203), normal electric control process (S204), and switch reading process (S205) executed by the timer interrupt process in this embodiment may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process, rather than by the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step may be provided in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at the predetermined time is executed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the processing to be executed at the predetermined time, but since the time required to execute the processing to be executed at the predetermined time changes depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 41, we will explain the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether a ball has won the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and if a winning has occurred, executes a process to store (reserve) the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning port 64a, 64b where the winning has occurred. It also executes a process to transmit the reserved values of each counter C1-C3, CS1 together with the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first start hole 64a (S301). Here, the ball's entry into the first start hole 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40) based on the output signal of the special ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball's entry (winning) into the first start hole 64a, which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the first starting hole 64a (a starting winning has occurred) (S301: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (in the first embodiment, "4") (S302). Then, if there has been a winning entry into the first starting hole 64a but the number of reserved balls N1 is not less than 4 (S302: No), this starting winning process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N1 is less than 4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is incremented by 1 (S303). Then, since the winning ball this time was in the first starting hole 64a, which corresponds to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S304), and the process proceeds to S309.

If it is determined in the process of S301 that the ball has not entered the first starting hole 64a (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting hole 64b (starting winning) (S305). Here, as with the first starting hole 64a, the ball's entry into the second starting hole 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40) based on the output signal of the special ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the ball's entry (winning) into the second starting hole 64b, which is read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the second start hole 64b (a start winning has occurred) (S305: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (in the first embodiment, "4") (S306). Then, if there is no winning in the second start hole 64b (S305: No), or if there is a winning in the second start hole 64b but the number of reserved balls N2 is not less than 4 (S306: No), this start winning process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N2 is less than 4 (S306: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is incremented by 1 (S307). Then, since the winning ball this time was in the second starting hole 64b, which corresponds to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

In the processing of S309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 are read out from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 27), and among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 or the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e set as the storage destination in S304 or S308, if the first reserved ball storage area 203d is specified as the storage destination, the values are respectively reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the areas corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a (S309). In addition, if the second reserved ball storage area 203e is specified as the storage destination, the balls are reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, and the variable type counter storage area 203e4, which are areas corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball count counter 203b (S309).

Specifically, for example, in the process of S304 based on winning at the first starting hole 64a, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S303 is "1", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 1. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 2, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 3, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "4", the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 4.

For example, in the process of S308 based on winning the second starting hole 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition in the process of S307 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is "2", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved second area, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is "3", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area.

Next, in order to send a reserved ball number command including the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operated reserved ball number N1 or operated reserved ball number N2) after the addition by the processing of S303 or S307 and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the processing of S309 to the voice lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the reserved ball number command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40). When the processing of S310 is completed, this start winning processing (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S310 may be the values read from counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309, or the values stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the processing of S309.

In addition, in the processing of S301 and S305, if a ball enters the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b at the same time, the ball entry processing into the first start port 64a may be executed as a priority, the ball entry processing into the second start port 64b may be awaited, and the waiting ball entry processing into the second start port 64b may be executed in the start entry processing (S208) in the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

Next, referring to FIG. 42, we will explain the special chart change processing (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special chart change processing (S210).

This special pattern change process (S210) controls the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern on the special pattern display device 37, and the change presentation performed on the drum display device 81.

In this special symbol change process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S401). The jackpot period includes the jackpot game displayed on the drum display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, the predetermined period before the jackpot game starts (i.e., the jackpot opening), and the predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (i.e., the jackpot ending). If the determination in S401 indicates that either special symbol is in a jackpot (S401: Yes), the special symbol change process (S210) ends and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is resumed.

If it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot is not being won (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is in a dynamic display mode (S402), and if the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is not in a dynamic display mode (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display on the special pattern display device 37 stopped (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display stopped (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stopped pattern in the dynamic display (variable performance) is displayed on the special pattern display device 37 and the drum display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the stopped pattern can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S403, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S403: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2 of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the second special pattern, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by one (S405). This is because the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable performance) related to the second special pattern is started by the variable start processing (S410) described later, and the number of reserved balls related to the second special pattern is reduced by one.

Then, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S406). This data shift process (S406) is a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, second reserved area 2 → second reserved area 1, second reserved area 3 → second reserved area 2, second reserved area 4 → second reserved area 3, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is "0" (S404: No), then it is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1 of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S407). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start the execution of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the first special pattern, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by one (S408). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variable performance) related to the reserved first special pattern is started by the later-described variable start process (S410), and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Then, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S409). This data shift process (S409) is a process for shifting the data stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, first reserved area 2 → first reserved area 1, first reserved area 3 → first reserved area 2, first reserved area 4 → first reserved area 3, etc.

After the data shift process of S406 or S409, a fluctuation start process is executed for the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process (S410), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The fluctuation start process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In the process of S407, if it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operated reserved ball count N1) is "0" (S407: No), it is determined whether or not a demo performance is being performed on the drum display device 81, etc., i.e., whether or not a demo is in progress (S411). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that a demo is in progress until it is determined that either the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b (operated reserved ball count N1 or operated reserved ball count N2) is greater than "0".

If it is determined that a demo is not in progress (S411: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that a demo is in progress (S411: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the drum display device 81, etc. to display a demo performance based on the reception of the display demo command.

As described above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation performance does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, a demo performance is displayed on the drum display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S411 that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), a process may be further executed to determine whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, the process of S412 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation has stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo performance.

In the process of S402, if it is determined that the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is in dynamic display (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S413). The display time during dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S413: No), the display of the special pattern display device 37 is updated (S414) and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, a display mode is set in which, for example, the special LED group 37b (i.e., the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) corresponding to the special symbol that is changing is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern until the change time has elapsed after the dynamic display is started.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S413: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopping symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37 (S415). The stopping symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S410) described later with reference to FIG. 43. In the variation start process (S410), it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot depending on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S406 or S409, and if there is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is determined by the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the first embodiment, if the result is a miss, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the result is a jackpot, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern that corresponds to the type (category) of the jackpot.

When the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stopping pattern is set in the processing of S415, a confirmation command is set (S416) in order to confirm and display the stopping pattern of the variable performance on the drum display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special pattern display device 37, and the processing proceeds to S417. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance being executed on the drum display device 81.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable presentation of the third pattern on the drum display device 81 and display the stopped pattern as a confirmed one.

In the process of S417, in order to determine whether or not the "time-saving state" is in effect, it is determined whether or not the value of a time-saving counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S417).

In the processing of S417, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (S417: Yes), the "time-saving state" is in effect, and one dynamic display (changing performance) of one of the special symbols has been completed in that state, so the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (S418), the special symbol changing process (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, in the process of S417, if the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S417: No), the state is not the "time-saving state" but the "normal game state" or the "probability fluctuation state", so the process of S418 is skipped, this special chart fluctuation process (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Next, referring to FIG. 43, the change start process (S410), which is one process of the special symbol change process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S410). This change start process (S410) draws a lottery for a jackpot or a miss (jackpot lottery) according to the game status based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game status, and determines the dynamic display and dynamic pattern (changing pattern and stop type) of the change performance performed by the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81.

In the fluctuation start process (S410), first, it is determined whether the game state is in the "probability fluctuation state" or not (S501). If it is determined that the game state is not in the "probability fluctuation state" (S501: No), the game state is the "normal game state" or the "time shortening state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a low probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state (see FIG. 28(a)) is set (S502), and the process proceeds to S504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is in the "probability fluctuation state" (S451: Yes), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in a high probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S503), and the process proceeds to S504.

In the process of S504, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S502 or S503 (S504).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot has occurred is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the game state (mode) at that time, by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value. As described above, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a normal low probability state ("normal game state" or "time-shortened state"), the jackpot random number table 202a specifies the jackpot random number value so that the jackpot probability is 50/10,000 for a setting value of "1" and 60/10,000 for a setting value of "6". In addition, when the possible game states (modes) of the pachinko machine 10 are in a high probability state ("variable probability state"), the jackpot random number table 202a specifies the jackpot random number value so that the jackpot probability is 500/10,000 for a setting value of "1" and 600/10,000 for a setting value of "6."

In the process of S504, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, it is determined that there is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot as a result of the process of S504 (S504: Yes), then the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 28(b)) and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f (S505).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines whether the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is a "10R sure-variable jackpot" in which the special symbol is in a high probability state and the winning assistance function continues until the next jackpot after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, a "5R sure-variable jackpot" in which the special symbol is in a high probability state and the winning assistance function continues until the next jackpot after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5, or a "10R normal jackpot" in which the special symbol is in a low probability state and the winning assistance function is active until the special symbol changes 100 times after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of the jackpot on the special symbol display device 37 (the display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) of the reserved ball execution area 203f to determine whether it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and if it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b. Also, if the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S506), and the process proceeds to S509. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, a presentation mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and from the selected presentation mode, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation presentation) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 30) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the process of S457, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, a presentation mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected presentation mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and the variation time.

On the other hand, if the process of S504 determines that the winning combination is not a jackpot (S504: No), the display mode for a losing combination is set (S507). In the process of S507, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to a losing symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or (and) the second reserved ball number counter 203b, and the current game state, one of the "non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, "non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, and "special reach" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode to be displayed on the drum display device 81. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each presentation mode is different depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state", or the "probability variable state" or the "time shortened state".

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the event of a loss is determined (S508), and the process proceeds to S509. In the process of S508, the fluctuation time until the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 stop and display a losing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (presentation mode) in the event of a loss determined in the process of S507, a fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

In this way, the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a jackpot occurs and the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a miss occur are determined by the same judgment program using the same random number values C3 and CS1, making it possible to standardize the programs and reduce development man-hours.

In the process of S509, based on the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processes of S506 and S508, a fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 (S509). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won and the jackpot is a "10R variable jackpot", and the "25-second" "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a jackpot, a "10R variable jackpot", and a "25-second" "super reach" is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the "25-second" "super reach" fluctuation pattern is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a loss and a "25-second" "super reach" is set.

In this way, even if the variable performance has the same variation time, by setting the correct or incorrect performance and the general content of the variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the content of the performance mode, including whether it is correct or not, and the variation time, and can determine the detailed variation pattern of the variable performance based on this information.

In addition, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S505 or S507 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S510), and the process returns to the special chart change processing (see FIG. 42).

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot is a "10R guaranteed jackpot," a stop type command is set indicating that it is a "10R guaranteed jackpot" without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, a "7" symbol, etc.). Also, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot is a "10R regular jackpot," a stop type command is set indicating that it is a "10R regular jackpot" without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, a "4" symbol, etc.).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is not won and the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that the "Super Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "787" etc.). Also, if a jackpot is not won and the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that the "Normal Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "737" etc.). Also, if a jackpot is not won and the "Non-Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that the "Non-Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (e.g., "258" etc.).

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on whether the variable performance is successful or not in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on whether it is successful or not, and based on that information, can determine the detailed stop result of the variable performance.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and in the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40), these commands are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command or display type command based on the command and sends it to the display control device 114.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, we will explain the NMI interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 110 in the event of a power outage or the like. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110.

NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the ongoing control and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the information about the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information about the occurrence of the power outage (S601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figs. 45 to 50. The processes of the MPU 221 are broadly divided into start-up processes (see Fig. 45) that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes (see Fig. 46) that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 46) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 46), it executes the power-off processing of S1116. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1116 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1116 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S1116 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No) and the process proceeds to S1008.

In addition, if the power-off processing in progress flag is on in the processing of S1002 (S1002: Yes), this startup processing occurred after a momentary power outage and was started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset during the execution of the power-off processing of S1116. In such a case, since the power-off processing is in the middle of being executed, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the processing proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the drum display device 81, etc.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 46). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, so the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S1116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the working area of the RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and the process reaches S1008, this occurs because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped and the process proceeds to S1010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a setting value command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in RAM 223, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 46).

In this way, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, by waiting to transition to the main process (see FIG. 46) until receiving the setting value command generated at the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37), the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 and execute the main process and subsequent processes based on the probability setting value. Also, if the setting value command is not received from the main control device 110, the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 has not been reached and the startup process of the main control device 110 has not ended normally, so the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is not ended normally and the transition to the main process is not made. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp whether the startup process of the main control device 110 has been executed normally, and it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from running out of control when the main control device 110 has not started up normally.

In the process of S1012, the process waits until a setting value command is received from the main control unit 110. In this case, if a momentary power outage (a so-called instantaneous power outage) causes only the voice lamp control unit 113 to shut off the power while the main control unit 110 continues to keep the power on, the voice lamp control unit 113 may repeatedly execute the process of S1012 and may not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, if a setting value command is not received from the main control unit 110 for a predetermined period of time, the voice lamp control unit 113 may be configured to start up in a safe mode in which control related to the setting value is not executed and other control is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 46, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the last execution of the process of S1101 (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1110 without executing the processes of S1102 to S1109. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the process of S1101 is that, while S1102 to S1109 do not need to be executed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the variable performance process of S1110 and the command determination process of S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the process of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the settings related to the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that one millisecond or more has passed since the process of S1101 was last executed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. Note that if the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 45, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1103 to S1112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the drum display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1105.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot presentation process is performed to execute the presentation related to the jackpot that is set by the command determination process of S1111 described below (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, input is monitored to determine whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding effect is set. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the variable performance is not being executed or during the period of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation", a process to change the stage is performed, and a stage change command is set for the display control device 114 instead of the frame button operation command. By including information on the performance mode corresponding to the changed stage in this stage change command, the display control device 114 performs a process to change the performance mode to one corresponding to the stage executed on the drum display device 81. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the variable performance, pressing the frame button 22 can display the expected value of a jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during "reach display" can change the performance to one that gives a sense of expectation for a jackpot, or the frame button 22 can be used as a decision button to select one of multiple reach performances. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S1106) is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, or the lighting process of the confirmation lamp 311 are set to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the drum display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1108, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the drum display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing and output process of S1108 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the drum display device 81.

In the processing of S1110, in order to display a variable performance on the drum display device 81, a variable performance processing is executed, which is a processing for starting a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. Details of this variable performance processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After the variable performance processing, a command determination processing is executed (S1111) for performing processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the processing proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters such as the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). Specifically, the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, the light guide pattern selection counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing selection counter 223e are both "99"), they are each cleared to "0."

The light guide pattern selection counter 223d updated here is used to select whether or not to perform a performance (lighting) on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 during the variable performance, and the confirmation lamp timing selection counter 223e is used to select whether or not to light the confirmation lamp 311 (lighting timing) during the variable performance.

After the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power outage processing is executed (S1116). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and the processing is then executed in an infinite loop. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 223 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S1114), and if RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

If it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display on the drum display device 81 does not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred, and he or she can call a hall attendant or the like and ask for repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control unit 110 has been received in the command memory area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). If the determination results in a command being received from the main control unit 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1202). Then, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in RAM 223, and is used in the variation performance process (see FIG. 48) described below when setting a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type. After that, this command determination process (S1111) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used when setting a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable performance in the variable performance process (see FIG. 48) described below. After that, the variable performance start flag 223a, which indicates that the variable performance is about to start, is set to on (S1206), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

The stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control unit 110 after the main control unit 110 sends a variation pattern command when starting a variation performance, as a command indicating the stop type of the variation performance whose variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command. By setting the variation start flag 223a to on by the processing of S1206, in the variation performance processing executed later (see FIG. 48), a determination is made as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the reserved ball count command matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance extracted from the received variation pattern command. Also, a determination is made as to whether or not the stop type of the variation performance extracted based on the values of each counter C1 etc. included in the reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation performance extracted from the received stop type command. If, as a result of these determinations, in one variation performance, the variation pattern based on the reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, or the stop type based on the reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality has occurred (for example, an abnormality in command reception due to noise), and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1204 that a stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance being performed on the drum display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), the confirmation command for display is set (S1208), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

The display confirmation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 46). The display control device 114 performs display control so that the variable display of the third symbol is confirmed and displayed on the drum display device 81 at the confirmation timing indicated by this display confirmation pattern command.

If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1207 (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received (S1209). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S1209: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and/or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 26) of the main control unit 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is extracted, and this is stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S1210). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1, which are also included in the reserved ball count command, are stored in the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved information storage area 223f or the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223g indicated by the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c updated in S1210 (S1211), and this command judgment process (S1111) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 46) is resumed.

Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start entry), so that each time there is a start entry, the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 by processing S1212. Therefore, even if the values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and/or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the first reserved ball counter 203a and/or the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and/or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected at the time of detection of the initial winning to match the values of the first reserved ball counter 203a and/or the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110.

The voice lamp control device 113 can also execute pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g. In other words, it can determine what the result of a pending variable performance will be if it is executed (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) before the variable performance is executed, and decide to execute various types of performances.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1209 (S1209: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S1212), this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the main processing (see FIG. 46) is returned to. Here, if the other command received is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1212, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102) of the main processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 48, the variable performance processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variable performance processing (S1110). This variable performance processing (S1110) is executed during the main processing (see FIG. 46), and various processes are executed to execute variable performance in the drum display device 81.

In the fluctuation performance process (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1401: No), since at least the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, the fluctuation performance process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off to start the fluctuation performance (S1402), and then it is determined whether the fluctuation performance to be executed this time is related to the first special symbol (S1403). If the result of the determination is that the fluctuation performance is related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data included in the first pending information storage first area provided in the first pending information storage area 223f is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1404), and further, the data included in the first pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223f is shifted to the first pending information storage first to third areas (S1405), the value of the sub first pending ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

In other words, in this case, the number of reserved first special pattern variable performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special pattern variable performance that is reserved first in time is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reserved information first area corresponding to the first reserved variable performance are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h that correspond to the variable performance currently being executed. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage first area, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110, and the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110, respectively.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1403 that the variable effect is not related to the first special symbol, i.e., if it is determined that the variable effect is related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the data included in the second pending information storage first area provided in the second pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1407), and further, the data included in the second pending information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the second pending information storage first to third areas (S1408), the value of the sub second pending ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1409), and the process proceeds to S1410.

In other words, in this case, the number of reserved second special pattern variable performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved second special pattern variable performance is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the first reserved variable performance are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable performance currently being executed. In addition, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the first area of the second pending information storage, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the third area of the second pending information storage are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second area of the second pending information storage, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the fourth area of the second pending information storage are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the third area of the second pending information storage.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1 stored in the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively.

Next, in the process of S1410, the variation pattern of the variation performance to be executed is obtained based on the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1410). After that, in order to display the variation performance on the drum display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). The display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third symbol variation display is performed on the drum display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1412, the stop type of the variable performance to be executed is obtained based on the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1412). After that, a stop type command for display is set based on the obtained stop type of the variable performance (S1413), and the process proceeds to S1414.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). When the display control device 114 is to confirm and display the variable performance executed by the display variable pattern command set by the process of S1411, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

In the process of S1414, a confirmation lamp lighting setting process is performed to determine whether or not to light the confirmation lamp 311 in the variable performance currently being executed, and to set the lighting timing (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1415. This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) will be described later in FIG. 49.

In the process of S1415, a light guide pattern setting process is performed (S1415) to set whether or not the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, is to be lit in the variable performance currently being executed, and then this variable performance process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) will be described later in FIG. 50.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414). This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is executed within the variable performance process (see FIG. 48), and determines whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variable performance to be executed, and if a jackpot will occur, determines at what timing of the variable performance the confirmation lamp 311 will be lit.

In the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable presentation stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1501). If it is determined that a jackpot will not occur (S1501: No), the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable presentation process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that a jackpot will occur (S1501: Yes), the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f (see FIG. 35) is referenced according to the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e to set the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variable performance to be executed (S1502), and processing proceeds to S1503.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" will occur based on the current big win (S1503). If it is determined that a "probability fluctuation state" will occur as a result of the determination (S1503: Yes), the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502 is set to a long lighting pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is lit for a long time (for example, "10 seconds") (S1504), this confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that a "probability fluctuation state" will not occur based on the current jackpot win, i.e., if a jackpot that will cause a "time shortening state" has been won (S1503: No), the process sets the timing of lighting the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502 to a short lighting pattern with a short lighting time (e.g., "2 seconds") for the confirmation lamp 311 (S1505), ends this confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414), and returns to the variable presentation process (see FIG. 48).

If the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the processing of S1504 or S1505 exceeds the variable time of the variable performance being executed, for example, if a long lighting pattern is started when the variable performance is confirmed, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to end when the variable performance is confirmed, or the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 may be advanced from the timing initially set (for example, starting from a timing "10 seconds" before" the confirmation). Furthermore, it may be configured so that a short lighting pattern may be lit even if the "probability variable state" is won.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the variable presentation, the confirmation lamp 311 can be configured to indicate to the player that a jackpot will occur at various times during the variable presentation, providing an element of surprise to the game and increasing interest in the game. Also, by changing the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 depending on the type of jackpot won, the presentation can be varied to suitably increase the level of interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 50, the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this light guide pattern setting process (S1415). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is executed in the variable performance process (see FIG. 48), and executes various processes for determining whether or not each of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, and executes a process for changing the lit area of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is displayed lit.

In the light guide pattern setting process (S1415), first, it is determined whether or not the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has been selected in the variable performance to be executed (S1601). This determination is made by referencing the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e (see FIG. 34) according to the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and by drawing a lottery for the lighting or non-lighting of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 in the variable performance to be executed.

In the process of S1601, if it is determined that the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has not been selected (S1601: No), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has been selected (S1601: Yes), the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421 of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 to be turned on are then determined (S1602).

If the result of the determination in S1602 is that the bubble group pattern, which is the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Bubbles"), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are set to light up in "blue" (S1603) at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance (i.e., the end of the variable element of "slow fluctuation" and the start of the variable element of "normal reach"; similarly below), and this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

If the result of the determination in S1602 is that the cherry blossom storm pattern, which is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Cherry Blossoms"), the rightmost and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c among the front lower LEDs 414c are set to light up in "pink" at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance (S1604), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

If the result of the determination in S1602 is that the sunfish pattern, which is the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "sunfish"), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance, the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right and left ends are set to light up in "green" (S1605), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the variable performance process (see FIG. 48) is resumed.

If, as a result of the determination in S1602, the cherry blossom storm pattern, which is the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410, and the sunfish pattern, which is the third decorative pattern 412, have been selected as the lighting targets (S1602: "Sunfish & Cherry Blossoms"), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance, the rightmost and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c among the front lower LEDs 414c are set to light up in "pink" and the front lower LEDs 414c other than the rightmost and leftmost are set to light up in "green" (S1606), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the variable performance process (see FIG. 48) is resumed.

If the result of the determination in S1602 is that the school of fish symbol, which is the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "School of fish"), first, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 will be lit at the start of the "reach display", i.e., when the reach is formed (S1607). This determination is made by determining whether or not the lighting timing and lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 set in S1502, S1504, and S1505 of the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (see FIG. 49) have arrived (overlapped) during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421. If it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit during the execution of the first decorative pattern group 421 when a reach is formed (S1607: No), the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are set to light up in the order of the right area → center area → left area of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively, and the three LEDs 422c, 424 provided in each area are set to light up in "red," "blue," and "green" from the right side at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance (S1608), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the variable performance process (see FIG. 48) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is lit during the execution of the first decorative pattern group 421 when a reach is formed (S1607: Yes), when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance, only the rear lower LEDs 424 are lit in the order of the right area → center area → left area of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 424 provided in each area are lit in the order of "red", "blue", "green" from the right. When the confirmation lamp 311 is off, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are set to light up in "red", "blue", and "green" from the right side in the order of the right area → center area → left area of the rear light guide plate 420 (S1609), and the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

In this way, during the execution of the variable performance executed by the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81 are used to execute the jackpot expectation suggestion performance in the variable performance, thereby executing a rich variety of performances and favorably increasing the attention to the game. In addition, in the drum display device 81, which is different from the liquid crystal display device in which additional notice performances can be easily executed, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are used to perform notice display on the front side, so that even if a drum display device 81 in which additional notice display is difficult is used, the performance content of the variable performance can be enriched and the attention to the game can be favorably increased. Furthermore, during the execution of the confirmation lamp 311, which has the highest importance in the variable performance, the scale of the performance by the first decorative pattern group 421, which has a lower importance in the game than the confirmation lamp 311, is reduced and executed, so that the performance by the confirmation lamp 311, which is important in the game, stands out. By configuring in this way, it is possible to partition the effects of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the confirmation lamp 311 so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, making the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 stand out more. Therefore, it is possible to configure it so as not to interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game. In addition, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, which increases the variety of effects.

<A: Multiple display areas are displayed by lighting one LED using a diffusion lens>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 (similar to the rear upward diffusion lens 423) has one recess formed by the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c, which is provided in a plurality of portions at least equal to the width of the light emitting surface of the rear downward LED 424. Therefore, the light irradiated from one rear downward LED 424 is diffused in three directions (i.e., the front direction, the direction tilted 20 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the direction tilted 20 degrees to the right from the front direction) in the rear light guide plate 420 by the plurality of recesses of the rear downward diffusion lens 425. In addition, since the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are each configured with the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also configured to be the same. As a result, when one LED is turned on, a plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 each formed at a position corresponding to each diffused light path can be made to emit light in the same color, and even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of effects can be produced, enhancing the presentation effect of the rear light guide plate 420 and drawing attention to the game.

<B: Patterns are placed on the light paths, and patterns are also placed in the areas where light paths of different colors overlap>
The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 includes a portion where the optical path of the "red" light and the optical path of the "red" light are displayed overlapping each other ("dark red"), a portion where only the optical path of the "red" light is displayed ("light red"), a portion where the optical path of the "red" light and the optical path of the "blue" light are displayed overlapping each other ("purple"), a portion where the optical path of the "red" light and the optical path of the "green" light are displayed overlapping each other ("yellow"), and a portion where the optical path of the "red" light, the optical path of the "blue" light, and the optical path of the "green" light are displayed overlapping each other ("white"). Each pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 different display colors, including a portion where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "blue" light overlap ("dark blue"), a portion displayed only by the optical path of the "blue" light ("light blue"), a portion where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("blue-green"), a portion where the optical path of the "green" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("dark green"), and a portion displayed only by the optical path of the "green" light ("light green").The patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 are arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even with a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (e.g., three colors), the light is diffused by the diffusion lenses 423, 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused light overlap, making it possible to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme, while differentiating the emitted colors in the non-overlapping and overlapping areas. Thus, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted colors, the LED emission control is simplified and the control burden for LED emission control can be reduced. In particular, when the above control is performed by arranging multiple types of monochromatic light-emitting diodes rather than using full-color LEDs, costs can be reduced by using monochromatic light-emitting diodes that are less expensive than full-color LEDs, and the LED emission control is simplified and the control burden for LED emission control can be reduced.

Furthermore, pattern 1 of first decorative pattern group 421 is arranged so as to overlap with the optical path of light of color 1 in a specified portion, while being arranged so as to overlap with the optical path of light of other colors in portions other than the specified portion. In other words, by forming pattern 1 of first decorative pattern group 421 so as to fit within a size range of multiple optical path widths, the luminescent color of each portion of pattern 1 can be made different, and pattern 1 can be expressed in a variety of colors.

<C: Different LEDs are turned on in sequence for each horizontal section area to display movement and color>
Of the three rear upper LEDs 422c and three rear lower LEDs 424 arranged in each of the right, central and left regions of the rear light-guiding plate 420, the rightmost rear upper LED 422c and three rear lower LEDs 424 are lit in sequence, starting with the central rear upper LED 422c and three rear lower LEDs 424, and finally the left rear upper LED 422c and three rear lower LEDs 424, creating an effect that makes it appear as if a school of fish, making up the first decorative pattern group 421, are swimming from right to left.

In addition, by lighting the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 sequentially from the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the first board surface decorative pattern group 60a and the second board surface decorative pattern group 60b (see Figure 3) on the base plate 60 of the game board 13, the presentation on the rear light guide plate 420 and the presentation on the game board 13 surface can be executed in an integrated manner, providing a powerful presentation using the entire game board 13 surface and increasing the interest of the game.

<D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is displayed with priority over the other (method of reducing the fish display area when the confirmation lamp is lit)>
When the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (during execution), the scale of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, so that the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game, is made to stand out. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, by making the side where the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (i.e., the upper side when viewed from the front of the rear light guide plate 420) in the first decorative symbol group 421 unlit or lighted to a small extent, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to configure it so as not to obstruct the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for the game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the performance using the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, thereby increasing the variety of performances.

<E: Weak and medium warnings are displayed on one light guide plate, and strong warnings are displayed on a separate light guide plate>
When the presentation indicating the probability of a jackpot in a variable presentation is configured to be able to be executed in multiple patterns, presentations with a low probability of a jackpot (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while presentations with a high probability of a jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on the other light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420).This makes it possible to execute a presentation without any discrepancies by preventing presentations with a high probability of a jackpot from being lit up due to noise or the player's viewing angle, etc., when a presentation with a low probability of a jackpot is executed.

<F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction is different for each display object, few-direction areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and many-direction areas (two directions, bubbles) within one light guide plate, strong effects in the few directions (weak effects in places where light paths overlap)>
In the front light guide plate 410, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 having the lowest expectation of a big win is formed in a portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured to be visible only with horizontal light. Also, a second decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 having a higher expectation of a big win than the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are formed in a portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), and the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are configured to be visible only with vertical light. Here, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the vertical light, the vertical light is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, are turned on, and even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, there is little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize the inconsistency in the presentation and provide the player with a game that feels natural.

<G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction differs for each display object, few-direction areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and many-direction areas (two directions, bubbles) within one light guide plate, few directions are located in front of the displays (main display, main drum, main LCD)>
In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation rate, is formed in the front light guide plate 410 at the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible only with horizontal light. Also, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are formed in the front light guide plate 410 at the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with vertical light. Furthermore, the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed on the back side of the portion (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion) where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap in the front light guide plate 410, and the drum display device 81 that executes the variable performance of the third pattern, which is the main performance of the game, is arranged. In this way, the drum display device 81 that executes the variable performance of the third pattern, which is the main performance of the game, is arranged on the portion (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion) where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap in the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group 421, which is the performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance, is configured to be displayable, so that the display results of the variable performance that is important for the game and the performance with a high expectation of a jackpot are not hindered, and the performance effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 can be enhanced, and the attention to the game can be increased.

<H: One light guide plate has a flat shape and a rounded shape, and both shapes guide light from the flat part (do not guide light from the rounded part)>
In the first embodiment, when light is incident (guided) to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is configured to be incident from the end face (part) of any flat plate part of each light guide plate 410, 420, and the light is not configured to be incident from the R-shaped part (i.e., the normal R-shaped part, the upper inverted R-shaped part, or the lower inverted R-shaped part). This is because, when light is attempted to be incident from the R-shaped part, the incident light's direction of travel is changed by the R-shaped part, and it may be difficult or impossible to properly light up the desired pattern. In addition, LEDs and the like must be arranged along the shape of the end face of the R-shaped part, which may reduce the design freedom. Furthermore, the R-shaped part is formed along the outer shape of the performance member such as the drum display device 81 and the movable role piece, and if an LED board or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped part, the design freedom of the performance member may be restricted. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410, 420 having an R-shaped portion, by making light incident from an end face (portion) of any of the flat plate portions, the above problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing each component can be increased.

<I: R-shape/reverse R-shape, display a preview of 1 up to the switching point (design display area determination part), do not place a design at the part where the R-shape switches>
In the front light guide plate 410, the normal R-shaped portion or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion are provided with the respective decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413, but none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are provided at the switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion. This is because, when a decorative pattern to be light-guided is provided at the switching point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, it is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the portion provided in the normal R-shaped portion and the portion provided in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, it may appear in an unintended way. Therefore, by configuring the transition point (area) between the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion so that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are placed, the expression of the patterns displayed by light guiding can be made appropriate, and a performance without discrepancies can be executed.

<J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong notice light guide plate (sunfish/bubble light guide plate, slit part of display area forming member)>
By arranging the lens cut 432 between the confirmation lamp 311 and the up-down position of the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the lens cut 432 can be diffused (weakened). Therefore, by suppressing light other than the light incident by the lighting of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, it is possible to suppress the abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a performance discrepancy such as the abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative pattern group 421, which has the highest jackpot reliability (expectation), so the front light guide plate 410 can also suppress the incidence of light entering from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 to the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 can be somewhat diffused (weakened), and the first decorative pattern group 421, which has a large performance discrepancy, can be suppressed from abnormally lighting when it is erroneously displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of performance discrepancies such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

<The K:1 light guide plate provides strong and weak effects, and at least the weak area illumination is highly anisotropic (good linearity, no diffusion, focusing lens)>
The front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment, like the rear light guide plate 420, is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). When the refractive index of the acrylic resin is set to 1.49 to 1.53, light incident from the first end face of each of the focusing lenses 414d, 415d, 416d is emitted in a straight direction (or almost straight; toward the upper side of the drawing in Figure 20) from the second end face. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each condenser lens 414d, 415d, 416d can be emitted in one direction in a condensed state without being diffused from the second end face side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, so that when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 to be displayed are turned on, the other decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are not turned on, and only the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 to be displayed can be appropriately turned on. In particular, when attempting to turn on the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest jackpot reliability, if the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and have a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are turned on, there is a risk that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content, and the gameplay will not be realized according to the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring each focusing lens 415d, 416d not to diffuse light toward at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to display only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 at an appropriate timing, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

<L:1 light guide plate provides strong and weak effects, and at least the strong area illumination is highly isotropic (diffusion lens, three-way lens)>
For decorative symbol groups with a high probability of winning, i.e., the third decorative symbol 412 and the like, a diffusing lens such as that used for lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 may be adopted instead of a condensing lens. The third decorative symbol 412 is a performance with a higher probability of winning than at least the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81 that the player focuses on during play. Therefore, it is necessary to comprehensively irradiate the third decorative symbol 412 with light using a diffusing lens to make the player clearly recognize the third decorative symbol 412. In addition, when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit, if the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, is lit, a discrepancy in performance will occur, but when the third decorative symbol 412 is lit, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412, is lit, the player focuses on the execution of the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and does not pay much attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, so that a discrepancy in performance is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by adopting the condenser lenses 415d, 416d for the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, and adopting a diffusing lens for the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, the performance effect of the front light guide plate 410 can be enhanced and attention to the game can be increased.

<M: Multiple light guide plates, at least one light guide plate with a diffusion means>
When using a plurality of light guide plates 410, 420 to configure a plurality of patterns of effects showing the probability of winning in a variable performance, the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d are utilized in one light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front light guide plate 410) to configure a plurality of types of effects (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) to be individually executable, and the diffusing lenses 423, 425 are employed in another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420) to configure a plurality of effects (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) to be executable in a variety of ways. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute more effects than the number of the plurality of light guide plates 410, 420, and by executing flashy effects in the light guide plates employing the diffusing lenses 423, 425, it is possible to enrich the variety of effects and increase the attention to the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a pachinko machine 10 in a second embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430 are configured to have a shape with multiple R-shaped portions (i.e., a downward inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion and an upward inverted R-shaped portion) that follow the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and are configured to illuminate and display the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 by irradiating light from the lateral (upper, lower, right or left) end faces of the flat plate portions of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420.

In contrast, in the second embodiment, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second display area forming member 460 are formed in a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. In addition, the second front lower LED 441 irradiates light onto the second front light guide plate 440 from the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed at the lower portion of the second front light guide plate 440. In addition, the second rear lower LED irradiates light onto the second rear light guide plate 450 from the lower end surface of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed at the lower portion of the second rear light guide plate 450.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

Figure 55 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to a schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment. Note that, for ease of explanation, in Figure 55, the spacing between the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, the second display area forming member 460, and the drum display device 81 constituting the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 55, the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment is disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and is composed of, in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a second display area forming member 460, a second front light guide plate 440, and a second rear light guide plate 450.

The second display area forming member 460, like the display area forming member 430, is made of a transparent resin (e.g., polycarbonate) and is formed in a flat plate shape different (unrelated) to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. It is also formed in a shape different from the shapes of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450 assembled to the light guide unit 400. In addition, this second display area forming member 460 has a second central opening 461 formed so that three patterns can be seen on each reel LR, CR, RR (see FIG. 4) in the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A predetermined second lens cut 462 is applied to the periphery of this second central opening 461, and it is configured so that the rear side of the second lens cut 462 cannot be seen or is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the second lens cut 462 around the second central opening 461 clearly shows the display area and pay lines of the symbols on the drum display device 81 to the player. In addition, the second front upper decorative symbol 442 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear upper decorative symbol 452 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 are configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the second central opening 461. Furthermore, the second front lower decorative symbol 443 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 are configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the lower part of the lower second lens cut 462.

The second front light guide plate 440, like the front light guide plate 410, is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic) and is configured with a second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 and is a shape opposite to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (i.e., an R-shape opposite to the R-shape of the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and a second front upper flat plate portion 440b, which is formed continuously from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and has a shape that fits along the second display area forming member 460.

The second front light guide plate 440 is configured so that the drum display device 81 and a part of the second rear light guide plate 450, which are arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the second front light guide plate 440, can be viewed from the second central opening 461 of the second display area forming member 460.

Furthermore, the back side of the second front light guide plate 440 (i.e. the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes corresponding to the second front upper decorative pattern 442 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443, and by lighting the second front lower LED 441 arranged below the second front light guide plate 440 when viewed from the front, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and by lighting the second front upper LED (not shown) arranged to the side of the second front light guide plate 440 when viewed from the front, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 formed on the back side of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a concentrating lens may be provided to concentrate the light emitted from the second front upper LED and the second front lower LED 441 and irradiate the light on the end face of the second front light guide plate 440.

Here, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second front upper decorative pattern 442 is configured with a shape that can reflect light incident from the second front upper LED (not shown) in a lateral direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured with a shape (e.g., vertical grooves) that does not or does not easily reflect light incident from the second front lower LED 441 in an upward direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Also, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second front lower decorative pattern 443 is configured with a shape that can reflect light incident from the second front lower LED 441 in an upward direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (vertical up and down direction), and is configured with a shape (e.g., horizontal grooves) that does not or does not easily reflect light incident from the second front upper LED (not shown) in a lateral direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, when it is desired to light up each of the decorative patterns 442, 443 of the second front light guide plate 440 appropriately, by configuring the decorative patterns 442, 443 that can be lit up to the direction (incident direction) of the light guided into the second front light guide plate 440 to be different, it is possible to light up the multiple decorative patterns 442, 443 individually on one second front light guide plate 440, thereby improving the expressiveness of one light guide plate 440 and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, a second front lower decorative pattern 443 is arranged on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440, and the light-emitting surface of the second front lower LED 441 that lights up and displays the second front lower decorative pattern 443 is arranged to face the lower end face of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. Since the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is configured in an R shape, if the light guided inside the second front light guide plate 440 is weak, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 may not be properly lit. Therefore, in order to accurately light and display the second front lower decorative pattern 443 arranged on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, the second front lower LED 441 guides light to the second front lower decorative pattern 443 from the end face close to the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, i.e., the lower end face of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, rather than from the end face far from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (i.e., the upper end face of the second front upper flat portion 440b). By configuring in this way, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 can be accurately lighted and displayed, and attention to the game can be increased.

The second rear light guide plate 450, like the rear light guide plate 420, is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic) and is composed of a second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, which has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 and corresponds to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (i.e., an R-shape in the same direction as the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and a second rear upper flat plate portion 450b, which is formed continuously from the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a and has a shape that follows the second display area forming member 460 (second front upper flat plate portion 440b).

The second rear light guide plate 450 is also configured so that a portion of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the second rear light guide plate 450 can be viewed from the second central opening 461 of the second display area forming member 460.

Furthermore, the back side of the second rear light guide plate 450 (i.e. the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes corresponding to the second upper rear decorative pattern 452 and the second lower rear decorative pattern 453, and by lighting the second lower rear LED 451 arranged below the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front, the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 formed on the back side of the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and by lighting the second upper rear LED (not shown) arranged to the side of the second light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front, the second upper rear decorative pattern 452 formed on the back side of the second upper rear flat plate portion 450b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a concentrating lens may be provided to concentrate the light emitted from the second rear upper LED and the second rear lower LED 451 and irradiate the light on the end face of the second rear light guide plate 450.

Here, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second upper rear decorative pattern 452 is configured with a shape that can reflect light incident from the second upper rear LED (not shown) in a lateral direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured with a shape (e.g., vertical grooves) that does not or does not easily reflect light incident from the upper direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the second lower rear LED 451. Also, the lens cut (uneven shape) forming the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is configured with a shape that can reflect light incident from the upper direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (vertical up and down direction) by the second lower rear LED 451, and is configured with a shape (e.g., horizontal grooves) that does not or does not easily reflect light incident from the lateral direction as viewed from the front toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the second upper rear LED (not shown). With this configuration, when it is desired to light up each of the decorative patterns 452, 453 of the second rear light guide plate 450 as appropriate, the decorative patterns 452, 453 that can be lit up and displayed are different depending on the direction (incident direction) of the light guided into the second rear light guide plate 450. This makes it possible to light up and display multiple decorative patterns 452, 453 individually on one second rear light guide plate 450, thereby improving the expressiveness of one light guide plate 450 and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, a second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is arranged on the back side of the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450, and the light emitting surface of the second lower rear LED 451 that lights up and displays the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is arranged to face the lower end face of the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a. Since the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a is configured in an R shape, if the light guided inside the second light guide plate 450 is weak, the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 may not be properly lit. Therefore, in order to accurately light and display the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 arranged on the back side of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, the second rear lower LED 451 guides light to the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 from the end face close to the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, i.e., the lower end face of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, rather than from the end face far from the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a (i.e., the upper end face of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b). By configuring in this way, the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be accurately lighted and displayed, and attention to the game can be increased.

Furthermore, the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450 are formed by bending in directions away from each other, and a predetermined space is formed between the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 formed on the rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a. With this configuration, even if the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are lit at the same time, by forming a predetermined interval between the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 by the above-mentioned predetermined space, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be lit and displayed so that they can be recognized from each other, and a three-dimensional effect can be created by the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453.

In addition, by arranging the second front lower LED 441 on the extension of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a in order to light up the second front lower decorative pattern 443 on the second front light guide plate 440 (hereinafter, the same applies to the second rear light guide plate 450), it is not necessary to arrange the LED for lighting on the extension of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b of the second front light guide plate 440, so that the constraints on the arrangement of the LEDs can be relaxed and the design freedom of the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

<Third embodiment> Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the light from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is guided (irradiated) into the front light guide plate 410 via the respective condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and the light from each of the LEDs 422c and 424 is guided (irradiated) into the rear light guide plate 420 via the respective diffusing lenses 423 and 425, and the same type of lens is used for one light guide plate 410 and 420. In contrast, in the third embodiment, the diffusing lens 473 and the condensing lenses 475b and 476b are used in combination for one third light guide plate 470 formed in a shape that follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81.

Specifically, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 equivalent (or identical) to the first decorative pattern group 421 of the first embodiment is formed on the back side of the third positive R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470, and a third lower decorative pattern group 474 equivalent (or identical) to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the first embodiment is formed on the back side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b of the third light guide plate 470. Then, in order to light and display the third upper decorative pattern group 471, the third light guide plate 470 is configured to irradiate light from the third upper LED 472 through the third upper diffusion lens 473. In order to light and display the third lower decorative pattern group 474, the light from the third right LED 475a provided in the third right LED unit 475 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 through the third right condenser lens 475b, and the light from the third left LED 476a provided in the third left LED unit 476 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 through the third left condenser lens 476b. Note that the relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third lower decorative pattern group 474 in the third embodiment is set as in the first embodiment, such that the case where the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is lit and displayed is more likely to result in a jackpot than the case where the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is lit and displayed.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first or second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first or second embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

Figure 56 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third upward LED 472, the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third right LED 475a of the third right LED unit 475, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third left LED 476a of the third left LED unit 476, which may be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment. Note that in Figure 56, the third upward LED 472, the third right LED 475a, and the third left LED 476a, as well as the third upward diffusing lens 473, the third right focusing lens 465b, and the third left focusing lens 476b are shown diagrammatically for ease of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 56, the third positive R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 is formed with a third upper decorative pattern group 471 as a school of fish pattern that is a pattern imitating a school of fish of multiple types. The uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to this third upper decorative pattern group 471 is configured so that light that is guided to the third positive R-shaped portion 470c and incident in the vertical and diagonal directions is emitted or easily emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and light that is incident from other directions (for example, the horizontal direction) is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471. Therefore, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is illuminated and visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light diffused downward or diagonally from the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when light is irradiated from a plurality of third upward LEDs 472 provided above the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front to a third upward diffusion lens 473 composed of a plurality of recesses on the upper end face of the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front, the light is diffused in a plurality of directions from each diffusion lens 473 (three directions, left, center, and right, in the third embodiment). Note that the third upward diffusion lens 473 is configured in the same way as the rear downward diffusion lens 425 in the first embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, nine third upward LEDs 472 are provided, and one recess of the third upward diffusion lens 473 is arranged to correspond to one third upward LED 472. In addition, in the third upward diffusion lens 473 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the third light guide plate 470, no rightward or leftward diffusion section is formed, and the third upward diffusion lens 473 is formed only by the frontward diffusion section and the leftward diffusion section, or the frontward diffusion section and the rightward diffusion section. By configuring in this way, light is not diffused in a direction in which the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is not arranged, and the light irradiated by the third upward LED 472 can be irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 without waste.

The light irradiated downward in front view (lower side of the drawing) from one third upward LED 472 through the front diffusion section (not shown) of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473 is configured to overlap with the light irradiated (diffused) to the left or right from the adjacent third upward LED 472 through the left diffusion section (not shown) or right diffusion section (not shown) of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473 at the intersection of their respective optical paths. Also, the light irradiated downward in front view from one third upward LED 472 through the left diffusion section or right diffusion section of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473 is configured to overlap with the light irradiated (diffused) to the right or left from the adjacent third upward LED 472 through the right diffusion section or left diffusion section of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473 at the intersection of their respective optical paths.

Specifically, for example, when the LEDs of the third upward LED 472 are lit in three colors, namely, "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", and "green", in order from the right, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "red" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the second LED from the right (i.e., the eighth from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "blue" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the third LED from the right (i.e., the seventh from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "green" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (i.e., the sixth from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "red" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, The third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fifth LED from the right (i.e., fifth from the left; center) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "blue" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the sixth LED from the right (i.e., fourth from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "green" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the seventh LED from the right (i.e., third from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "red" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the eighth LED from the right (i.e., second from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "blue" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the ninth LED from the right (i.e., leftmost) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "green" light in an optical path of a predetermined width.

In this case, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 formed on the third positive R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 is displayed in a total of six display colors, including at least a portion displayed only by the optical path of "red" light ("red"), a portion displayed by overlapping the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "blue" light ("purple"), a portion displayed by overlapping the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "green" light ("yellow"), a portion displayed only by the optical path of "blue" light ("blue-green"), and a portion displayed only by the optical path of "green" light ("green"). Then, one fish pattern of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is arranged on each optical path and in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even with a lighting pattern with a small number of colors (e.g., three colors), the third upward diffusion lens 473 diffuses the light, and the optical paths of the diffused light overlap, making it possible to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme, while differentiating the emitted colors in the non-overlapping and overlapping areas. Thus, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emitted colors, the LED emission control is simplified and the control burden for LED emission control can be reduced. In particular, when the above control is performed by arranging multiple types of monochromatic light-emitting diodes rather than using full-color LEDs, costs can be reduced by using monochromatic light-emitting diodes, which are less expensive than full-color LEDs, and the LED emission control is simplified and the control burden for LED emission control can be reduced.

Furthermore, the one fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of one color of light in a specified portion, while being arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of other colors of light in portions other than the specified portion. In other words, by forming the one fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 so that it fits within a range of multiple optical path widths, the luminous color of each portion of the one fish pattern can be made different, and the one fish pattern in the third upper decorative pattern group 471 can be expressed in a variety of colors.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the third upper LEDs 472 are arranged in threes each in the right, central and left regions of the third light guide plate 470, and are sequentially lit from the rightmost third upper LED 472, to the central third upper LED 472, and to the left third upper LED 472, in that order, to create an effect in which a school of fish, the third upper decorative pattern group 471, appears to be swimming from right to left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the third light guide plate 470 has a third lower decorative pattern group 474 as a bubble group pattern simulating a plurality of bubbles formed over the entire area of the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. This third lower decorative pattern group 474 is arranged at least in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b at a position that does not overlap (avoid) with the optical path of the light diffused from the above-mentioned third upward diffusion lens 473, so that the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is configured to be unlikely to be lit even when the third upward LED 472 is lit.

In addition, when light is irradiated from the third right LED 475a provided on the right side of the third lower flat portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 to the right end face of the third right focusing lens 475b arranged on the right side of the third lower flat portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 when viewed from the front, the light is configured to travel straight (to the left) from the left end face of the third right focusing lens 475b without being diffused. Furthermore, when the third left LED 476a provided on the left side of the third lower flat portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front illuminates the left end face of the third left focusing lens 476b arranged on the left side of the third lower flat portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front, the light is configured to travel straight (to the right) from the right end face of the third left focusing lens 476b without being diffused.

The third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a are positioned such that one third right LED 475a and one third left LED 476a are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction).

The uneven lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is configured so that light incident laterally among the light guided to the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b is emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and light incident from other directions (e.g., up and down directions or diagonal directions) is not emitted or is difficult to be emitted toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cut corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474. Therefore, the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is illuminated and visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by light incident laterally from the left end face and/or right end face of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470.

Here, as described above, in the third light guide plate 470, the third regular R-shaped portion 470c or the third lower flat portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b are arranged with the respective decorative pattern groups 471, 474, but like the front light guide plate 410 of the first embodiment, none of the decorative pattern groups 471, 474 are arranged at the switching point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. This is because, when a decorative pattern to be light-guided is arranged at the switching point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, the light reflected (guided) inside the third light guide plate 470 is unlikely to reach the portion arranged in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c and the portion arranged in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b appropriately, and depending on the position of the player's line of sight, it may appear in an unintended way. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, by configuring so that none of the decorative pattern groups 471, 74 are placed at the transition point P between the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third normal R-shaped portion 470c, the expression of the light-guiding displayed pattern can be made appropriate, and a performance without discrepancies can be performed.

The third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, the light incident from the first end face of each condenser lens 475b, 476b is emitted from the second end face in a straight direction (or almost straight; left or right direction in FIG. 56). This allows the light incident from the first end face of each condenser lens 475b, 476b to be emitted in one direction in a concentrated state without being diffused from the second end face side formed into a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, so that when it is desired to light up the third lower decorative pattern group 474, when the corresponding LEDs 475a, 476a are lit up, the other decorative patterns (i.e., the third upper decorative pattern group 471) are not lit up, and only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 can be appropriately lit up and displayed. In particular, since the third lower decorative pattern group 474 has a lower jackpot reliability than the third upper decorative pattern group 471, if the third upper decorative pattern group 471, which is formed on the same light guide plate 470 and has a higher jackpot expectation than the third lower decorative pattern group 474, is lit when the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is attempted to be lit, there is a risk that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content and that the gameplay will not be realized according to the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which has a low jackpot expectation, not to be diffused by each of the condenser lenses 475b, 476b, it is possible to display only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 at the appropriate timing, making it difficult for inconsistencies in the presentation content to occur.

On the other hand, the light entering the third light guide plate 470 from the third upward LED 472 via the third upward diffusion lens 473 is guided downward and diagonally downward, and so reaches the position of the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which is arranged below the third upper decorative pattern group 471 when viewed from the front, and there is a risk that the third lower decorative pattern group 474 will be lit up. However, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is a presentation with a lower jackpot expectation than the third upper decorative symbol group 471. Even if the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, is lit when the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is lit, the player focuses on the execution of the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and does not pay much attention to the execution of the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation, so that a presentation discrepancy is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by adopting the condenser lenses 475b and 476b for the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation, and adopting the diffusing lens 473 for the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the third light guide plate 470 and increase attention to the game while configuring it so that a discrepancy in presentation is unlikely to occur.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 57 and 58.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, first, referring to FIG. 57, the details of the pseudo-stop pattern patterns that can be used in the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" performed in the variable performance of the third pattern will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns of pseudo-stop patterns that can be stopped in the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" in the variable performance of the third pattern in the fourth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the drum display device 81 is configured so that the arrangement of symbols on the left reel LR, the center reel CR, and the right reel RR are different from each other. More specifically, broadly speaking, first, (1) the third symbols are arranged in descending order (i.e., "8" → "7" → "6" → ...) in the left reel LR in the moving direction (downward), while the third symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e., "1" → "2" → "3" → ...) in the moving direction (downward) in the center reel CR and the right reel RR. In addition, (2) the third symbol of the "345" symbol, in which multiple symbols are integrated, is arranged on the center reel CR, which is the final stop symbol row. Furthermore, (3) the third symbol corresponding to the "4" symbol (part of the "345" symbol) arranged on the center reel CR is not arranged on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. In addition, (4) on the left reel LR, the "Chance" symbol is arranged in a position that makes it visible next to the "1" symbol, while on the center reel CR and right reel RR, the "Chance" symbol is arranged in a position that makes it visible next to the "8" symbol.

The above configuration (1) is mainly for the purpose of enriching the variation of the so-called single reach, which is a "reach display" on the first pay line, and the so-called double reach, which is a "reach display" on the second pay line, in the variable presentation of the third symbol. If all the reels LR, CR, and RR are arranged in the same order (for example, ascending order) in a drum display device 81 in which three third symbols are visible on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, the so-called single reach will only occur on the middle pay lines, and the so-called double reach will only occur on the upper and lower pay lines. In such a case, the variation of the "reach display" may become stale, and the player may lose interest in the game. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, by reversing the order of the symbols on at least the left reel LR and the right reel RR that can form the "reach display" (i.e., descending and ascending), a so-called single reach can occur on the upper, middle, and lower pay lines, respectively, and a so-called double reach can occur on the pay lines sloping downward to the right and on the pay lines sloping upward to the right. By configuring in this way, the variety of possible "reach displays" can be increased, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the configuration of (2) above is configured so that in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether a "reach display" is formed or not, when the "345" symbol stops on the center reel CR, it can change to a jackpot result, and the "345" symbol is set as a so-called chance symbol, so that even if the "reach display" does not appear because the stopped symbols on the left reel LR and the right reel RR are different, the expectation of a jackpot can remain until the final sequence of stopped symbols has stopped. More specifically, if the "345" symbol stops when the drive of the center reel CR stops (temporarily stops), it is configured so that it can develop into a "re-variation" variable element that changes all reels LR, CR, and RR again. This "re-change" variable element can only be selected if the lottery result of the jackpot has been derived, so when the "345" symbol stops in the change effect and the "re-change" variable element is executed, it is possible to execute the so-called one-shot reversal effect, which can increase the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, the configuration of (3) above includes a "4" only in the "345" pattern arranged only on the center reel CR, while not arranging the "4" pattern on the left reel LR and right reel RR. Although the "reach display" itself cannot occur due to the "4" pattern, it makes the "345" pattern on the center reel CR stand out and highlights its uniqueness, making the gameplay of whether or not the "345" pattern will stop on the center reel CR more prominent, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, the above configuration (4) arranges a "Chance" symbol (hereinafter, the "Chance" symbol may be abbreviated to "C" symbol) at the transition area of the left reel LR where number symbols are arranged in descending order (i.e., "8" symbol → "7" symbol → ... → "1" symbol), i.e., the area between the "1" symbol and the "8" symbol, and arranges a "Chance" symbol at the transition area of the middle reel CR and right reel RR where number symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e., "1" symbol → "2" symbol → ... → "8" symbol), i.e., the area between the "8" symbol and the "1" symbol. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a "chance" symbol that is not a number symbol is stopped and displayed, a "pseudo-change" variable element, a "re-change" variable element, or a "special reach" variable element with the highest probability of winning is performed, and when the "chance" symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable performance is continued and a big win can be expected in the variable performance. In this way, in the variable performance, by arranging "chance" symbols with a different nature from the number symbols in the middle of the number symbols arranged in descending or ascending order on each reel LR, CR, RR that changes downward, it is possible to make the number symbols that change on each reel LR, CR, RR easier to recognize, and by arranging "chance" symbols with a different nature from the number symbols, it is possible to enrich the variety of the game and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so that when the "reach display" with the "7" symbol appears in the (5) variable presentation, the jackpot result (i.e., "777") that may cause a "probability fluctuation state" is likely to appear. In other words, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "reach display" with the "7" symbol is likely to be selected, whereas if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "reach display" with the "7" symbol is unlikely to be selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of a jackpot when the "reach display" with the "7" symbol appears, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is provided with an effect in which the "reach forming symbol" changes in stages. More specifically, the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" of the fourth embodiment is provided with a symbol change effect in which the "reach forming symbol" changes in stages (in ascending order) in three stages, and for example, when the variable element of the "slow fluctuation" ends, a pseudo "1" symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel LR, and a pseudo "1" symbol is also stopped in the middle of the right reel RR, and a "reach display" is generated on the active line in the middle (hereinafter, this situation will be referred to as "pseudo stop 1"). When the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element is executed in the "pseudo fluctuation", the "reach display" of the "1" symbol, which is a pseudo stop symbol, changes to a "reach display" of the "2" symbol, which is also a pseudo stop symbol, and stops temporarily (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 2"), and then changes to a "reach display" of the "3" symbol (hereinafter, this situation may be referred to as "reach formation"), and various "reach displays" are executed from the "normal reach" variable element. By configuring in this way, a performance is executed in which the "reach display" occurs with which number symbol in the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, that is, whether or not a "reach display" that can cause a "probability fluctuation state" occurs, thereby enriching the variation of the game and improving the interest of the game. The number of stages that can be changed in stages in the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element may be any number of times that can be executed within the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, and may be two stages or less (including one time) or four stages or more.

However, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR are configured as in (1) to (4) above to perform the "pseudo fluctuation" variable elements, and further configured to perform the variable presentation with the game specifications as in (5) above, in the symbol change presentation executed by the "pseudo fluctuation" variable elements, certain restrictions are imposed on the stopping patterns of the pseudo stop symbols of "pseudo stop 1," "pseudo stop 2," and "reach formation" during the "pseudo fluctuation" variable elements.

Here, referring to FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, the pattern of the pseudo stop symbol that can be executed in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the pattern of the pseudo stop symbol that can be stopped in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" in the variable performance of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. Also, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" performed in the drum display device 81 in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 58(a) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 1" is stopped, FIG. 58(b) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(a), FIG. 58(c) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the "reach formation symbol" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58(b), and FIG. 58(d) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the "reach display" is performed from the state of FIG. 58(c). In FIG. 57, the "●" indicates the center reel CR that is changing, and the numbers on the left and right of it indicate the stopped symbols on the left reel LR and right reel RR. In FIG. 58, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

As shown in FIG. 57, first, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 1," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "1" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "2" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "3" symbol (i.e., "1●1" → "2●2" → "3●3"), are not restricted by the configurations (1) to (5) above, and are therefore configured to be executed.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 58(a), in the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, when the "slow fluctuation" variable element ends, the "1" symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle of the left reel LR and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 as a "pseudo stop 1", creating a state as if a "reach display" with the "1" symbol has occurred. The fluctuation performance then progresses with this "reach display" with the "1" symbol being maintained for a predetermined period (e.g., "2 seconds")

Then, from the state shown in Fig. 58(a), the left reel LR and right reel RR spin downwards, and the "2" symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle of the left reel LR and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 as a "pseudo stop 2", as if a "reach display" with a "1" symbol had been replaced by a "reach display" with a "2" symbol (see Fig. 58(b)). The variable presentation then progresses with this "reach display" with the "2" symbol being maintained for a predetermined period of time (e.g., "2 seconds")

Then, from the state shown in Fig. 58(b), the left reel LR and right reel RR spin downwards, and the "3" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel LR and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 as a "reach formation", and the "reach display" with the "2" symbol is replaced by a "reach display" with the "3" symbol (see Fig. 58(c)). From this state, the "reach display" shown in Fig. 58(d) (for example, a variable element of a "normal reach") is executed, and an effect is performed to see whether or not the "reach display" will show a jackpot display result.

Returning to Figure 57 for further explanation, next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 2" where "pseudo stop 1" is the "2" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "3" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "4" symbol (i.e., "2●2" → "3●3" → "4●4") are configured so that they cannot be executed due to the constraint imposed by the configuration in (3) above, i.e., the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 3" where "pseudo stop 1" is the "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "4" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "5" symbol (i.e., "3●3" → "4●4" → "5●5") are configured to be unable to be executed, just like "Pattern 2" above, due to the constraints imposed by the configuration in (3) above, i.e., the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 4," in which "pseudo stop 1" is the "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "5" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "6" symbol (i.e., "3●3" → "5●5" → "6●6"), do not include the "4" symbol, and are therefore not affected by the constraints imposed by the configuration in (3) above. However, although "pseudo stop 1" was a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "3" symbol) that could cause a "probability fluctuation state", "reach formation" has changed to a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "6" symbol) that does not cause a "probability fluctuation state", and this is a so-called downgrade effect in which it appears that the profit that can be awarded has decreased, so it is configured not to be executed so that the player does not lose interest in the game.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 5" where "Pseudo Stop 1" is the "4" symbol, "Pseudo Stop 2" is the "5" symbol, and "Reach Formation" is the "6" symbol (i.e., "4●4" → "5●5" → "6●6") are configured to be unable to be executed due to the constraints imposed by the configuration in (3) above, i.e., the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol, just like "Pattern 2" and "Pattern 3" above.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 6" where "pseudo stop 1" is the "5" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "6" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "7" symbol (i.e., "5●5" → "6●6" → "7●7") are not restricted by the configurations (1) to (5) above, and are therefore configured to be executed.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 7" where "pseudo stop 1" is the "6" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "7" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "8" symbol (i.e., "6●6" → "7●7" → "8●8") are configured not to be executed so that the player does not lose interest in the game, because, due to the constraints in (5) above, although "pseudo stop 2" was a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "7" symbol) that is likely to result in a jackpot, "reach formation" has changed to a normal "reach display" (i.e., a reach with an "8" symbol). This is a so-called downgrade effect that gives the appearance of a decrease in the profit that can be awarded, so the game is configured not to be executed so as to not lose interest in the game for the player.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 8," in which "pseudo stop 1" is the "7" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "8" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "C" symbol (i.e., "7●7" → "8●8" → "C●C"), are configured not to be executed because, due to the constraint in (5) above, although "pseudo stop 1" was a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "7" symbol) that makes it easy for a jackpot to occur, "pseudo stop 2" has changed to a normal "reach display" (i.e., a reach with an "8" symbol), which is a so-called downgrade that would ruin the player's interest. In addition, when the "C" symbol stops, the "re-fluctuation" variable element may be executed, so this pattern cannot necessarily be called a so-called downgrade performance, but when the "C" symbol stops, the "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element is configured to be executed, and since the "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element executes the "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element again, this "Pattern 8" is configured not to be executed.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 9," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "8" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "C" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "1" symbol (i.e., "8●8" → "C●C" → "1●1"), are changed to a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "C" symbol) in "pseudo stop 2" that may generate a variable element of "re-fluctuation" or "pseudo fluctuation" in "reach formation" (i.e., a reach with a "1" symbol) that does not generate a variable element of "re-fluctuation" or "pseudo fluctuation", which is a so-called downgrade that makes it look like the profit that can be awarded has decreased, and is configured not to be executed so that the player does not lose interest in the game.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 10" where "pseudo stop 1" is the "8" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "1" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "2" symbol (i.e., "8●8" → "1●1" → "2●2") is configured to skip the "reach display" by the "C" symbol from "pseudo stop 1" to "pseudo stop 2" and change from the "8" symbol to the "1" symbol, and is configured to be executed since it is not restricted by the configurations (1) to (5) above. Note that in the case of this "Pattern 10", the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is executed by omitting (skipping) the "C" symbol, so the symbol control in the above "Pattern 1" and "Pattern 6" (changing the acceleration/deceleration pattern of each reel LR, CR, RR, and the time scale of the constant speed fluctuation, fine adjustment of the slip return, etc.) is configured to be different.

It is also possible to configure the system so that, like this "Pattern 10", one of the consecutive symbols is skipped and a pattern that executes the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is not executed. By configuring it in this way, the control pattern of each reel LR, CR, RR related to the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" can be simplified, and the control burden related to the symbol control can be reduced.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 11," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "C" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "1" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "2" symbol (i.e., "C●C" → "1●1" → "2●2"), are configured so that they cannot be executed, even though in "pseudo stop 1" it was a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "C" symbol) that can generate the variable elements of "re-fluctuation" or "pseudo fluctuation", but in "reach formation" it has changed to a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "2" symbol) that does not generate the variable elements of "re-fluctuation" or "pseudo fluctuation". This is a so-called downgrade that will ruin the player's interest, and so it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the pseudo stop symbol in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is selected from "Pattern 1", "Pattern 6" and "Pattern 10", and other patterns (i.e., "Pattern 2", "Pattern 3", "Pattern 4", "Pattern 5", "Pattern 7", "Pattern 8", "Pattern 9" and "Pattern 11") are configured not to be executed in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation". By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform the variable performance while accurately maintaining various game specifications, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance, suppressing the player's feeling of discomfort and losing interest, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation", it is possible to suppress the execution of the so-called downgrade performance in which the third symbol with a large profit that is temporarily stopped changes to the third symbol with a small profit, and suppress the player's losing interest in the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to third embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 59 to 70.

In the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot result with a predetermined number pattern appears in a variable presentation, the pattern control and sound output control in the so-called "full rotation" presentation in which the number pattern changes while maintaining the jackpot result within the variable presentation will be described.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

First, referring to Figure 59, the configuration of the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR in the left reel unit 81a1, center reel unit 81a2, and right reel unit 81a3 that make up the drum display device 81 will be described. The configurations of the left reel unit 81a1, center reel unit 81a2, and right reel unit 81a3 are the same or equivalent, so Figure 59 will use the left reel unit 81a1 (left reel LR) as an example for explanation.

The left reel unit 81a1 comprises a cylindrical member 610, which is a cylindrical base body, and a left reel LR that is endlessly wound around the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical member 610. The left reel LR is attached to the cylindrical member 610 via a pair of seals (not shown) formed along both sides of the long side of the left reel LR so that the left reel LR remains wound around the cylindrical member 610.

As described above, the number symbols and "chance" symbols serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the left reel LR (see FIG. 4). An attachment recess 610a is formed in the center of this cylindrical member 610, and the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is attached to this attachment recess 610a via a disk-shaped connecting plate 611. As a result, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 rotates, the cylindrical member 610 rotates around the drive shaft, and this rotation changes the number symbols and "chance" symbols of the left reel LR visible from the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 6).

The stepping motor 600 is fixed by a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw to the side of a fixed plate (not shown) that is arranged in an upright position inside the drum display device 81. A reel position detection sensor 620 is fixed to this fixed plate, and the reel position detection sensor 620 has a light emitting element 621 and a light receiving element 622 held at a predetermined distance.

The base end 632 of the initial position member 630, which extends radially, is fixed to the connecting plate 611 integrated with the cylindrical member 610 by a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

The tip 631 of this initial position member 630 is bent at a substantially right angle from the base end 632 and is aligned so that it can pass between the light emitting element 621 and the light receiving element 622 of the reel position detection sensor 620. Then, every time the left reel LR rotates once, the reel position detection sensor 620 detects the passage of the tip 631 of the initial position member 630, and each time it detects this, a detection signal is output to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 33). The display control device 114 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel LR for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 600 is set so that the left reel LR rotates once when an excitation signal of, for example, 400 pulses is applied, and the rotational position of the stepping motor 600, i.e., the rotational position of the left reel LR, is driven and controlled by the display control device 114 depending on the output state of this excitation signal.

More specifically, the left reel LR has multiple symbols and areas (a total of 16 symbols, including number symbols, "chance" symbols, and blank regions, in the fifth embodiment) drawn along its long side (rotation direction). Therefore, to switch from a symbol (region) in a given position to the next region (symbol), i.e., to change the symbol by one frame, 25 pulses (= 400 ÷ 16 symbols = 16 frames) are required. Then, depending on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel position detection sensor 620 is output, it is possible to recognize which symbols and regions are visible from the central opening 431 of the display region forming member 430 (see FIG. 6), and to control the symbols to make any symbol and region visible from the central opening 431 of the display region forming member 430.

As described above, the number of patterns and areas visible through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 among the patterns and areas on the left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR is determined by the size of the pattern (area) and the vertical length of the central opening 431, and in the fifth embodiment, each reel LR, CR, and RR is configured to have three patterns and areas. Therefore, when each reel LR, CR, and RR are all stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 patterns and areas are visible to the player.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 66.

First, the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to Figures 60 and 61. Figure 60 is a schematic diagram showing the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment. Also, Figure 61 is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment.

The stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment employs a hybrid type two-phase excitation drive type stepping motor that employs a one-two phase excitation drive type. Note that the stepping motor 600 is not limited to a hybrid type or two-phase stepping motor, and various other stepping motors may be employed, such as a four-phase excitation drive type or five-phase excitation drive type stepping motor, or a one-phase excitation drive type stepping motor.

As shown in FIG. 60, a hybrid stepping motor 600 is composed of a rotating part 602 located in the center and a fixed part 601 having a first shaft part 603, a second shaft part 604, a third shaft part 605, and a fourth shaft part 606 arranged around the rotating part 602.

The rotating part 602 is composed of a front rotating part 602a magnetized to the north pole and a rear rotating part 602b magnetized to the south pole, and is attached to the rotating shaft in a state where the teeth on the periphery (outer periphery) of the rear rotating part 602b are positioned between the teeth on the periphery (outer periphery) of the front rotating part 602a and are shifted by 1/2 pitch relative to each other. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotating part 602a and the rear rotating part 602b.

As shown in FIG. 61, excitation coils L1 and L3 are bifilar-wound on the first shaft portion 603 and the third shaft portion 605, and the end of the excitation coil L1 is connected to the beginning of the excitation coil L3, to which a predetermined DC power supply +B (e.g., 24 volts) is applied. Similarly, excitation coils L2 and L4 are bifilar-wound on the second shaft portion 604 and the fourth shaft portion 606, and the end of the excitation coil L2 is connected to the beginning of the excitation coil L4, to which the DC power supply +B is also applied.

Here, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the first shaft portion 603 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the south pole and the third shaft portion 605 to the north pole is referred to as the "A phase." In addition, the phase opposite to the "A phase," in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the third shaft portion 605 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the north pole and the third shaft portion to the south pole is referred to as the "reverse A phase" (in FIG. 61, a "-" is written above the "A").

Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the second shaft portion 604 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the south pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the north pole is referred to as the "B phase." In addition, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L4 of the fourth shaft portion 606 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the north pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the south pole is referred to as the "reverse B phase" (in FIG. 61, a "-" is written above the "B").

In the fifth embodiment, in a stepping motor 600 using a 1-2 phase excitation drive method, in the case of a 1-phase excitation drive method, the rotating part 602 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to "phase A", "phase B", "reverse phase A" and "reverse phase B".

That is, for example, when the "A phase" is applied (current is passed), the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603, which has become the S pole, and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a, and the protrusion of the third shaft portion 605, which has become the N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotating portion 602b, which have become the N pole, face each other due to their respective attractive forces. Next, when the "B phase" is applied (current is passed), the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604, which has become the S pole, and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft portion 606, which has become the N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotating portion 602b, which have become the N pole, face each other due to their respective attractive forces. Next, when the "reverse A phase" is applied (current is passed), the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603, which has become the N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotating portion 602b, and the protrusion of the third shaft portion 605, which has become the S pole, and the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a, which have become the N pole, face each other due to their respective attractive forces. Next, when "reverse B phase" is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604, which has become an N pole, and the tooth of the rear rotating portion 602b, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft portion 606, which has become an S pole, and the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a, face each other due to attractive forces. By exciting in this order, the rotating portion 602 rotates clockwise in FIG. 60.

Now, with reference to FIG. 62, the excitation sequence of the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the excitation data and the excitation order pointer in the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment employs a 1-2 phase excitation drive method in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed. In 1-phase excitation, only one set of the first to fourth shaft portions 603-606 is excited, and in 2-phase excitation, two adjacent sets of the first to fourth shaft portions 603-606 are excited. In this 1-2 phase excitation drive method, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequences (excitation order) of (a) to (h).

Specifically, the 1-2 phase excitation drive method is a drive method in which first, (a) only "A phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then (b) both "A phase" and "B phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), then (c) only "B phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then (d) both "B phase" and "inverse A phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), then (e) only "inverse A phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then (f) both "inverse A phase" and "inverse B phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), then (g) only "inverse B phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then (h) both "inverse B phase" and "A phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), and then returns to (a).

In the fifth embodiment, the left reel LR rotates once with an excitation signal of 400 pulses, so the angle change based on a one-pulse excitation signal, i.e., the angle change per step, is 9 degrees.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 600 is given to the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) as the excitation data shown in FIG. 62. This excitation data is stored in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the appropriate excitation data is output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 by a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU (not shown) of the display control device 114 every 2 milliseconds, which is the same interval as the periodic process (see S1102 to S1109 in FIG. 46) in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. The excitation phase for the stepping motor 600 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to that excitation phase. Note that the interval of the timer interrupt process of the display control device 114 may be configured to be every 1 millisecond, which is the same interval as the periodic process in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113.

The excitation phase during initial excitation of the stepping motor 600 is configured to perform two-phase excitation. In the case of one-phase excitation, the rotational torque generated is smaller than in the case of two-phase excitation, so there is a possibility that sufficient initial speed cannot be obtained. If sufficient initial speed is not obtained, there is a high possibility of stepping out, so two-phase excitation is preferable for initial excitation.

When stopping the stepping motor 600, four-phase excitation is performed immediately after two-phase excitation. If braking processing is performed using only two-phase excitation, there is a concern that the strong braking force will cause the rotation speed to drop suddenly, and the player will feel uncomfortable with the movement of each reel LR, CR, and RR when braking. In contrast, by performing four-phase excitation immediately after two-phase excitation, each reel LR, CR, and RR can be stopped smoothly.

When using the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment, the driving characteristics as shown in FIG. 63 or FIG. 64 are required. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed in a series of variable effects in the fifth embodiment. Also, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed during the "full rotation" effect in the fifth embodiment.

The example shown in Figure 63 shows the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 600 in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, and is divided into an acceleration period Ta during which the stepping motor 600 starts rotating after the variable presentation starts and reaches a constant speed rotation at a high speed where the symbols are difficult for the player to see, a high-speed constant-speed period Tb during which the motor rotates at this high-speed constant speed (e.g., one frame changes every 100 ms), a first deceleration period Tc during which the motor decelerates from the high-speed constant-speed rotation to a constant speed rotation at a low speed where the symbols are visible to the player, a low-speed constant-speed period Td during which the motor rotates at the low speed, and a second deceleration period Te during which the motor stops rotating at the low-speed constant-speed.

In other words, the period consisting of the acceleration period Ta and the high-speed constant period Tb matches the execution time of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" in the variable presentation, and is set so that Ta + Tb = 10 seconds. Also, the period consisting of the first deceleration period Tc, the low-speed constant period Td, and the second deceleration period Te matches the time until the left reel LR stops during the execution time of the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" in the variable presentation, and is set so that Tc + Td + Te ≦ 5 seconds.

The example shown in FIG. 64 shows the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 600 during a "full rotation" presentation, which is one type of "re-variation" presentation mode. In a "full rotation" presentation, when a jackpot symbol (e.g., a jackpot result with a "5" symbol) appears on any of the active lines, the jackpot symbol changes again, and each of the reels LR, CR, and RR rotates approximately once, changing into another jackpot symbol (e.g., a jackpot result with a "6" symbol). This re-variation and provisional stop is then executed multiple times, and finally the jackpot symbol (e.g., a jackpot result with a "7" symbol) corresponding to the jackpot result that won the jackpot lottery is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the stepping motor 600 starts to rotate after the "full rotation" effect of the symbols that were temporarily stopped in the various variable elements begins, and is divided into a first acceleration period T1 during which the symbols rotate at a constant speed at a high speed that makes it difficult for the player to see them, a first high-speed constant-speed period T2 during which the symbols rotate at this high-speed constant speed, a first temporary stop period T3 during which all reels LR, CR, and RR that were rotating at this high-speed constant speed are stopped simultaneously (so-called a perfect stop) and start rotating again, a second acceleration period T4 during which the symbols rotate at the high-speed constant speed again, and a second high-speed constant-speed period T5 during which the symbols rotate at this high-speed constant speed.

That is, in the period consisting of the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the first temporary stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot with a "1" symbol) that appeared before the start of the "full rotation" performance changes to the next second temporary stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot with a "2" symbol), the second temporary stop symbol is shown to the player in the first temporary stop period T3, and in the period consisting of the second acceleration period T4 and the second high-speed constant speed period T5, the second temporary stop symbol changes to the next real stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot with a "3" symbol).

In the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant period T2 on all reels LR, CR, and RR are executed for 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds. Hereinafter, milliseconds may be referred to as "ms"), and the first temporary stop period T3 during which the second temporary stop pattern is displayed on all reels LR, CR, and RR is executed for 0.5 seconds (500 ms), and the second acceleration period T4 and the second high-speed constant period T5 on all reels LR, CR, and RR are executed for 2 seconds (2000 ms). Therefore, when the "full rotation" effect is executed in the variable element of "re-variation", the execution time from the first temporary stop pattern to the appearance of the actual stop pattern is 4.5 seconds (4500 ms), and then the variable element of "re-variation" is terminated by executing a fixed display of the actual stop pattern for 0.5 seconds (500 ms).

As mentioned above, the arrangement of the symbols on the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR are reversed, so that when the "full spin" effect is produced, and all reels LR, CR, and RR are rotated about one revolution (i.e., about 16 symbols = about 16 frames (± 2 frames). Hereinafter, rotating all reels LR, CR, and RR 14 to 18 frames may be referred to as "about one revolution") to change from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, the amount of change in the symbol on the left reel LR is different from the amount of change in the symbol on the center reel CR and right reel RR.

Specifically, for example, if, as a result of the "reach display", a jackpot symbol of "1" is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stopping symbol in the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR and a "full spin" performance is executed, in order to stop a jackpot symbol of "2" as the second temporary stopping symbol in the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR, the left reel LR, whose symbols are arranged in descending order, needs to change its symbol by 16 frames - 2 frames = 14 frames for one spin, while the middle reel CR and right reel RR, whose symbols are arranged in ascending order, need to change its symbol by 16 frames + 2 frames = 18 frames for one spin. In other words, in the "full spin" effect, when changing from one provisional stopping symbol to the next provisional stopping symbol, the left reel LR has a smaller amount of fluctuation by four frames than the middle reel CR and right reel RR.

In this case, in order for each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, which were fluctuating at high speed during the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2, to stop simultaneously and change to the second temporary stop pattern, it is necessary to rotate all of the reels LR, CR, and RR in a state where they are aligned with the second temporary stop pattern during the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2. In order to align all reels LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, (1) all reels LR, CR, and RR stopped and displayed with the first provisional stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol with a symbol "1") are started to rotate simultaneously, and only the left reel LR has a different fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.) from the fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.) of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, and the second provisional stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol with a symbol "2") is stopped simultaneously after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR; or (2) all reels LR, CR, and RR stopped and displayed with the first provisional stop symbol are started to rotate simultaneously, and only the left reel LR has a different fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.) from the fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.) of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, and the second provisional stop symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol with a symbol "2") is stopped simultaneously after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR. One of the possible drive control patterns is to start the rotation of the center reel CR and the right reel RR first, which have a larger amount of change until the stopping pattern, and then start the rotation of the left reel LR when the number pattern corresponding to the second temporary stopping pattern of the center reel CR and the right reel RR (for example, the "2" pattern on the center reel CR and the right reel RR) reaches the vicinity of the number pattern corresponding to the second temporary stopping pattern of the left reel LR (for example, the "2" pattern on the left reel LR), and stop all reels LR, CR, and RR simultaneously at the end of the first high-speed constant speed period T2 with the second temporary stopping patterns aligned on all reels LR, CR, and RR at least during any period of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, and with the rotation speeds aligned.

However, in the case of the drive control pattern (1), although the rotation start times of all reels LR, CR, and RR are synchronized, it is necessary to prepare multiple acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1, it is necessary to prepare multiple rotation speed patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2, and control is required to adjust the execution timing of the above acceleration patterns and rotation speeds, making the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR to adjust the acceleration pattern and rotation speed complicated. Furthermore, because blank areas are formed between the number symbols on each reel LR, CR, and RR, the rotation speeds of the reels LR, CR, and RR, which rotate at a constant speed for a relatively long period during the first high-speed constant-speed period T2, are different (shifted), and the number symbols are not aligned. This causes the blank areas to line up horizontally across the number symbols, resulting in a fluctuation that makes it seem as if the number symbols are aligned, which gives the player a sense of discomfort and may ruin the game during the "full spin" presentation.

On the other hand, in the case of the drive control pattern (2), although it is necessary to prepare multiple acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, RR during the first acceleration period T1, and control is required to adjust the execution timing of the acceleration patterns and the rotation speed, it is not necessary to prepare multiple rotation speed patterns for each reel LR, CR, RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2. Therefore, although there is an awkward feeling caused by the rotation start timing of the left reel LR being different from the rotation start timing of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, it is possible to change all reels LR, CR, RR in an aligned state and at a constant speed at a relatively early stage in the first high-speed constant speed period T2 of each reel LR, CR, RR. As a result, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified compared to the drive control pattern (1), the control burden can be reduced, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the relatively early stage (at least the latter half) of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, preventing the player from losing interest in the game and improving the interest of the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to drive and control each reel LR, CR, RR during the "full spin" presentation using the drive control pattern (2) above.

As described above, the stepping motor 600 is configured to transition to a constant speed rotation state after a predetermined acceleration period. This acceleration period is the transition time from when the previous variable performance stops to when the subsequent variable performance is clearly being executed (i.e., high-speed constant speed rotation in the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation"), so it is desirable for the stepping motor 600 to transition from the acceleration state to the constant speed rotation state as quickly as possible. To achieve this, the excitation phase of the stepping motor 600 should be switched quickly, but this may result in loss of synchronism or unstable rotation.

In particular, in the stepping motor 600, when the teeth of the rotating part 602 are attracted to the protrusions of each shaft part 603 to 606 during initial excitation, initial rotational vibration (micro-vibration accompanied by reciprocating motion) of the rotating part 602 occurs. The rotational vibration differs depending on the specifications, but for example, there may be about 5 to 6 reciprocating vibrations, with one reciprocating motion occurring every 30 ms. Therefore, it is necessary to set the switching mode of the excitation phase during the acceleration period while taking such initial rotational vibration into consideration.

In the fifth embodiment, the reels LR, CR, and RR are set so that the acceleration patterns during the "full spin" effect are different for the left reel LR, the center reel CR, and the right reel RR, while suppressing the effects of the initial rotational shaking described above. Specifically, the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning with the same normal acceleration pattern (see S2015 in Figures 65 and 70) as when normal fluctuations begin, while the left reel LR starts spinning with a special acceleration pattern that is different from the normal acceleration pattern.

Here, with reference to Figures 65 to 68, the excitation patterns of the reels LR, CR, and RR when accelerating during a "full spin" effect will be described. Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern for normal acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment, and Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern for special acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment. Also, Figure 67 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of the reels LR, CR, and RR and the output mode of the music during a "full spin" effect in the fifth embodiment. 68 is a schematic diagram showing the progress of the "full rotation" presentation performed by the drum display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, in which FIG. 68(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a provisional jackpot result by the "1" symbol is stopped, FIG. 68(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the center reel CR and the right reel RR start to rotate by normal acceleration processing from the state of FIG. 68(a), and FIG. 68(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the center reel CR and the right reel RR start to rotate at a high and constant speed from the state of FIG. 68(b), and the left reel L 68(d) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR are spinning at a high and constant speed from the state of FIG. 68(c), FIG. 68(e) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR are spinning at a high and constant speed like the state of FIG. 68(d), and FIG. 68(f) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the provisional jackpot result of the "2" symbol has stopped from the state of FIG. 68(e). Note that in FIG. 68, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

First, in the example of normal acceleration processing shown in FIG. 65, this is the same acceleration processing as when the reels LR, CR, and RR start to fluctuate in a fluctuating performance, and as the initial excitation "acceleration order 1" (for one pulse), the state set to two-phase excitation is maintained for 67 interrupts (i.e., 67 timer interrupt processes = 134 ms). After that, as "acceleration order 2", it is switched to one-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for eight interrupts (i.e., 16 ms). After that, as "acceleration order 3", it is switched to two-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for seven interrupts (i.e., 14 ms). After that, the excitation phase is alternately switched, and the excitation phase switching interval is set to gradually become shorter. As a result, the period during which 25 pulses are output, which is equivalent to one symbol change, for the normal acceleration process from "acceleration sequence 1 to 25" is set to 150 interrupts = 2 ms x 150 = 300 ms as the excitation period, during which it is possible to eliminate the initial rotational fluctuations mentioned above. Also, by reusing the acceleration pattern used at the start of the fluctuations, the number of types of acceleration patterns can be reduced, simplifying the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR.

On the other hand, in the example of the special acceleration process shown in FIG. 66, the initial excitation "acceleration order 1" (for one pulse) is held in a state set to two-phase excitation for 17 interrupts (i.e., 17 timer interrupts = 34 ms). Then, as in the normal acceleration process, it is switched to one-phase excitation for "acceleration order 2", and this state is held for eight interrupts (i.e., 16 ms). Then, as in the acceleration order 3, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and this state is held for seven interrupts (i.e., 14 ms). Then, the excitation phase is alternately switched, and the switching interval of the excitation phase is gradually shortened. As a result, the period from "acceleration order 1 to 25" of the special acceleration process, that is, the period during which 25 pulses are output, which is one pattern change, is set to 100 interrupts = 2 ms x 100 = 200 ms as the excitation period, during which the initial rotational shaking can be eliminated.

In other words, the special acceleration process controls the drive of the left reel LR so that it accelerates to a high-speed constant rotation in a period 100 ms shorter than the normal acceleration process. Therefore, in the "full spin" effect, the left reel LR can be rotated at a high-speed constant rotation in a relatively short period of time.

67 and 68, in the "full spin" presentation, first, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol), start to rotate simultaneously by normal acceleration processing (see the start of rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 68(a) and (b)). Then, when a predetermined high constant speed is reached, the center reel CR and right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high constant speed rotation. Next, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., symbol "2") of the center reel CR and right reel RR rotated at a high constant speed reaches the front side of the position corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., symbol "2") on the left reel LR (see the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68(c)), the left reel LR displayed as stopped with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., symbol "1") starts to rotate by a special acceleration process. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high constant speed rotation (see the constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68(d) and (e)), the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., symbol "2") on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., symbol "2") on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at a high constant speed while maintaining a state of being aligned in a horizontal line. Then, when the second provisional stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) reaches the middle pay line, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which have been rotating at a constant high speed, come to a simultaneous, so-called "perfect stop," and the second provisional stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line (see the timing when all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in Figure 67, and Figure 68 (f)).

This configuration simplifies the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR, reducing the control burden, and at least in the latter half of the first high-speed constant-speed period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning with each other without any blank areas in the horizontal direction of the number symbols, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, in order to suppress the discomfort felt by the player due to the difference in the timing at which the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning and the timing at which the left reel LR starts spinning during the "full spin" presentation, the timing of the output of a specific piece of music is adjusted during the period from when one temporary stopping symbol (e.g., the "1" symbol) changes to the next temporary stopping symbol (e.g., the "2" symbol), thereby mitigating the discomfort.

Specifically, during the period from when the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) appears to when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) appears during the "full spin" effect, a specific piece of music is output that is synchronized with that period. Also, the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR is synchronized to match the beats (rhythms) that are output (hit) at equal intervals in that music.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 67, during the "full rotation" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are set to change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) in 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during the change time is set to 120 beats per minute (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "BPM"), which indicates the number of beats per minute, i.e., one beat every 0.5 seconds, and one measure of the music is output in 4/4 time. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the above-mentioned measure, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, starts rotating at the timing of the second beat in the above-mentioned measure.

In this case, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) using normal acceleration processing that accelerates and changes every 300 ms, and then rotate the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol in a total of 2000 ms. In other words, the center reel CR and right reel RR start rotating in sync with the start of the first beat (strong beat) of a measure in a song with a BPM of 120 and a 4/4 beat.

Meanwhile, the left reel LR, which displaces by 14 frames, rotates the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) with a special acceleration process of 200 ms, and then rotates the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol in a total of 1500 ms. In other words, the left reel LR starts rotating in sync with the start of the second beat (weak beat) of a measure in a song with a BPM of 120 and a 4/4 beat.

Then, with all reels LR, CR, and RR spinning at a constant high speed, the third beat (weak beat) and fourth beat (weak beat) of one measure are output, and then all reels LR, CR, and RR stop spinning simultaneously in sync with the end of that measure (after the end of the fourth beat, 2000 ms after the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning), and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed frozen on the middle active line.

By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" performance, the difference in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually perceived by the player is canceled out (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo through hearing by matching the beat of the music that can be perceived by the player's hearing, so that the "full spin" performance does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from losing interest in the "full spin" performance, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Next, with reference to Figures 69 and 70, the control processes executed by the MPU (not shown) in the display control device 114 will be described. The MPU processes mainly include a motor control process (see Figure 69) that drives and controls the stepping motor 600, and a reel rotation start process (see Figure 70) that is executed within the motor control process.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the motor control process executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. Note that the motor control process may be configured to be executed by a control device other than the display control device 114, for example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 or the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The motor control process shown in FIG. 69 is executed within the main process that is executed periodically after the specified start-up process in the display control device 114 is completed, and mainly performs drive control for the stepping motor 600 in the drum display device 81.

In this motor control process, first, it is determined whether or not control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is necessary (S2001). If it is determined that control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is not necessary (S2001: No), that is, if all of the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped, this motor control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is required (S2001: Yes), a process is executed to determine the rotational position of the reel LR, CR, RR to be processed based on the detection result of the reel position detection sensor 620 and the number of times excitation data is output (S2002).

Next, it is determined whether the timing to start braking has arrived for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003). If it is determined that the timing to start braking has arrived for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to reel rotation processing (S2004) to start the rotation of the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed, and after the reel rotation processing (S2004) is executed, the process proceeds to S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing to start braking has not arrived for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003: No), the process skips S2004 and proceeds to S2005.

Here, the reel spin start process (S2004) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the reel spin start process (S2004) executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment.

In this reel rotation start process (S2004), first, it is determined whether the braking start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is the start of a variable performance (S2011). If it is determined that it is the start of a variable performance (S2011: Yes), all reels LR, CR, RR start rotating with normal acceleration processing (S2012), this reel rotation start process (S2004) is terminated, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). If it is determined that it is the start of a variable performance, it is further determined whether it is a normal variation, which is performed when the number of reserved balls is small, or a shortened variation, which is performed when the number of reserved balls is large. If it is a normal variation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR is started with normal acceleration processing, while if it is a shortened variation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR is started with special acceleration processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2011 that the variable effect has not started (S2011: No), then it is determined whether or not the "full spin" effect is occurring (S2013). If the result of the determination is that the "full spin" effect is not occurring (S2013: No), then this reel spin start process (S2004) is terminated and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, if it is determined that the "full spin" effect is occurring (S2013: Yes), then it is determined whether or not all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and the timing at which the temporary stop time has elapsed has passed, i.e., the timing at which the center reel CR and right reel RR have started spinning (S2014).

If it is determined in S2014 that all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and that the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: Yes), the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate using normal acceleration processing (see FIG. 65) (S2015), and at that timing, the first beat of one measure of the music corresponding to the "full spin" effect (i.e., BPM 120 and 4/4 time signature) is output from the audio output device 226 (S2016), this reel rotation start processing (S2004) ends, and the process returns to the motor control processing (see FIG. 69).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S2014 is that all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and it is not the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: No), then it is judged whether the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed, i.e., the timing when the left reel LR should start spinning, is (S2017).

If it is determined in S2017 that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and that the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: Yes), the left reel LR starts spinning with a special acceleration process (see FIG. 66) (S2018), and at that timing, the second beat in one measure of the music corresponding to the "full spin" effect is output from the audio output device 226 (S2019), and the reel spin start process (S2004) is terminated and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). Note that, if it is determined in S2017 that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and that the temporary stop time has not elapsed (S2017: No), the reel spin start process (S2004) is terminated and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will continue. In the process of S2005, a reel control process is performed (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006. In this reel control process (S2005), a process of generating excitation data for rotation control of the stepping motor 600 is performed. In order to realize the excitation pattern of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of acceleration tables (see FIGS. 65 and 66) are stored in the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and in the acceleration tables, at least acceleration counter data and switching interval data that corresponds one-to-one to the acceleration counter data are set.

The reel control process in S2005 uses a switching interval counter, an acceleration counter, and an excitation order pointer provided in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114. The switching interval counter is set with a timer interrupt number corresponding to the switching interval of the excitation phase. The excitation order pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600. When a 1-2 phase excitation stepping motor 600 is used, 1 phase excitation and 2 phase excitation are alternated, and there are 8 phase excitation patterns at that time, as shown in FIG. 62. The value (0 to 7) of this excitation order pointer specifies which excitation data at which phase excitation is acquired as output excitation data and temporarily stored in the RAM of the display control device 114.

In this reel control process, it is determined whether each reel LR, CR, and RR is being braked. If not, the numerical information of the switching interval counter is subtracted by 1, provided that the numerical information of the switching interval counter is "1" or more, and it is determined whether the numerical information after subtraction is "0". If the numerical information is not "0", the reel control process is terminated, whereas if the numerical information is "0", an acceleration table is read from the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the switching interval data corresponding to the current acceleration counter value from the acceleration table is set in the switching interval counter. For example, when each reel LR, CR, and RR starts to rotate, the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) is executed, and the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "25", which corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table. In this case, the numerical information of "2" is set in the switching interval counter.

Next, the excitation order pointer is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and if the numerical information after the addition exceeds the maximum value of the excitation order pointer, "7", the numerical information is cleared to "0". After that, an excitation data table such as that shown in FIG. 62 is read from the ROM of the display control device 114, and the excitation data corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read. The read excitation data is then stored in the RAM as the current excitation data for the reels LR, CR, and RR for which the reel control process is being executed.

Next, on condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, the numerical information of the acceleration counter is subtracted by 1. As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is performed for the reels LR, CR, and RR currently being processed, the switching interval data corresponding to the numerical information of the acceleration counter after this subtraction is set. In this case, since the execution is performed on the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, if the numerical information of the acceleration counter is already "0", this state is maintained. Also, when the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "0", the switching interval is one interrupt. Therefore, once the numerical information of the acceleration counter becomes "0", the excitation phase switching is performed according to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer each time the timer interrupt processing is executed once. This state is the constant speed state.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the control of the stepping motor 600 for all the rotating reels LR, CR, RR has been completed (S2006), and if the control of the stepping motor 600 for all the rotating reels LR, CR, RR has been completed (S2006: Yes), the excitation data for each of the rotating reels LR, CR, RR is output to the input/output port 608 (see FIG. 61) of the display control device 114 (S2007), and this motor control process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2006, if the control of the stepping motor 600 for all the rotating reels LR, CR, RR has not been completed (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and this motor control process ends.

The output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 is a data write process to an output port (not shown) corresponding to the input/output port 608, so the excitation data is supplied to the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) at the same time as the excitation data is written to the input/output port 608. As a result, the stepping motor 600 immediately performs a process of energizing the excitation phase specified by the excitation data, and an excitation process is performed on the rotating part 602.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop pattern, start rotating at the same time by normal acceleration processing. Then, when a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the center reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high-speed constant-speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop pattern of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are rotated at high speed, is the second temporary stop pattern on the left reel LR, and the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop pattern, starts rotating by special acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant-speed rotation, the second temporary stop pattern on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop pattern on the center reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at high speed constant speed while maintaining a state in which they are aligned horizontally. Then, when the second temporary stop symbol reaches the middle payline, all reels LR, CR, and RR that have been rotating at high constant speed are stopped simultaneously and exactly, so to speak, and the second temporary stop symbol is displayed stopped on the middle payline. This configuration simplifies the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR, reducing the control burden, and at least in the latter half of the first high constant speed period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning with each other without a blank area in the horizontal direction of the number symbols, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable and the excitement of the game is suppressed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are set to change from the first temporary stop pattern to the second temporary stop pattern in 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during the change time is set to a music of BPM 120 indicating the number of beats per minute, and one bar of the music is output in 4/4 time. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to start rotating simultaneously with the start of the first beat of the above-mentioned one bar, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the timing of the second beat of the above-mentioned one bar. By configuring it in this way, the difference in the start times of the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR that can be visually perceived by the player during the "full spin" performance is balanced (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo through the ears by matching the beat of the music that can be perceived by the player's ears, so that the "full spin" performance does not cause a sense of incongruity to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player from losing interest in the "full spin" performance, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fourth embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the sound of one measure of music is output while the first temporary stop symbol changes to the second temporary stop symbol, and the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate on the first beat of that measure, and the left reel LR starts to rotate on the second beat of that measure, synchronizing the timing at which each reel LR, CR, RR starts to rotate with the tempo of the music. In this case, the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR is made different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, so that the timing at which each reel LR, CR, RR starts to rotate is synchronized with the tempo of the music.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the "full rotation" performance, a musical piece is output that is composed of a main sound that forms the main sound (e.g., a loud volume, main melody, female part (soprano or alto), melody line, etc.) and a secondary sound that forms a supplementary sound to the main sound (e.g., a volume lower than the loud volume, a secondary melody (accompaniment), male part (tenor or bass), bass line, etc.), while the first temporary stop symbol changes to the second temporary stop symbol, and the main sound is output when the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate, and further, the secondary sound is output when the left reel LR starts to rotate. In this case, the acceleration pattern of the center reel CR and right reel RR and the acceleration pattern of the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (i.e., normal acceleration processing).

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, the drive mode and timing of each reel LR, CR, RR during the "full spin" effect, and the output mode and timing of the music composed of the main sound and the secondary sound will be described with reference to Figure 71. Figure 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode of the music during the "full spin" effect in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the "full rotation" performance of the sixth embodiment, first, the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "1" pattern), start rotating simultaneously by normal acceleration processing (when the center reel CR and the right reel RR start rotating in FIG. 71). Then, when the center reel CR and the right reel RR reach a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, the center reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high-speed constant rotation. Next, when the second temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "2" pattern) of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are rotated at a high constant speed, reaches the front side of the position corresponding to the second temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "2" pattern) on the left reel LR (when the left reel LR starts rotating in FIG. 71), the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "1" pattern), starts rotating by normal acceleration processing, like the center reel CR and the right reel RR. Then, when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 71), the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbols (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at high speed while maintaining a horizontally aligned state. After that, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) next reaches the pay line in the middle row, all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotating at high speed come to a simultaneous stop, so to speak, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the pay line in the middle row (the timing when all reels LR, CR, RR are stopped in FIG. 71).

By configuring it in this way, the acceleration process at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be standardized, simplifying drive control and reducing the burden of control. In addition, during at least the latter half of the first high-speed constant-speed period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning with each other without there being any blank area in the horizontal direction of the number symbols, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, in order to suppress the discomfort felt by the player due to the difference in the timing at which the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning and the timing at which the left reel LR starts spinning during the "full spin" presentation, the timing of the output of a specific piece of music is adjusted during the period from when one temporary stopping symbol (e.g., the "1" symbol) changes to the next temporary stopping symbol (e.g., the "2" symbol), thereby mitigating the discomfort.

Specifically, it is configured to output a predetermined piece of music that is synchronized with the period from when the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) stops and appears during the "full spin" effect. In addition, the piece of music is configured to be composed of a main sound and a secondary sound, and the timing at which the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR begins is synchronized with the timing at which the main sound starts to be output and the timing at which the secondary sound starts to be output.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, during the "full spin" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) for 2 seconds, and the music output during this change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to start rotating at the same time as the main sound of the music starts to be output, and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the timing when the secondary sound of the music starts to be output.

In this case, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) using normal acceleration processing that accelerates and changes every 300 ms, and then rotate the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 2000 ms. In other words, the center reel CR and right reel RR begin to rotate in sync with the output of the main sound of the music for 2 seconds.

The left reel LR, which displaces by 14 frames, rotates the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) at a normal acceleration rate of 300 ms, just like the center reel CR and right reel RR, and then rotates the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 1600 ms. In other words, the left reel LR starts rotating in sync with the output of the secondary sound, which is output 400 ms after the start of the 2-second music piece.

Then, while all reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high constant speed, the main and secondary sounds of the song are output continuously, and then, when the song ends (2000 ms after the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate), all reels LR, CR, and RR stop rotating simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line.

By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" performance, the difference in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be seen by the player is eliminated (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the music heard by the player, by driving it in accordance with the output of each element that makes up the music that can be recognized by the player's hearing. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" performance, and prevents the player from losing interest in the "full spin" performance, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, by performing the acceleration process at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR during a "full spin" effect using a common normal acceleration process, there is no need to provide special acceleration patterns such as special acceleration processes, and the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be simplified, reducing the control burden related to pattern control.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the sound of one measure of music is output while the first temporary stop symbol changes to the second temporary stop symbol, and the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate on the first beat of that measure, and the left reel LR starts to rotate on the second beat of that measure, synchronizing the timing at which each reel LR, CR, RR starts to rotate with the tempo of the music. In this case, the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR is made different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, so that the timing at which each reel LR, CR, RR starts to rotate is synchronized with the tempo of the music.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, a piece of music (sound effect) is output that is composed of at least one first sound (e.g., Do-Mi) that constitutes a chord (chord) formed by combining three or more sounds (e.g., Do-Re-Mi (chord C)) and a second sound (e.g., So) that is the remaining sound of the chord, and the first sound is output when the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate, and further the second sound is output when the left reel LR starts to rotate. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the acceleration pattern of the center reel CR and right reel RR and the acceleration pattern of the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (i.e., normal acceleration processing).

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of those elements are omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, the drive mode and timing of each reel LR, CR, RR during the "full spin" effect and the output mode and timing of the music (sound effect) consisting of the first sound and the second sound will be described with reference to Figure 72. Figure 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode of the music during the "full spin" effect in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the performance of "full rotation" in the seventh embodiment, first, the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "1" pattern), start rotating simultaneously by normal acceleration processing (when the center reel CR and the right reel RR start rotating in FIG. 72). Then, when the center reel CR and the right reel RR reach a predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, the center reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high-speed constant rotation. Next, when the second temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "2" pattern) of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, which are rotated at a high constant speed, reaches the front side of the position corresponding to the second temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "2" pattern) on the left reel LR (when the left reel LR starts rotating in FIG. 72), the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop pattern (i.e., the "1" pattern), starts rotating by normal acceleration processing, like the center reel CR and the right reel RR. Then, when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation (constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 72), the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbols (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at a high-speed constant speed while maintaining a state of being aligned horizontally. After that, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) next reaches the pay line in the middle row, all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotating at a high-speed constant speed are stopped simultaneously and so-called "perfectly," and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the pay line in the middle row (the timing when all reels LR, CR, RR are stopped in FIG. 72).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suppress the discomfort felt by the player due to the difference in the timing at which the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning and the timing at which the left reel LR starts spinning during the "full spin" presentation, the timing of the output of a specific piece of music is adjusted during the period from when one temporary stopping symbol (e.g., the "1" symbol) changes to the next temporary stopping symbol (e.g., the "2" symbol), thereby mitigating the discomfort.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 72, during the "full rotation" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) for 2 seconds, and the music output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to start rotating at the same time as the start of output of the first note in the music, which is a chord (in the seventh embodiment, the "Do" in the triad of "Do-Mi-So"), and the left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the start of output of the second note in the music, which is the chord (in the seventh embodiment, the "So" in the triad of "Do-Re-Mi").

In this case, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, are rotated using normal acceleration processing that accelerates and changes every 300 ms for the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above), and then rotated at a high constant speed of 100 ms for the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol), changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 2000 ms. In other words, the center reel CR and right reel RR begin to rotate in sync with the output of the first sound of the 2-second song.

The left reel LR, which displaces by 14 frames, rotates the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) at normal acceleration processing of 300 ms, just like the center reel CR and right reel RR, and then rotates the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol in a total of 1600 ms. In other words, the left reel LR starts rotating in sync with the output of the second sound, which is output 400 ms after the start of the 2-second music.

Then, while all reels LR, CR, and RR are spinning at a constant high speed, the first and second sounds of the song are output continuously, forming a chord, and then, at the end of the song (2000 ms after the center reel CR and right reel RR start to spin), all reels LR, CR, and RR stop spinning simultaneously in sync, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line.

By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" performance, the difference in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that may be visually perceived by the player is eliminated (suppressed) by the musical harmony (harmony) of the ears, by driving it in accordance with the output of the first and second sounds that constitute a chord that can be recognized as a harmony by the player's hearing. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" performance, and prevents the player from losing interest in the "full spin" performance, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when each reel LR, CR, RR rotates from the second temporary stop pattern to the actual stop pattern, a chord (e.g., Re-Si-So (chord G)) that does not create a sense of incongruity in combination with the chord (e.g., Do-Re-Mi (chord C)) output when each reel LR, CR, RR rotates from the first temporary stop pattern to the second temporary stop pattern may be output. By configuring in this way, the pattern control and the sound output control during the entire "full spin" presentation are executed as an integrated and harmonious presentation, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable during the "full spin" presentation, and the player is prevented from losing interest in the "full spin" presentation, which has the highest expectation of a jackpot in the game, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the seventh embodiment, during the "full spin" effect, a C-Mi-So triad is output in accordance with the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR. However, instead of this, other triads (major triad, minor triad, augmented triad, diminished triad), tetrads (major seventh, minor seventh, minor major seventh, diminished five minor seventh, diminished seventh, augmented seventh), and pentads (dominant ninth, major ninth) may be output.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first to sixth embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above form, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the spirit of the present invention. For example, each embodiment may be modified by adding a part or parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing a part or parts of the configuration of that embodiment. Furthermore, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of acrylic material (acrylic resin, refractive index of about 1.49 to 1.53). In contrast, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 may be made of polycarbonate (polycarbonate resin, refractive index of about 1.59), optical plastic (polymethylmethacrylate resin, refractive index of about 1.491 to 1.57), nylon (nylon resin, refractive index of about 1.53), or polyester (polyester resin, refractive index of about 1.60). In this case, the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 (i.e., the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c) may be appropriately changed according to the refractive index of each resin, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 is reliably irradiated (diffused).

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, one recess in the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is configured with three sides, the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c, and is configured to diffuse light in three directions, the leftward, frontward, and rightward, relative to the irradiation direction of light from each LED 422c, 424. In contrast to this, one recess in the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be configured with two sides or four or more sides, and the light may be diffused in two or four or more directions.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 in the rear light guide plate 420 are provided at positions where they are paired in the up-down direction (positions where they overlap in the vertical up-down direction). Also, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c in the front light guide plate 410 are provided at positions where they are paired in the left-right direction (positions where they overlap in the horizontal left-right direction). In contrast, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, or the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c may be configured to be shifted to positions where they do not overlap in the vertical up-down direction or the horizontal left-right direction. By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of blank areas on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 where no light is irradiated, and it is possible to reliably display each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 over the entire surface of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are formed on the upper and lower end faces of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively, to the width of the light emitting surface of one of the LEDs 422c, 424. In contrast, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be formed on the entire upper and lower end faces of the rear light guide plate 420. By configuring in this way, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 can be formed without considering the positions of the LEDs 422c, 424, improving the production efficiency of the rear light guide plate 420 and increasing the design freedom regarding the arrangement of the LEDs 422c, 424.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the length of each side of the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c constituting one recess of the rear upward diffusion lens 423 and the rear downward diffusion lens 425 is equal. In contrast, the length of each side of the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c may be different. In particular, when the sizes of the decorative patterns to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 are different, the length of each side may be formed according to the size of the display object. Specifically, for example, when there is a first display object having a predetermined size and a second display object having a size twice that of the first display object, the length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the second display object is configured to be twice the length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display object. In this way, by forming the length of each side of the diffusion lens so as to correspond to the size of the display object, each display object can be appropriately illuminated.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the light guide unit 400 is constituted by the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 that are shaped to follow the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, which has a cylindrical outer shape. In contrast, the light guide unit 400 may be constituted by a light guide plate that follows the outer periphery of the cylindrical drum display device 81 and a light guide plate that has a shape (e.g., a flat plate shape) that is unrelated to the outer periphery of the drum display device 81. The light guide unit 400 may also be constituted by a plurality of light guide plates that have a shape (e.g., a flat plate shape) that is unrelated to the outer periphery of the cylindrical drum display device 81. Furthermore, when the third pattern is changed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device having a flat display unit instead of the drum display device 81, the light guide unit 400 may be constituted by a light guide plate (e.g., a flat plate shape) that follows the outer shape of the flat liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate that has a shape (e.g., a shape having an R-shaped portion) that is unrelated to the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device. In addition, when the third pattern is changed by using a flat display device such as a liquid crystal display device instead of the drum display device 81, the light guide unit 400 may be composed of a plurality of light guide plates having a shape unrelated to the external shape of the flat liquid crystal display device (for example, a shape having an R-shaped portion in part).

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to be able to display three types of decorative patterns (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413), the rear light guide plate 420 is configured to be able to display one type of decorative pattern (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421), and four types of effects, which are more than the number of light guide plates 410 and 420, can be executed by two light guide plates 410 and 420. In contrast to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of effects (e.g., four or more types) which are more than the number of light guide plates can be executed by three or more light guide plates.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, both the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to have a shape having a regular R-shaped portion along the outer circumferential shape of the drum display device 81. In contrast, the light guide plate on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a shape having a regular R-shaped portion, while the light guide plate on the rear side may be configured to have a shape having an inverse R-shaped portion that is the opposite (opposite) to the regular R-shaped portion. In this case, a predetermined performance device (for example, a movable role-playing device or a liquid crystal display device) may be provided in the space between the light guide plate having the regular R-shaped portion on the front side and the light guide plate having the inverse R-shaped portion on the rear side. By configuring in this way, the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate can perform an integrated and three-dimensional powerful performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect of each light guide plate and increasing the attention to the game.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the first decorative symbol group 421 is configured to be executed by reducing its vertical width. In contrast, the execution mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed may be configured to be executed by reducing its horizontal width. In addition, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the first decorative symbol group 60a and the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board may be configured not to be executed. By configuring in this way, the performance of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the performance of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to configure it so as not to interfere with the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for playing. In addition, it is easy to simultaneously execute the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complex control, and the performance variation can be increased.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the fish school symbol on the upper part of the first decorative symbol group 421 is not lit. In contrast, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the display color of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the confirmation lamp 311 side may be executed in a display color (e.g., "blue") that is clearly different from the display color of the confirmation lamp 311 (e.g., "red"). By configuring in this way, the performance of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the performance of the confirmation lamp 311 can be partitioned so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, and the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, it is possible to configure so as not to interfere with the performance of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for playing. In addition, it is easy to simultaneously execute the performance by the confirmation lamp 311 and the performance by the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complex control, and the performance variation can be increased.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the effects by the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are performed separately so as not to overlap. In contrast, by performing effects by the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 simultaneously, a variety of effects can be performed, the effects of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the attention to the game can be increased.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated, the scale of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced. In contrast, when the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated, or when a variable performance performed by the drum display device 81 is executed, the scale of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the variable performance may be reduced and executed. Examples of the reduction in the scale of the performance include reducing the performance width or range, reducing the performance color or brightness, and shortening the performance time.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the drum display device 81 was used to determine whether or not a jackpot was to be drawn by the variation of the third symbol. Alternatively, a liquid crystal display device, a seven-segment display device, or a rotary belt display device may be used to perform the variation and draw the jackpot, or a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is to be awarded depending on whether or not a ball enters a predetermined winning hole provided in a lottery device with a crane.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the performance width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In contrast, a movable role that can suggest the game result in the variable performance in advance may be provided, and when the movable range of the movable role overlaps with the performance part of the first decorative symbol group 421, the performance width of the first decorative symbol group 421 may be reduced so as not to overlap with the movable range of the movable role. Also, the movable range of the movable role may be reduced so as not to overlap with the performance width of the first decorative symbol group 421. In this case, the performance with a higher jackpot expectation for the variable performance is configured to be prioritized. By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish multiple performances so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, and it is possible to highlight the performance with a high jackpot expectation. Therefore, it is possible to configure it so as not to obstruct the performance that is important for the game.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to allow light to enter from the lateral end faces of the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, thereby enabling the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be illuminated, and is configured to allow light to enter from the lower end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, thereby enabling the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 to be illuminated. In contrast, any of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 may be configured to allow light to enter from their respective lateral end faces, thereby enabling each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 to be illuminated. Specifically, the front light guide plate 410 may be configured to allow light to enter from the lateral end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be illuminated, and the front light guide plate 410 may be configured to allow light to enter from the lateral end faces of the regular R-shaped portion so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 can be illuminated.

In this case, a condensing lens is used for lighting the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low jackpot expectation, so that the decorative symbol groups 411 and 412 other than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are not lit when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is to be lit, while a diffusing lens is used for lighting the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, so that the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are clearly lit when the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are to be lit. Even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is lit, there is little discrepancy in the presentation. Therefore, even if the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest probability of winning, becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 is lit, it is possible to minimize inconsistencies in the presentation and provide the player with a natural gameplay experience.

The arrangement positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 showing the result of the variable performance of the third pattern is arranged, are also the parts where the movable parts that perform the performance for the variable performance are stored and arranged. In this case, the LED boards for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 must be arranged to avoid the arrangement position and movable range of the movable parts, and there is a risk that the design freedom of the movable parts or the LED boards will be reduced. Therefore, the LED boards for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 showing the result of the variable performance of the third pattern is arranged, are formed in a part that does not interfere with the arrangement position and movable range of the movable parts (for example, the upper side or lower side of the front light guide plate 410), thereby increasing the design freedom of the movable parts or the LED boards.

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on in the rear light guide plate 420 as if the first decorative pattern group 421 were moving from the right side to the left side when viewed from the front. In contrast, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be turned on as if the first decorative pattern group 421 were moving from below or above to above or below. In this case, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be arranged in the left and right directions of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c and 424 arranged in the left and right directions may be sequentially turned on from one direction to multiple directions to perform an effect in which the first decorative pattern group 421 is moving from below or above to above or below.

<Modification 17>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 employs the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d to light up the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413, respectively, and the rear light guide plate 420 employs the diffusing lenses 423 and 425 to light up the first decorative pattern group 421. In contrast, a single light guide plate may employ a condensing lens and a diffusing lens to light up each of the decorative patterns. Specifically, for example, a low-reliability decorative pattern with a low probability of winning is arranged at a position where it can be seen by lighting up the condensing lens, and a high-reliability decorative pattern with a high probability of winning is arranged at a position where it can be seen by lighting up the diffusing lens. In this case, when the low-reliability decorative pattern is turned on, the light is concentrated by the condensing lens so that the high-reliability decorative pattern cannot be turned on, while when the high-reliability decorative pattern is turned on, the light is diffused by the diffusing lens so that the low-reliability decorative pattern can be turned on. Even if the low-reliability decorative pattern is turned on when the high-reliability decorative pattern is turned on, there is little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, even if the low-reliability decorative pattern, which has the lowest expectation of a big win, becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the high-reliability decorative pattern is turned on, the inconsistency in the presentation can be minimized, and a game that does not feel strange to the player can be provided.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot expectation rate and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 having a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative symbol group are collectively formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421 having a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412 are formed on the rear light guide plate 420 different from the front light guide plate 410. In contrast, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot expectation rate may be formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412 having a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 may be formed on the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed so that none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 is located at the transition between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. In contrast, any of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 may be located at the transition between the upper flat plate portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the transition between the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the transition between the normal R-shaped portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, or the transition between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, the light is incident on the upper flat plate portion or the lower flat plate portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. However, the light may be incident on an end face of either of the R-shaped portions.

<Modification 21>
In the first embodiment, when performing the third symbol variation performance on the drum display device 81, the symbols on the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbols on the center reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. In addition, the "4" symbol, which is not arranged on the left reel LR and right reel RR, is arranged on the center reel CR. Therefore, since there is no jackpot formation symbol including the "4" symbol as a jackpot formation symbol, a "reach display" cannot generate a reach formation symbol including the "4" symbol. Therefore, in the performance of "pseudo variation", when the reach formation symbol is stepped up, for example, when the number of the reach formation symbol is raised in ascending order, a step-up performance including "4" cannot be performed. Specifically, as a three-step step-up performance, although it is possible to perform "1" → "2" → "3" or "5" → "6" → "7", it is not possible to perform "2" → "3" → "4" or "3" → "4" → "5". Therefore, when performing a step-up performance of reach formation symbols by "pseudo fluctuation" or the like, the step-up performance is configured to be performed from symbols that do not include "4". By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a performance that does not cause any inconsistency in the performance and does not feel unnatural.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, when performing the third symbol variation performance on the drum display device 81, the symbol arrangement of the left reel LR is arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrangement of the center reel CR and the right reel RR is arranged in ascending order. Therefore, when performing a so-called full rotation performance in which the symbols of all reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned and varied in the variation performance, the rotation is started in a state in which the symbols of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, both of which are arranged in ascending order, are aligned, and when the symbols of the center reel CR and the right reel RR that are to be temporarily stopped during the full rotation are aligned with the symbol of the left reel LR, the rotation is started so that the symbols of the left reel LR and the symbols of the center reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned. Then, the aligned symbols are temporarily stopped on any of the effective lines (for example, the middle line), and this is repeated multiple times to perform the full rotation performance. In this case, music (sound effects) is output in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, and music (sound effects) is also output when each of the reels LR, CR, and RR starts to rotate and during rotation, thereby enabling the production of a rhythmic, well-tempo, and powerful presentation.

<Modification 23>
In the first embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with a first decorative pattern group 60a and a second decorative pattern group 60b imitating a school of fish pattern, and the rear light guide plate 420 is provided with a first decorative pattern group 421 having the same form as the school of fish pattern, and the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to perform an integrated performance. In this case, the game board 13 may be configured to arrange the fish patterns so that the first decorative pattern group 60a or the second decorative pattern group 60b of the game board 13 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 complete one fish pattern. Specifically, for example, a pattern in which a part of a fish is interrupted is arranged in the first decorative pattern group 60a, and the remaining pattern part of the fish is arranged on the rear light guide plate 420, so that one fish pattern is formed when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform an integrated performance continuously in the left-right direction with the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420, and it is possible to suitably suppress the unnaturalness caused by the discontinuity of one fish pattern at the boundary between the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420. Note that it is preferable to form the size of each divided fish pattern taking into consideration the height difference between the board position of the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the height in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10) so that one fish pattern can be recognized naturally (not unnaturally) when viewed from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 24>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is not provided with decorative patterns or the like, and is configured to clarify the active lines in the drum display device 81. In contrast, the display area forming member 430 may be provided with decorative patterns, and configured to perform an integrated performance with the light guide unit 400 or the game board 13. Specifically, for example, the display area forming member 430 may also be formed with school of fish decorative patterns of the same form as the school of fish patterns of the first decorative pattern group 421 and the board surface first decorative pattern group 60a and the board surface second decorative pattern group 60b, and configured to perform an integrated performance with the game board 13, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430. In this case, for example, a pattern in which a part of a fish is interrupted is arranged on the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface or on the rear light guide plate 420, and the remaining part of the fish pattern is arranged on the display area forming member 430, so that one fish pattern is formed when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an integrated performance in the left-right direction continuously by the game board 13 or the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the lens cuts 432 of the display area forming member 430 are configured in a plurality of rib shapes. In contrast, the lens cuts 432 may be configured to be formed by a light diffusion process (e.g., a graining process) that forms fine irregularities so that light from the outside is less likely to be incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 26>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is collected by each of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and light having directivity in the front direction of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is emitted, and the light is made incident on the front light guide plate 410. In contrast, a light emitting means having a directivity different from the above configuration may be used to make light incident on the front light guide plate 410. Specifically, for example, a lens may be used that absorbs light other than that in the front direction and irradiates only the light in the front direction in the front direction of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c.

<Modification 27>
In the first embodiment, the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c of the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 are configured to have the same shape, and are configured to diffuse light at the same angle with respect to the light irradiated to each diffusion lens 423, 425. In contrast, the shapes of the diffusion portions 425a, etc. of the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 may be formed differently, and the angles of light diffused by the rear-side upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-side lower diffusion lens 425 may be configured differently. By configuring in this way, light can be guided from various directions into the rear light guide plate 420, and light can be comprehensively guided into the rear light guide plate 420, so that all of the first decorative pattern group 421 can be appropriately lit. In addition, by making the angle of the direction of travel of the light diffused by the rear upward diffusion lens 423 different from the angle of the direction of travel of the light diffused by the rear downward diffusion lens 425, randomness can be imparted to the lighting (illumination) display of the first decorative pattern group 421, and the illuminated display of the first decorative pattern group 421 can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 28>
In the first embodiment, the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are commonly formed in all recesses in the rear downward diffusion lens 425, and the rear downward diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420 is also configured to have the rightward diffusion portion 425c or the leftward diffusion portion 425a. In contrast, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420 may be configured to form the rear downward diffusion lens 425 only with the frontward diffusion portion 425b and the leftward diffusion portion 425a, or the frontward diffusion portion 425b and the rightward diffusion portion 425c. By configuring in this manner, the light emitted by each LED 424 can be irradiated to the rear light guide plate 420 without being diffused in a direction in which the first decorative pattern group 421 is not arranged, and the light emitted by each LED 424 can be irradiated to the rear light guide plate 420 without being wasted.

<Modification 29>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 notify the jackpot expectation suggestion in the variable performance, and the confirmation lamp 311 notifies the jackpot occurrence suggestion in the variable performance, and each suggestion is executed by a different display device. In contrast, the jackpot expectation suggestion and the jackpot occurrence suggestion may be executed by a single display device, for example, a single light guide plate, a drum display device 81, or a liquid crystal display device. In this case, when the execution timing of the jackpot occurrence suggestion and the jackpot expectation suggestion are combined, it is preferable to reduce the execution area of the jackpot expectation suggestion being executed and execute the jackpot occurrence suggestion, as in the case where the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on when the first decorative pattern group 421 is executed.

<Modification 30>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81 that executes the variable performance of the third symbol, and the advance notice performance in the variable performance is executed by each of the light guide plates 410, 420. In contrast, one or more movable parts such as a shutter part may be arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81, and the advance notice performance in the variable performance may be executed by the movable part.

<Modification 31>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is disposed on the front side of the drum display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is configured as the effective lines. In contrast, the display area forming member 430 may be configured to be drivable, and the display area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 may be configured to be variable, so that the number of effective lines can be changed.

<Modification 32>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the front view of the game board 13 (below the front view of the first start hole 64a), and the variable winning device 65 is provided with a large winning hole 65a that can be opened and closed only at the time of a big win, and is equipped with only the function as a winning device for game balls. In contrast, the variable winning device 65 may be provided with functions such as a first special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to the variable performance of the first special symbol that can notify the execution status of the variable performance of the first special symbol, a second special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to the variable performance of the second special symbol, a first reserved number lamp that corresponds to the reserved number of the first special symbol, a second reserved number lamp that corresponds to the reserved number of the second special symbol, a launch mode notification lamp that suggests to the player the launch mode of the game ball (so-called right hit notification lamp), an error notification lamp that notifies the player that normal play is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10, and the like, so-called a fourth symbol display device and a game status suggestion device. By configuring in this way, the game situation can be grasped only by the variable winning device 65, so that even if the drum display device 81 or various notification lamps, etc., fail, the notification function of the variable winning device 65 can accurately suggest the game situation, etc. to the player. In addition, in the case of a pachinko machine in which the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the second starting hole 64b are arranged on the right side of the front view of the game board 13, and the player is made to play a so-called right-hand hit game in a game state advantageous to the player (i.e., "probability variable state" or "time shortened state"), by adding functions such as a so-called fourth symbol display device and a game situation suggesting device to the variable winning device 65, it becomes possible to simply suggest the game content (result) to the player by checking the variable winning device 65 during the above game state.

<Modification 33>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in the same shape. In contrast, the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the shape of the rear lower diffusion lens 425 may be configured to be different. Specifically, for example, the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are configured so that the angle of the optical path of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the angle of the optical path of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 are different angles. By configuring in this way, randomness is created in the overlapping part between the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the optical path of the light diffused from the rear lower diffusion lens 425, and a lighting display with a surprising decorative pattern can be realized, and a variety of performances can be performed.

<Modification 34>
In the first embodiment, the side lengths of the left-direction diffusion section 425a, the front-direction diffusion section 425b, and the right-direction diffusion section 425c are formed so that the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the left-direction diffusion section 425a, the front-direction diffusion section 425b, and the right-direction diffusion section 425c forming one recess of the rear downward diffusion lens 425 are the same. In contrast, the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the left-direction diffusion section 425a, the front-direction diffusion section 425b, and the right-direction diffusion section 425c may be formed to be different from each other. Specifically, for example, the side lengths of the left-direction diffusion section 425a, the front-direction diffusion section 425b, and the right-direction diffusion section 425c may be configured to be the same (for example, all 50 μm), and the optical path width of the light irradiated from the front-direction diffusion section 425b may be configured to be different from the optical path width of the light irradiated from the left-direction diffusion section 425a and the right-direction diffusion section 425c. With this configuration, randomness is created in the optical path of the light diffused from each of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c, making it possible to realize the lighting display of unexpected decorative patterns and to implement a variety of presentations.

<Modification 35>
In the first embodiment, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 are arranged to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413. In contrast, an LED (for example, the front right LED 415c) corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413 may be arranged only on one side (for example, the right direction) to light up the fourth decorative pattern group 413. By configuring in this way, the installation cost of the LEDs can be reduced.

<Modification 36>
In the first embodiment, in order to light and display the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 in the front light guide plate 410, the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d that condense the light irradiated from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c are arranged. In contrast, at least one of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d may not be arranged, and the light irradiated from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c may be directly irradiated to the front light guide plate 410 without passing through a condensing lens or the like depending on the portion. In particular, the condensing lens is not arranged in the LEDs corresponding to the portion where it is little necessary to condense the light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c (for example, the decorative pattern where different decorative patterns are not adjacent to each other (i.e., the fourth decorative pattern group 413)). With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for focusing lenses in areas where inconsistencies in the presentation are unlikely to occur, reduce the number of parts in the light guide unit 400, and reduce manufacturing costs.

<Modification 37>
In the first embodiment, the rear light guide plate 420 is configured to form the diffusion lenses 423, 425 on the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion and the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion, respectively, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated by the light diffused from each diffusion lens 423, 425. In contrast, the diffusion lens 425 may be formed only on one end surface (e.g., the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion), and the diffusion lens may not be formed on the other end surface (e.g., the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion), so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated only by the diffusion lens 425 formed on the one end surface. By configuring in this way, the number of parts of the light guide unit 400 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, the light guide unit 400 was formed by the second front light guide plate 440 having the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion in the second front light guide plate 440, and the second rear light guide plate 450 having the second rear lower normal R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion in the second rear light guide plate 450. In contrast, the light guide unit 400 may be configured to include a front light guide plate having a normal R-shaped portion (i.e., an R-shaped portion in the same direction as the front outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81) as the only R-shaped portion in the front light guide plate located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a rear light guide plate having an inverted R-shaped portion (i.e., an R-shaped portion in the opposite direction to the front outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81) as the only R-shaped portion in the rear light guide plate located on the back side of the front light guide plate. By configuring in this way, a predetermined space can be formed between the upper flat plate portions of the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate, so that, for example, by configuring the predetermined space to be capable of performing a performance by another performance device (for example, making a movable role object appear and disappear, etc.), a variety of performances can be performed by the light guide unit 400 and the other performance devices, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 each having a unique R-shaped portion formed thereon are provided on the lower side of the drum display device 81. In contrast to this, a light guide plate having a unique R-shaped portion formed thereon may be provided on the upper side, left side, or right side of the drum display device 81.

<Modification 39>
In the second embodiment, the two light guide plates 440, 450 are each configured to have an R-shaped portion. In contrast, the R-shaped portion may be formed only in one of the light guide plates 440, 450, and the R-shaped portion may not be formed in the other light guide plate 450, 440, that is, the light guide plate may be configured to have only a flat portion. Also, the various effects may be performed using only one light guide plate having one R-shaped portion.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment, the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) was arranged at a lower position of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a) in order to light up the second front lower decorative pattern 443 (second rear lower decorative pattern 453) provided in the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a). In contrast, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 (second rear upper decorative pattern 452) may be configured to be lighted by the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451). By configuring in this way, it is possible to relax the constraints on the arrangement of the LEDs in the light guide unit 400, and the design freedom of the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

<Modification 41>
In the first embodiment, two light guide plates 410 and 420 are provided, and one light guide plate 410 is irradiated with light via condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and the other light guide plate 420 is irradiated with light via diffusing lenses 423 and 425. In the third embodiment, one light guide plate 470 is provided, and the light guide plate 470 is irradiated with light via condenser lenses 475b and 476b, and also via diffusing lens 473. On the other hand, when two light guide plates are provided, light may be irradiated to one light guide plate with only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, only one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or neither a condensing lens nor a diffusing lens, depending on the type or aspect of the decorative pattern to be turned on, and light may be irradiated to the other light guide plate with only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, only one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or neither a condensing lens nor a diffusing lens. Also, when one light guide plate is provided, light may be irradiated to the light guide plate with only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, only one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or neither a condensing lens nor a diffusing lens, depending on the type or aspect of the decorative pattern to be turned on. By configuring in this manner, by appropriately using focusing lenses or diffusing lenses depending on the type or appearance of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, the decorative pattern on the light guide plate can be illuminated as desired, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the light guide plate and increasing attention to the game.

<Modification 41>
In the fourth embodiment, the "chance" symbols are arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and a game of whether or not the "chance" stops is created. In contrast, the "chance" symbols may not be arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and the symbol arrangement may be configured with only numerical symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the pattern control such as changing the acceleration/deceleration pattern and the time scale of the constant speed fluctuation, which were necessary to skip the "chance" symbols when the "chance" symbols are arranged in the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" or during full rotation, and fine adjustment of the slip return, and it is possible to standardize the acceleration/deceleration pattern, the fluctuation time, and the slip return variation of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, thereby reducing the control burden of the symbol control of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR.

<Modification 42>
In the fourth embodiment, the symbol control including the pseudo stop symbol in the variable element of the "pseudo variation" was described. In contrast, the symbol control of the pseudo stop symbol may be configured to be adopted in the re-draw performance or the full rotation performance in which the big win symbol changes during the variable performance. By configuring in this way, the pattern of the symbol control in the re-draw performance or the pattern control in the "full rotation" performance can be simplified, and the control burden regarding the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 43>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the symbol control and the sound output control in the "full rotation" presentation were described. In contrast, the symbol control and the sound output control may be configured to be adopted in other variable elements in the variable presentation, such as the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" or the variable elements of the "re-variation", or in a part of the presentation of any of the "reach displays". By configuring in this way, the symbol control and the sound output control in the variable presentation are linked, and the sense of incongruity based on the symbol control is cancelled (suppressed) by the harmony of the music through the ears, so that the player does not feel incongruity in the variable presentation, and the player's interest in the game is suppressed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

<Modification 44>
In the first embodiment, the "chance" symbols, which are symbols that do not give a jackpot when they are aligned but develop into one of the "reach displays", are arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR. In contrast, the "chance" symbols, which do not directly give a jackpot, may not be arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and the symbol arrangement may be configured with only number symbols that may directly give a jackpot when aligned. By configuring in this way, when performing the variable elements of the "pseudo variation" or the so-called pattern step-up performance during the "full rotation" performance, the symbol control can be performed without considering the "chance" symbols. As a result, the control burden regarding the symbol control can be reduced by simplifying the symbol control.

<Modification 45>
In the fourth embodiment, the "345" symbol, which is not arranged on the other reels LR and RR, is arranged on the center reel CR. In contrast, the center reel CR may be arranged with the same symbol arrangement as the other reels LR and RR, and may be configured with an arrangement that does not include a special symbol such as the "345" symbol. By configuring in this way, when performing the variable element of the "pseudo variation" or the so-called symbol step-up effect during the "full rotation" effect, it is possible to perform symbol control without considering the "345" symbol. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the symbol control.

<Modification 46>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the output and non-output of music are alternately performed for each temporary stop during the "full rotation" effect. In contrast, a predetermined music may be output continuously during the "full rotation" effect, and other music may be output in accordance with each temporary stop and start of rotation.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted by the LEDs 414c and the like is incident from either end of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. In contrast, for example, a predetermined recess may be provided in the flat plate portion or the R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and light may be irradiated onto the recess to irradiate the light toward the inside of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, thereby guiding the light to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 414c and the like.

<Modification 48>
In the first upper embodiment, the display means (presentation means) is a drum display device 81 having reels LR, CR, and RR, which rotates and drives each of the reels LR, CR, and RR to perform a variable presentation of the third symbols attached to each of the reels LR, CR, and RR. In contrast, a rotating belt type reel mechanism consisting of a plurality of belt members wound in a loop around a plurality of pulleys and having a plurality of third symbols printed thereon may rotate and drive each of the belt members to perform a variable presentation of the third symbols attached to each of the belt members.

<Modification 49>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 are sequentially lit from the right end in front view to the left side in front view in the rear light guide plate 420 to perform an effect in which the first decorative pattern group 421 moves from the right side in front view to the left side in front view. In contrast, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be sequentially lit from the right end in front view to the left side in front view of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c and 424 may be sequentially lit from the left end in front view to the right side in front view of the rear light guide plate 420 to perform an effect in which the first decorative pattern group 421 moves from both ends of the rear light guide plate 420 to the center.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, that is, when the lighting display of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 and the lighting display of the confirmation lamp 311 can be performed simultaneously, in order to clearly execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 that is highly important for the game (suggesting a high jackpot basis rate), the performance area of the first decorative pattern group 421 is reduced. In contrast, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, it may be configured to execute one effect preferentially (by reducing other effects) based on a predetermined priority order (for example, high or low performance expectation, large or small performance execution area, early or late performance order, long or short performance time, large or small amount of suggestive information (information transmitted to the player), front or rear in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately make the player recognize the effect that should be prioritized based on a predetermined rule set in advance.

<Modification 51>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 414c is collected by each collecting lens 414d, and the light with increased directivity by the collecting lens 414d is irradiated toward the front light guide plate 410 in the direction of the front side of each LED 414c. In contrast, the light irradiated from each LED 414c may be irradiated toward the front light guide plate 410 with increased directivity compared to the case where the light is irradiated (diffused) only by the LED 414c. Specifically, for example, the light from each LED 414c may be irradiated toward the front light guide plate 410 by using a collecting lens capable of diffusing light in the front direction of each LED 414c and in an oblique direction (for example, about ±15 degrees) from the front direction.

<Modification 52>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 424 is diffused by each diffusion lens 425, and the light with increased diffusivity by the diffusion lens 425 is guided in three directions from each LED 424, namely, the front direction, the left direction inclined about 20 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the right direction inclined about 20 degrees to the right from the front direction. In contrast, the light irradiated from each LED 424 may be guided in the rear light guide plate 420 with increased diffusivity compared to when the light is irradiated (diffused) only by the LED 424. Specifically, for example, the light from each LED 424 may be diffused and irradiated to the rear light guide plate 420 using a diffusion lens capable of diffusing light in three directions, namely, the front direction of each LED 424, the left direction inclined about 15 degrees or less to the left from the front direction, and the right direction inclined about 15 degrees or less to the right from the front direction.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo variation" in the pattern including the "4" symbol included in the "345" symbol arranged only on the center reel CR is not executed. That is, the variable element of the "pseudo variation" in the pattern including the "4" symbol, which is non-common, such as "2" → "3" → "4", "3" → "4" → "5", "4" → "5" → "6", which is non-common, is not executed, and the variable element of the "pseudo variation" in the pattern including the "4" symbol indirectly is not executed by skipping (omitting) the non-common "4" symbol, such as "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" → "6". In contrast, the variable element of the "pseudo variation" in the pattern including the non-common "4" symbol directly, such as "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" → "6", which is non-common, may be executed as the variable element pattern of the "pseudo variation". In this case, patterns that do not include the symbol "4" are stored in advance, and the amount of change (variation) in the symbols is different from a pattern that changes in a permutation (for example, "1"->"2"->"3"), so symbol control different from the pattern control in the permutation is required, but the variation in the variable elements of the "pseudo variation" can be made richer, making the game more interesting.

In each of the above embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6" to change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol, but the steps in which the probability setting value can be changed are not limited to six steps, and it may be changed to any step.

In each of the above embodiments, the probability of winning a big prize is changed by changing the probability setting value, but it is also possible to change the probability of winning a normal symbol or the probability of winning a small prize.

Also, if it is determined during the start-up process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (e.g., "1") from the range of "1" to "6" may be forcibly set as the probability setting value. Note that if it is determined during play (e.g., during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent players from suffering any disadvantages due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during play.

In the above embodiment, the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum) includes the probability setting value, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, a setting change process may be forcibly executed to have the hall staff change the probability setting value, or the hall staff may be prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or a specific probability setting value within the normal range may be forcibly set as the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch, but this can also be done with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the off side, and is configured so that when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically biased to return to the on state. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it easy to change the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is confirmed by turning off the setting key 501 or by turning on the RAM erase switch 503, but this may also be done by operating a separately provided switch, for example a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value, for example, by being operated during the "setting change mode", and may be provided protruding from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, so that it can be operated by hall personnel, etc., without opening the board box 100. This also makes it easy to confirm the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," the start-up mode is set according to the detection state of the RAM clear switch 503 and the setting key 501. Alternatively, the opening of the inner frame 12 may be made a prerequisite, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection state of the RAM clear switch 503 and the setting key 501. Also, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that the hall can select whether or not to make the opening of the inner frame 12 a condition for changing settings or confirming settings.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was mounted on the main control device 110. However, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to change the probability of a big win, etc. In contrast, the setting key 501 may be configured to change the number of prize balls paid out when one winning slot is won (e.g., changing from 3 to 5), the drive time of the movable part that assists the winning slot to be won (3 seconds to 5 seconds) and the drive width (e.g., changing from 20 mm to 30 mm), the inclination of the part that affects the flow of the ball (e.g., the stage or crane on which the ball can roll) (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the inclination of the pachinko machine 10 itself (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), and other settings related to the degree of advantage to the player in multiple stages.

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, the keyhole of the setting key 501 may be configured to face laterally (left or right) of the pachinko machine 10, diagonally of the pachinko machine 10, or toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the small jackpot random numbers, and the losing random numbers are consecutive values, and the range of whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot is reached can be determined (for example, whether or not it is between "0" and "49"), thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110. In contrast, the random numbers that provide the game value (i.e., the jackpot random numbers and the small jackpot random numbers) may be arranged in a dispersed (dissipated) manner rather than in a continuous arrangement. Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot random number counter C1 that is updated from "0 to 999", the jackpot random number may be "7,341,555,777,831", and the small jackpot random number may be "77,175,223,315,415,526,634,717,845".

Here, if there are consecutive values that become jackpot random numbers regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in low and high probability states, a value between 0 and 50 is a jackpot), the value may be predictable from the outside, which may increase the possibility of winning a jackpot illegally. Therefore, by configuring it as in the above modified example, it is possible to make each random number that awards game value more difficult to predict from the outside, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraud and improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state may be set separately so that they do not overlap. By configuring in this way, the random number value for the jackpot can be changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), making it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot, thereby improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type random number C2, etc. were updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see Figure 23) (so-called soft random numbers). In contrast, the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. may be updated by a random number generation IC that has a faster update cycle than the above-mentioned soft random numbers (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from outside, and security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value was configured to increase evenly with each increase in the setting value. In contrast, the jackpot random number value (or small jackpot random number value) may be configured to increase unevenly or at a predetermined rate with each increase in the setting value. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value increases by "2" from setting value "1" to "3", while the jackpot random number value increases by "5" from setting value "4" to "6". By configuring in this way, the game value that can be awarded varies greatly depending on the setting difference, making it possible to provide a game with a sense of rhythm (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and improving the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the corresponding role in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 was changed for each set value. In contrast, it is also possible to change the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small jackpot type counter (not shown), which determines the content of the small jackpot, for each set value, so that a setting difference occurs due to a change in the selection ratio of the jackpot type or small jackpot type.

In the above embodiment, the number of times each special symbol is executed in the "time-shortened state" is counted using a time-shortened counter common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In contrast, the number of times each special symbol is dynamically displayed in the "time-shortened state" may be counted using a special symbol 2 time-shortened counter that counts only the number of times the second special symbol is changed, and a total time-shortened counter that counts the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed, to determine the end condition of the "time-shortened state". Alternatively, a special symbol 1 time-shortened counter that counts only the number of times the first special symbol is changed may be provided, and the "time-shortened state" may be ended depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed, to determine the end condition of the "time-shortened state". By configuring in this way, the variety of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol was configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. In contrast, the dynamic display may be configured to be executed in the order in which the special symbols were acquired (in the order in which they were reserved), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

In the above embodiment, the random number value that awards game value (i.e., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a change in the setting, and the change is compensated for from random number values that do not award game value (i.e., losing random number values). In contrast, when a random number value that awards game value (e.g., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a change in the setting, the change may be compensated for from random number values that award other game value (e.g., small win random number value). By configuring in this way, differences can be created in the game value that can be awarded for each setting, providing a game with a sense of rhythm (sharpness) for each setting, and improving the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a were specified (set) in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of small jackpot random number", and "range of miss random number". In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured to specify (set) each random number in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of small jackpot random number", "range of jackpot random number (hereinafter referred to as "range of re-jackpot random number")", and "range of miss random number". Here, the "range of re-jackpot random number" is configured to correspond to the increase in the jackpot random number due to the setting change. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the miss random number value), and the range of random numbers that do not change due to the setting change (i.e., the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value that do not change even due to the setting change) can be fixed. This allows, for example, in a control program for winning/losing judgments, the basic winning/losing judgment of a fixed random number value can be made common across all settings, while the increase in the jackpot random number value resulting from a change in settings can be additionally judged according to the settings, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers were specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of small jackpot random number", and "range of losing random number". In contrast, the random numbers may be specified (set) in order of the number of random numbers in descending order (or in descending order).

In the above embodiment, the random numbers were specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of small win random number", and "range of miss random number". In contrast, the "range of jackpot random number" that increases with the setting change may be specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a so that it is adjacent to the "range of miss random number" that decreases with the setting change. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the random numbers are specified (set) in the order of "range of small win random number", "range of jackpot random number", and "range of miss random number". By configuring in this way, the random number that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the miss random number), and the range of the random number that does not change with the setting change (i.e., the range of the small win random number) can be fixed. This allows, for example, in a control program for determining whether a small win has been won or not, to standardize the determination of the small win random number value for all settings, while additionally determining the increase in the big win random number value resulting from a change in settings according to the settings, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the probability of a big win with a special symbol is increased (10 times higher) when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability changing state". In contrast to this, the probability of a small win with a special symbol may be increased when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability changing state". Also, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability changing state", the degree of increase in the probability of a big win with a special symbol may be set to 10 times or less (e.g., 2 times). Furthermore, when transitioning from the "normal game state" to the "probability changing state", both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be increased (e.g., the probability of a big win is set to 5 times and the probability of a small win is also set to 5 times).

In the second embodiment described above, the probability of winning a small win game with the second special symbol was configured to be higher than the probability of winning a small win game with the first special symbol. In contrast, the probability of winning a small win game with the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the probability of winning a small win game with the second special symbol, or the probability of winning a small win game with the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to be equal.

In the above embodiment, the game is configured as a so-called loop type game specification in which, when the "probability changing state" is entered, the "probability changing state" is maintained until the next big win occurs. In contrast to this, the game may be configured as a game specification in which, after the end of a big win, regardless of which big win is won, a "probability changing state" (so-called ST type) is granted, the end condition of which is the execution of a predetermined number of dynamic displays after the end of the big win. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to enrich the variety of games and contribute to increasing the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability is increased equally (all 10 times increase) for all setting values when changing from a low probability state to a high probability state for special symbols. In contrast, it may be configured to change the increase rate of the jackpot probability for each setting value (for example, setting value "1" is 5 times, setting value "2" is 6 times, ... setting value "6" is 10 times, etc.). By configuring in this way, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a jackpot in a high probability state for special symbols, and the phenomenon of winning a jackpot game quickly in a high probability state is itself a setting suggestion. Therefore, the gameplay is created by how quickly you can win a jackpot in a high probability state, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, a setting difference in the jackpot probability occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern. In contrast, a setting difference in the jackpot probability in one of the states (low probability state or high probability state) may be eliminated, and a setting difference may be provided in the jackpot probability in the other state (high probability state or low probability state).

In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number is compensated for by the loss random number. Alternatively, the jackpot random number may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number may be compensated for by the small win random number and the loss random number. By configuring in this way, the change in the number of jackpot random numbers based on the setting change can be compensated for by each of the small win random number and the loss random number, and there is no need to compensate for the change in the jackpot random number from a fixed predetermined random number of 1. Therefore, there is no need to secure the number of the above-mentioned predetermined random numbers from the change in the jackpot random number and the predetermined random number of 1, so there are no constraints when designing the game specifications, which increases the design freedom of the game specifications and improves the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment described above, if there is no jackpot round selected as the timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect", the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to be performed at another timing (ending effect). In contrast, if there is no jackpot round selected as the timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect", the "setting suggestion effect" may be configured to be executed at another round that exists in the jackpot. In this case, even if it is selected to execute the "setting suggestion effect" at a round other than the round that matches the probability setting value, if that round does not exist, the "setting suggestion effect" may be configured to be executed at another round excluding the round that matches the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, a "setting suggestion effect" is provided as an effect suggesting a probability setting value that can be set in multiple stages, and is configured to suggest to the player in the "setting suggestion effect" based on the probability setting value and the lottery result. In contrast to this, it may be configured to suggest to the player multiple stages of events that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 based on the lottery result. For example, it may suggest which state (stage) of the pachinko machine 10's multiple-stage game state (e.g., "normal game state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", and "time reduction state") it is in, it may suggest which state (step) of a multiple-stage effect it is in, or it may be configured to suggest which state of multiple stages of jackpot expectation it is in.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display, but the main control device 110 may send commands directly to the display control device 114. Also, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and commands instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be sent from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as a single control device. By configuring them as a single control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON if a stop type command is received has been described, but the fluctuation start flag may also be set to ON if a fluctuation pattern command is received and then a stop type command is received. This makes it possible to prevent strange fluctuation performances from being executed in cases where a stop type command is received without a fluctuation pattern command being received.

Also, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing of receiving the fluctuation pattern command. In this case, in the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display fluctuation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fact that the fluctuation start flag is turned ON may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to execute the fluctuation performance on the drum display device 81 based on this display fluctuation pattern command without waiting for the reception of the stop type command. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, and transmit it to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance executed by the drum display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the continuous notice performance may be executed on the drum display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth pattern display device separate from the drum display device 81 may be provided, and the fourth pattern may be displayed on the fourth pattern display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed on the drum display device 81 to execute the continuous notice performance. In this case, the fourth pattern display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the continuous notice performance may be executed by providing a role that operates according to various performances in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the role in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance. In addition, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or the continuous notice performance may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

More specifically, as the fourth pattern display device, a first special pattern lamp which variably displays in response to the variable performance of the first special pattern, a second special pattern lamp which variably displays in response to the variable performance of the second special pattern, a first reserved number lamp corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second reserved number lamp corresponding to the second special pattern are provided, and the lighting of the first reserved number lamp is controlled (for example, an increase or decrease display in response to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) in response to a winning entry into the first starting hole 64a, the lighting of the second reserved number lamp is controlled (for example, an increase or decrease display in response to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern) in response to a winning entry into the second starting hole 64b, the lighting of the first special pattern lamp is controlled (for example, a blinking display of the first special pattern lamp) in conjunction with (corresponding to) the execution of the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and the lighting of the second special pattern lamp is controlled (for example, a blinking display of the second special pattern lamp) in conjunction with (corresponding to) the execution of the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. In this way, the fourth symbol display device can indicate to the player the type of special symbol currently being displayed, and thus the manner in which the variable presentation will be performed.

As a result, each time a variable performance is performed on the drum display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), symbols are displayed in succession on the fourth symbol display device, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of expectation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues playing while gazing at the drum display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the continuous advance notice performance is performed by the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device separate from the drum display device 81, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that the player can easily recognize that a different performance than usual has been performed. In addition, the continuous advance notice performance can be easily performed with simple control such as the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33.

In addition, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the audio lamp control device 113 perform the continuous preview performance, and having the display control device 114 perform the fluctuation performance, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each process. This prevents the load from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be performed by combining and controlling at least two of the following: display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the drum display device 81, display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role in a predetermined manner, audio output from the audio output device 226, and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 in conjunction with each other. This allows a wider variety of continuous preview performances to be performed. In addition, by changing the method of performing the continuous preview performance (display by the drum display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected according to the game state after the continuous preview performance ends (10R special jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, miss).

In addition, when a continuous notice performance is performed, an image for the continuous notice performance other than the variable performance may be displayed on the drum display device 81, or the continuous notice performance may be performed by displaying a combination of predetermined patterns, so-called "chance eyes", as a stop pattern to be displayed when the variable performance ends. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous notice command has been received, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye may be turned on, and other stop pattern discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process after the stop identification command process, so that the chance eye is set as the stop pattern instead of the stop pattern set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eye can be displayed as a definite stop when the variable performance stops. And, if the chance eye is displayed consecutively as a stop pattern for each variable performance on the drum display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that he will eventually win a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when a winning ball is entered into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start winning), the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the reserved ball count that has been increased by "1" including each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in response to the start winning. However, the type of counter included in the reserved ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. In addition, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in response to the start winning, information indicating the value of each counter may not be included in the reserved ball count command, but information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command other than the reserved ball count command and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The other command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, or the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning may be added to a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a change pattern command or a stop pattern command. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending counts the notified counter values relate to. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in any of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to that pending count, based on the information on the pending count included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 indicated by the reserved ball count command in the RAM 223, or when it receives a reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter), it may determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot, the type of miss if there is a miss, etc. based on the values of each counter indicated in the command, and store these determination results in the RAM 223 in place of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the values of the counters.

In addition, for example, the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b may be given priority over the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a. Or, the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a may be given priority over the variable presentation based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the start opening where the variable presentation is given priority.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which two start ports, the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, are arranged on the game board 13 as start ports through which the jackpot lottery begins when a ball enters the port, but this is not necessarily limited to the case, and the number of start ports may be one, or three or more. If there are two or more start ports, a corresponding reserved ball counter may be provided in the RAM 203 for each start port, and the number of reserved balls that are reserved in response to a winning entry into the corresponding start port may be counted for each start port. Also, a maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved in response to a winning entry into the corresponding start port may be set for each start port.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball number command that the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 to notify that a ball has been reserved due to winning at a starting port may include information indicating which starting port the ball has been reserved due to winning at. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which starting port the variation performance has been reserved at. In this way, the voice lamp control unit 113 has a reserved ball number counter prepared for each starting port, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number is set in the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the reserved ball number command, and when a variation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated in the variation pattern command is decremented by one, allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each starting port.

In addition, when multiple starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning of each starting hole (start winning) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in association with the starting winning may include information indicating which starting hole the value was acquired in association with the starting winning. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting hole the fluctuation performance is associated with. Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each starting hole, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the starting winning of the corresponding starting hole may be stored in the corresponding look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the starting hole in which the start winning that triggered the execution of the fluctuation performance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the variable performance on hold for each start port can also be stored in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, in cases where the probability of a jackpot, the allocation probability of the jackpot type, the allocation probability of the miss type, etc. differ depending on the start port where the start is won, the look-ahead process can correctly determine whether or not each variable performance will be a jackpot, the jackpot type if a jackpot, and the miss type if a miss, based on which start port the start is won. Also, in cases where a variable performance based on a start port winning is performed in priority to a variable performance based on a start port winning in another start port, the look-ahead process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on a start port winning in one, and the number of pending variable performances that will be a jackpot in the near future can be correctly determined.

In addition, in the case where multiple start ports are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the values of each counter acquired based on the start winning into the start port from the main control device 110 by command, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute the continuous notice performance for all variable performances (reserved balls) reserved at that time, regardless of the start port where the start winning occurred. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which multiple start ports are provided and the variable performance for the winning into one start port is executed preferentially over the variable performance for the winning into the other start port, the start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the result of the pre-reading of the counter value acquired for the winning into the start port where the variable performance is executed preferentially. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting for the execution of the continuous notice performance is not determined for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the start port with low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If the continuous notice performance is started for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the start port with low priority, and the variable performance is constantly reserved for the start port with high priority, there is a risk that the continuous notice performance will not end easily. In contrast, in this modified version, the setting for the execution of a continuous preview performance is not determined for a variable performance that corresponds to a win at a starting port with a low priority, and a continuous preview performance is not started for this variable performance, thereby preventing such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, the winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b may be set separately for each starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting port may be any number other than "4". In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on winning entry into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b may be displayed in a part of the drum display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting member.

As shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is one type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical reel drive by the drum display device 81, but may be horizontal reel drive by the drum display device 81, or may be a display in which a pattern as identification information moves vertically, horizontally, or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to a variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Group A: Multiple display areas are displayed by lighting one LED through a diffusion lens>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified starting condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of a single color or the color of light emitted, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc. (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group A were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion;
The gaming machine A0 is characterized by comprising a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light emitting means beyond the width of the light emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine A0, the presentation means produces a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light from the light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the light-emitting section. This makes it possible to accurately make visible predetermined information that is wider in range than the width of the light-emitting section of the light-emitting means, and has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine A0,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine A1 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A0. That is, the specified portion is a specified end of the light guiding means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed with the specified end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusion means and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

In the gaming machine A0 or A1,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a multi-direction illumination means (e.g., one recess of the rear downward diffusion lens 425) having at least a first direction illumination section (e.g., a left direction diffusion section 425a) that illuminates light from the light-emitting means in a predetermined first direction (e.g., the left direction) and a second direction illumination section (e.g., a front direction diffusion section 425b) that illuminates light in a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., the front direction).

Gaming machine A2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A0 or A1. That is, the multi-directional illumination means provided in the diffusion means is provided with at least a first direction illumination section that illuminates light from the light emitting means in a first direction, and a second direction illumination section that illuminates light in a second direction. This has the effect of making it possible to accurately view specific information arranged in multiple directions, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A0 to A2,
A gaming machine A3, characterized in that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect.

Gaming machine A3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 to A2. That is, the first direction and the second direction are configured not to intersect. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light-emitting unit is diffused in two directions by the diffusion means, so that predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light-emitting unit of the light-emitting unit, or multiple predetermined patterns provided at different positions, can be accurately viewed, and the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that it is provided with a plurality of the multi-directional irradiation means at the predetermined end.

Gaming machine A4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines A2 and A3. That is, at a predetermined end, the diffusion means is provided with a plurality of multi-directional illumination means. This allows each multi-directional illumination means to diffuse light in a bundle in the first direction and the second direction, making it possible to accurately view the specified information arranged in the first direction and the specified information arranged in the second direction, and thereby increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine A4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A5, characterized in that a plurality of the multi-directional irradiation means are continuously formed at the predetermined end portion.

Gaming machine A5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A4. That is, at the specified end, a plurality of multi-directional illumination means are continuously formed in the diffusion means. As a result, no matter where the light-emitting portion of the light-emitting means is disposed on the specified end side, the light from the light-emitting portion can be continuously diffused in the light-guiding means by the multi-directional illumination means continuously provided at the specified end, making it possible to make the specified information visible. This has the effect of increasing the degree of design freedom regarding the arrangement of the light-emitting portion of the light-emitting means.

In any one of gaming machines A2 to A5,
The multi-directional irradiation means includes:
Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a third direction illumination unit (e.g., a right direction diffusion unit 425c) that illuminates light from the light-emitting means in a third direction (e.g., a right direction) different from the first direction and the second direction.

Gaming machine A6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A2 to A5. That is, the third direction illumination section provided in the multiple direction illumination means illuminates light from the light emitting means in a third direction different from the first and second directions. This makes it possible to accurately view specific information arranged in at least three directions, and has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine A6,
The third direction is
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it does not intersect with the first direction and the second direction.

Gaming machine A7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine A6. That is, the third direction is configured so as not to intersect with the first direction and the second direction. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light-emitting unit is diffused in three directions by the diffusion means, so that predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light-emitting unit of the light-emitting unit can be accurately viewed, and the effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means is enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A0 to A7,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that it is formed at least at two ends of the light guiding means (for example, the upper end and the lower end of the rear light guiding plate 420).

Gaming machine A8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 to A7. That is, at least diffusion means are formed on two ends of the light guiding means. This allows light to be diffused from each of the multiple ends, thereby diffusing light comprehensively to the light guiding means. This has the effect of making it possible to accurately make the specified information provided on the light guiding means visible, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine A8,
The diffusion means is
Gaming machine A9, characterized in that the light guiding means is formed at a predetermined first end (e.g., a lower end of the rear light guiding plate 420) and at a second end (e.g., an upper end of the rear light guiding plate 420) that pairs with the first end.

Gaming machine A9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A8. That is, diffusion means are formed at a predetermined first end of the light guiding means and at a second end paired with the first end. This makes it possible to diffuse light comprehensively to the light guiding means by diffusing light from the first end and the end paired with that end. This has the effect of making it possible to accurately make the predetermined information provided on the light guiding means visible, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

<Group B: Designs are placed on the light paths, and designs are also placed in the areas where light paths of different colors overlap>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, for example, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group B were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a first light emitting unit (e.g., one LED of the rear lower LEDs 424) that emits light and a second light emitting unit (e.g., another LED of the rear lower LEDs 424) different from the first light emitting unit;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B0 characterized in that it is formed at a position overlapping at least with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine B0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means is provided with a first light-emitting unit that emits light and a second light-emitting unit different from the first light-emitting unit. When light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the predetermined information is formed at least at a position overlapping with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This has the effect of making the predetermined information accurately visible by the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit of the light-emitting means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a first light-emitting portion (e.g., one LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424, or a front-direction diffusion portion 425b of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425) that emits light, and a second light-emitting portion different from the first light-emitting portion (e.g., another LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424, or a left-direction diffusion portion 425a or a right-direction diffusion portion 425c of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425);
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that, when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion, allows predetermined information related to the game (e.g., a plurality of fish symbols in the first decorative symbol group 421, or one fish symbol in the first decorative symbol group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the predetermined performance.
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is formed at a position overlapping at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine B1, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a first light-emitting section that emits light and a second light-emitting section that is different from the first light-emitting section, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The predetermined information is formed at a position that overlaps at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting section or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting section. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine B1,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B2, characterized in that it is formed to a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine B2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine B1. That is, the specified information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This allows the specified information to be accurately visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B3, characterized in that it is formed within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine B3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines B1 or B2. That is, the specified information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This has the effect of enabling the specified information to be accurately viewed from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B4, characterized in that the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting portion and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting portion are formed at an overlapping position.

Gaming machine B4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, the specified information is formed at a position where the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit overlap. This allows the specified information to be accurately visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having a light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The light emitting means is
A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a different color light emitting means which, when the first light emitting section emits light of a predetermined first light color (e.g., "red"), emits light of a second light color (e.g., "blue") different from the first light emitting color from the second light emitting section.

Gaming machine B5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, the different color light emitting means provided in the light emitting means is configured so that when the first light emitting section emits light of a predetermined first light emitting color, the second light emitting section emits light of a second light emitting color different from the first light emitting color. This has the effect of enabling the predetermined information to be emitted in a variety of display colors, enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine B5,
The predetermined information is
The predetermined first portion and the second portion different from the first portion are included.
The different color light emitting means is
A gaming machine B6, characterized in that light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is irradiated onto the first predetermined portion, and light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is irradiated onto the second predetermined portion.

Gaming machine B6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B5. That is, the predetermined information is composed of a first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion. Then, the different color light emitting means irradiates the first predetermined portion with light emitted from the first light emitting unit, and irradiates the second predetermined portion with light emitted from the second light emitting unit. This allows the predetermined information to be illuminated in different colors, and the predetermined information can be illuminated in a variety of display colors, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B6,
A gaming machine B7, characterized in that it is provided with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine B7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B6. That is, the light from the light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section. This makes it possible to accurately view specific information that is wider than the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section of the light-emitting means, and has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine B7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine B8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine B7. That is, the specified portion is a specified end of the light guiding means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed with the specified end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusion means and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

<Group C: Different LEDs are turned on in sequence for each designated area in a specific direction, for moving and colorful display>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group C were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a first light-emitting section (e.g., a rightmost LED of the rear lower LEDs 424) that emits light, a second light-emitting section (e.g., an LED one position to the left of the rightmost LED of the rear lower LEDs 424) that is disposed on a predetermined side of the first light-emitting section, and a third light-emitting section (two positions to the left of the rightmost LED of the rear lower LEDs 424) that is disposed further on the predetermined side of the second light-emitting section;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The gaming machine C0 is characterized by being equipped with a sequential lighting means (e.g., a voice lamp control device 113) that lights up the light emitting means in sequence from a predetermined direction side.

According to the gaming machine C0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means is provided with a first light-emitting unit that emits light, a second light-emitting unit arranged in a predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit, and a third light-emitting unit arranged in a further predetermined direction from the second light-emitting unit. When light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light-emitting means is sequentially lit from the predetermined direction side by the sequential lighting means. This has the effect of making the predetermined information provided in the light-guiding means sequentially visible from the predetermined direction side, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400, or a light guide unit 400 and a game board 13) is provided for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414 or a game board 13) having at least a first light emitting section (e.g., a rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, or a first board surface decorative pattern group 60a) that emits light, and a second light emitting section (e.g., a rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, or a rear light guide plate 420) arranged in a predetermined direction (e.g., left when viewed from the front) from the first light emitting section,
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means (at least the second light emitting unit).
The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a sequential light-emitting means that sequentially emits light from the first light-emitting section toward the specified direction (for example, lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421 by the sound lamp control device 113, or lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board, and the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board by the sound lamp control device 113).

According to the gaming machine C1, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means is provided with a first light-emitting unit that emits light, and a second light-emitting unit that is arranged in a predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit. When light is emitted from the light-emitting means to the light-guiding means, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the sequential light-emitting means causes the light-emitting means to sequentially emit light from the first light-emitting unit in the predetermined direction. This has the effect of making the predetermined information provided in the presentation means sequentially visible in the predetermined direction from the position where the first light-emitting unit is arranged, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine C1,
Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a sequential light-off means (e.g., light-off control by a voice lamp control device 113) that sequentially turns off the light-emitting means, which has been sequentially illuminated in the specified direction from the first light-emitting unit by the sequential light-emitting means, in the specified direction from the first light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine C2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C1. That is, the light-emitting means that have been sequentially illuminated in a predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit by the sequential light-emitting means are sequentially turned off in the predetermined direction after the first emission by the sequential light-off means. This makes it possible to execute a powerful performance in which the predetermined information moves from the position of the first light-emitting unit in the predetermined direction by sequentially making the predetermined information visible in the predetermined direction from the position of the first light-emitting unit and then making it difficult to see in the predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the performance effect of the performance means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2,
The sequential light emitting means includes:
A gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is provided with a light color transfer means for causing the second light emitting section to emit light in the color that was being emitted by the first light emitting section when the second light emitting section is made to emit light.

Gaming machine C3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines C1 or C2. That is, when the second light-emitting unit is illuminated by the light-emitting color transfer means provided in the sequential light-emitting means, it illuminates in the light color that was being emitted by the first light-emitting unit. This makes it possible to produce an impressive presentation in which the specified information that was visible in a specified light-emitting color seems to move in a specified direction from the position where the first light-emitting unit is disposed. As a result, there is an effect that the attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3,
The sequential light emitting means includes:
A gaming machine C4 is characterized by comprising at least a different color light emitting means for making the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section emit light of different colors.

Gaming machine C4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the different color light emitting means sequentially provided in the light emitting means is configured to emit light of at least different colors from the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section. This makes it possible to produce a colorful presentation in which the specified information, which is now visible in multiple colors, appears to move in a specified direction from the position where the first light emitting section is located. As a result, there is an effect that the presentation effect of the presentation means is enhanced, thereby making it possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine C4,
The different color light emitting means is
Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that after the first light-emitting unit emits a predetermined first light color (e.g., "red"), the second light-emitting unit emits light in the first light color and the first light-emitting unit emits light in a second light color (e.g., "blue") different from the first light-emitting color.

Gaming machine C5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C4. That is, after the first light-emitting unit emits a predetermined first light color by the different color light-emitting means, the second light-emitting unit emits light in the first light-emitting color, and the first light-emitting unit emits light in a second light-emitting color different from the first light-emitting color. This makes it possible to produce a colorful presentation in which the predetermined information, which is now visible in multiple colors, moves in a predetermined direction from the position where the first light-emitting unit is disposed. As a result, there is an effect that the attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5,
The production means is
At least a predetermined first presentation means (e.g., a board surface first decorative pattern group 60a) provided on a game area forming member (e.g., a game board 13) through which game balls can flow down;
A second performance means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) is provided on the predetermined direction side of the first performance means and on a front side of the gaming machine of a display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information,
The sequential light emitting means includes:
A gaming machine C6, characterized in that after emitting light to the first effect means, it emits light to the second effect means.

Gaming machine C6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, as a presentation means, at least a predetermined first presentation means is provided on the play area forming member through which the game balls can flow, and a second presentation means is provided on the predetermined direction side of the first presentation means, on the front side of the game machine of the display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information. Then, the light emitting means sequentially emits light to the first presentation means, and then emits light to the second presentation means. As a result, by performing an integrated presentation using the first presentation means in the play area forming member and the second presentation means provided on the front side of the game machine of the display means which dynamically displays the identification information, it is possible to perform a powerful presentation using the dynamic display of the identification information and a predetermined presentation using the predetermined information, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine C6,
The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the first presentation means and the second presentation means visibly display the same type of pattern as the predetermined information.

Gaming machine C7 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine C6. That is, the same type of pattern is visibly displayed by the first and second presentation means as the specified information. This has the effect of enabling a powerful presentation to be produced by performing a series of integrated presentations by the first and second presentation means, thereby increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means and thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine C7,
The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that, as the predetermined information, one pattern is formed by the first presentation means and the second presentation means.

Gaming machine C8 produces the following effect in addition to the effect produced by gaming machine C7. That is, as the specified information, one pattern is formed by the first and second production means. This has the effect of suppressing the sense of incongruity that occurs when a production spanning the first and second production means is executed, and by executing a series of integrated productions, it is possible to produce a powerful production, and by enhancing the production effect of the production means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines C1 to C8,
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine C9, characterized in that when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end, the predetermined information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine C9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C8. That is, when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a specified end, the specified information provided on the light guiding means becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9,
A gaming machine C10 characterized by being equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine C10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C9. That is, the light from the light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section. This makes it possible to accurately view specific information that is wider than the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section of the light-emitting means, and has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine C9 or C10,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine C11 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines C9 and C10. That is, the diffusion means is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusion means and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

<Group D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other>

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery to determine whether a player wins or not when a certain start condition is met, and when a player wins, the game pays out a certain gaming medium to the player in response to the fulfillment of a certain winning condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

The invention of Group D was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A first performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) that performs a first performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second performance means (e.g., a confirmation lamp 311) for performing a second performance (e.g., turning on or off the confirmation lamp 311) that is more important to the game than the first performance as the game progresses,
The first production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that, when the second performance is executed by the second performance means and the first performance is executed by the first performance means, it is equipped with a second performance priority means (e.g., turning off the rear upper LED 422c) for executing the second performance in priority to the first performance.

According to the gaming machine D0, the first presentation means performs the first presentation as the game progresses. The second presentation means performs the second presentation, which is more important for the game than the first presentation, as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the first presentation means has a light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. Here, when the second presentation means performs the second presentation and the first presentation means performs the first presentation, the second presentation is performed with priority over the first presentation by the second presentation priority means. As a result, even if the first presentation and the second presentation overlap, the second presentation, which is more important for the game than the first presentation, is performed with priority, and the second presentation can be made more noticeable than the first presentation. Therefore, the presentation content of the second presentation, which is important for the game, can be clearly performed, and information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, which has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

A first performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) that performs a first performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second performance means (e.g., a confirmation lamp 311) for performing a second performance (e.g., turning on or off the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first performance as the game progresses;
A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is equipped with a first performance reduction means (e.g., turning off the rear upper LED 422c) for reducing the scale of the first performance when the second performance can be executed by the second performance means and the first performance can be executed by the first performance means.

According to the gaming machine D1, the first presentation means performs the first presentation as the game progresses. Also, the second presentation means performs the second presentation, which is different from the first presentation, as the game progresses. Here, when the second presentation means can perform the second presentation and the first presentation means can perform the first presentation, the first presentation reduction means reduces the presentation scale of the first presentation and performs it. As a result, even when the first presentation and the second presentation are performed in parallel, the presentation scale of the first presentation can be reduced to make the second presentation stand out relatively. Therefore, at least the presentation content of the second presentation can be clearly performed to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and there is an effect of increasing attention to the game.

Note that "reducing the scale of the performance" refers to, for example, reducing the area in which the performance is performed, reducing or decreasing the size or amount of the patterns that appear as part of the performance, replacing a performance that is highly eye-catching (high probability of winning) with a performance that is less eye-catching, reducing the brightness of the performance's light (increasing transparency), reducing the volume of the performance, or making the performance relatively more difficult to see by giving priority to other performances (towards the player).

In the gaming machine D1,
The second performance is
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first presentation has a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded than the first effect.
Even when the first and second effects are executed in parallel, the scale of the first effect, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the second effect, is reduced, and the second effect is executed relatively with priority, so that the second effect can be made to stand out. Thus, the content of the second effect, which is important in the game, can be clearly executed, and information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, resulting in an effect of increasing the attention to the game.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
A first performance selection means (for example, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e and a light guide pattern selection counter 223d) for selecting whether or not to execute the first performance;
A second performance selection means (for example, a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f and a confirmation lamp timing selection counter 223e) for selecting whether or not to execute the second performance;
and a first performance determination means (e.g., a light guiding pattern setting process (S1415)) for determining whether or not to execute the first performance based on the selection result of the first performance selection means when the second performance is executed based on the selection result of the second performance selection means,
The first effect reduction means includes:
The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when the first performance determination means determines that the first performance is to be executed, a performance scale of the first performance is reduced.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 and D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first effect selection means selects whether or not to execute the first effect, and the second effect selection means selects whether or not to execute the second effect. In addition, when the second effect is executed based on the selection result of the second effect selection means, the first effect determination means determines whether or not to execute the first effect based on the selection result of the first effect selection means. Then, when the first effect determination means determines that the first effect is executed, the first effect reduction means reduces the scale of the first effect. As a result, even if the first effect and the second effect, which are each selected separately for execution, can be executed in parallel, the scale of the first effect is reduced depending on whether or not the first effect is executed, so that the second effect can be relatively highlighted. Therefore, at least the effect of clearly executing the content of the second effect can accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The first performance is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that the second performance can be executed in an area larger than the performance area.

Gaming machine D4 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the first effect can be executed in an area larger than the area of the second effect. That is, even if the second effect and the first effect, which has a larger area than the second effect, are executed in parallel, the scale of the executed first effect can be reduced, making the second effect stand out by the amount of the reduction in the scale of the first effect. This has the effect of clearly executing the content of the second effect, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
The first production means is
A light emitting means including a first light emitting unit (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light and a second light emitting unit (e.g., a rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
and an illumination means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that makes it easy to visually recognize predetermined information related to a game when light is irradiated from at least one of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit as the first performance.
The first effect reduction means includes:
Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is equipped with an illumination reduction means which reduces or stops the illumination of light from either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit to reduce the visible range of the specified information when the second presentation means can execute the second presentation and when the first presentation means can execute the first presentation.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the first performance means, light is emitted from the first light-emitting unit provided in the light-emitting means, and light is emitted from the second light-emitting unit also provided in the light-emitting means. Also, when light is irradiated from at least one of the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit as the first performance, the irradiated means is configured to make it easy to see the predetermined information related to the game. Here, when the second performance can be executed by the second performance means and the first performance can be executed by the first performance means, the irradiation reduction means provided in the first performance reduction means reduces or stops the irradiation of light from either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, thereby reducing the visible range of the predetermined information. As a result, even when the first performance and the second performance are executed in parallel, the second performance can be made relatively more noticeable by reducing or stopping the irradiation of light from either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit used in the first performance to reduce the visible range of the predetermined information as the first performance. This has the effect of at least clearly executing the content of the second effect, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

Note that "reducing or stopping the light irradiation" may mean, for example, reducing the light emission area, reducing the light emission brightness, ceasing or interrupting the light emission, reducing the light emission time, or making the light emission intermittent.

In the gaming machine D5,
The irradiation reducing means is
A gaming machine D6, characterized in that the emission of light from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit corresponding to the specified information on the second performance means side is reduced or stopped.

Gaming machine D6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D5. That is, the illumination reduction means reduces or stops illumination of light from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit corresponding to the specified information on the second presentation means side. This reduces the visible range of the specified information on the second presentation means side, among the specified information, making it possible to make at least the first presentation executed near the second presentation less noticeable and to make the second presentation stand out in comparison. This has the effect of at least clearly executing the presentation content of the second presentation, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine D5 or D6,
The irradiated means is
a light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that makes the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means;
Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit more than the width of the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine D7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines D5 and D6. That is, when light is emitted from the light emitting means, the light guiding means as the irradiated means makes it possible to visually recognize the specified information from the front of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. This makes it possible to accurately make visible the specified information that is wider in range than the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit of the light emitting means, and has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine D7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
Gaming machine D8, characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine D8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine D7. That is, the specified portion is a specified end of the light guiding means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed with the specified end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusion means and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

<E group: weak and medium warnings displayed on one light guide plate, strong warnings displayed on a separate light guide plate>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified starting condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group E were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can optimally increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a suggestion information selection means (e.g., MPU 221) for selecting, based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means, the execution of one of first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player the expectation of the given game value being awarded, second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation of the given game value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, or third suggestion information (e.g., first decorative pattern group 421) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation of the given game value being awarded is higher than the second suggestion information;
A first performance means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means;
A gaming machine E0 characterized by comprising a second presentation means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) capable of executing the third suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means.

According to the gaming machine E0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means selects, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the execution of one of the following: first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, or third suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the second suggestion information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first performance means is configured to be able to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information, and similarly, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the second performance means is configured to be able to execute the third suggestion information. In this way, by executing the third suggestion effect, which can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information, by a different presentation means from the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, which can suggest that the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded is lower than the third suggestion information, it is possible to prevent the third suggestion information, which has a large presentation discrepancy, from being abnormally executed if it is erroneously executed due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of presentation discrepancies, accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) is provided for drawing lots for execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting an expectation degree of a predetermined game value being awarded to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
The suggestive information includes at least
the first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level for the predetermined game value to be awarded, second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level for the predetermined game value to be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, and third suggestion information (e.g., first decorative pattern group 421) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level for the predetermined game value to be awarded is higher than the second suggestion information,
A first performance means (e.g., a front light guide plate 410 and each LED 414c, etc.) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means;
A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a second presentation means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420 and each LED 424, etc.) capable of executing the third suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means.

According to the gaming machine E1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Furthermore, the suggestion information lottery means selects the execution of a suggestion based on the suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, and third suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the second suggestion information. The first suggestive information or the second suggestive information is configured to be executable by the first presentation means based on the result of the selection by the suggestive information selection means, and the second presentation means is configured to be executable by the third suggestive information based on the result of the selection by the suggestive information selection means. This allows the third suggestive presentation, which can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is high based on the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information, to be executed by a presentation means different from the first suggestive presentation and the second suggestive presentation, which can suggest that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is low based on the third suggestive information, so that it is possible to prevent the third suggestive information, which has a large presentation discrepancy, from being abnormally executed when it is erroneously executed due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of presentation discrepancies, accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E1,
The first production means is
A first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left direction or a right direction when viewed from the front),
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction when viewed from the front) different from the first direction;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a front light guiding plate 410) that allows the first suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion, and allows the second suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion;
The first light guiding means is
a first emission section (e.g., a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) that emits or easily emits the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light emitted in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine, and does not or has difficulty emitting light emitted in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first light-emitting unit provided in the first performance means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light-emitting unit provided in the first performance means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. Also, when the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on the first light-guiding means from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident on the first light-guiding means from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. And, the first emission unit provided in the first light-guiding means is configured so that the light irradiated in the first direction is or is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the second direction is not or is difficult to be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. In addition, the second emission section provided in the first light guide means is configured so that the light irradiated in the second direction is or is easily emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction is not or is difficult to emit toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the first performance means, the first suggestive information is made visible while the second suggestive information is made invisible or difficult to recognize by the light from the first direction, and the second suggestive information is made visible while the first suggestive information is made invisible or difficult to recognize by the light from the second direction, so that the first performance means can also express multiple pieces of suggestive information. As a result, even if multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the first performance means, the first and second light emitting sections can be controlled to emit light separately to make each piece of suggestive information visible, and the first performance means can be made visible by making it possible to express multiple pieces of suggestive information, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the first performance means and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E2,
The first production means includes at least
Gaming machine E3 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (e.g., a front downward focusing lens 414d, a front right focusing lens 415d, or a front left LED 416c) that increases the directivity of light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit.

The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2. That is, the directivity of the light irradiated from at least the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit is increased by the directivity improving means provided in the first performance means. As a result, even if a plurality of pieces of suggestive information are provided in the first performance means, only the suggestive information to be irradiated can be accurately made visible. Therefore, even if the second suggestive performance that can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information is executed by the same first performance means as the first suggestive information, each piece of suggestive information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, respectively. As a result, there is an effect that the desired suggestive information can be accurately made visible, and by accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player, attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3,
The second production means is
a third light-emitting unit (e.g., rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
a second light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows only the third suggestive information to be viewed from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the third light emitting unit is incident on a predetermined third portion;
A gaming machine E4 characterized by comprising a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) for diffusing the light from the third light-emitting portion beyond the width of the third light-emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved. That is, as the second presentation means, when light is emitted from the third light-emitting unit, and the light emitted from the third light-emitting unit is incident from a predetermined third portion, the second light-guiding means makes the third suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the third light-emitting unit is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the third light-emitting unit. As a result, in the second light-guiding means in which only one suggestive information is provided, the light emitted from the third light-emitting unit is diffused beyond the width of the third light-emitting unit, so that the light can be irradiated over a wider area than the arrangement of the third light-emitting unit. As a result, for example, even if the third suggestive information is provided large in the second light-guiding means, the third suggestive information can be accurately made visible, and the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is integrally formed in the third portion of the second light guiding means.

Gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine E4. That is, it is integrally formed in the third portion of the second light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the second performance means by integrally forming the second light guiding means and the diffusion means and reducing the number of parts in the second performance means.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5,
The first production means and the second production means,
A gaming machine E6 characterized in that the game machines are arranged in an overlapping manner toward the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine E6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, the first presentation means and the second presentation means are arranged to overlap in the front direction of the gaming machine. This has the effect of making multiple pieces of suggestive information visible in one presentation area, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E6,
The first production means is
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that the second presentation means is disposed closer to the front of the gaming machine than the second presentation means.

Gaming machine E7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine E6. That is, the first presentation means is arranged closer to the front of the gaming machine than the second presentation means. That is, the first presentation means arranged to be able to view the first and second suggestion information, which have a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the third suggestion information, is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine of the second presentation means arranged to be able to view the third suggestion information. As a result, for example, even if light from the indoor lighting of the gaming hall is irradiated from the front side of the gaming machine, the amount of light reaching the second presentation means can be reduced by the first presentation means, and there is an effect of suppressing erroneous lighting of the third suggestion information, which is more affected by presentation discrepancies than other suggestion information.

<Group F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction is different for each display object, few-direction areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and many-direction areas (two directions, bubbles) on one light guide plate, strong effects in few directions (weak effects in places where light paths overlap)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention in Group F was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a suggestion information drawing means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing the execution of at least first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
A performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
A first light emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
A second light emitting means (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guiding means (e.g., the front light guiding plate 410) that allows the first suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410), and that allows the second suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guiding plate 410);
At least the second suggestion information is
The gaming machine F0 is characterized in that the presentation means is provided at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine F0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means selects at least the execution of first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, or second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, the performance means is configured to be able to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. Here, the first light-emitting means provided in the performance means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. In the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the presentation means, the second suggestive information is provided at least in a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the second suggestive presentation, which can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information, is provided in a position where the light from the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. This makes it possible to suppress abnormal execution of the second suggestive information, which has a large presentation discrepancy when it is erroneously executed due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of presentation discrepancies is suppressed, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for lotterying the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting the expectation degree of a predetermined game value being given to a player based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has: first suggestion information (e.g., the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded; and second suggestion information (e.g., the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information.
A first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guiding means (e.g., the front light guiding plate 410) that allows the first suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410), and that allows the second suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guiding plate 410);
The second suggestion information is
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine F1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Also, the suggestion information lottery means selects the execution of a suggestion by the suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the performance means based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, and second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information are provided. Then, a first light-emitting unit provided in the performance means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting unit also provided in the performance means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. In addition, the light guide means provided in the performance means configures the first suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion, and the second suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident from a second portion different from the first portion. Here, the second suggestive information is provided in the light guide means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. That is, the second suggestive information that can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information is formed at a position that is visible only with the light irradiated from at least one of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. This makes it possible to suppress the second suggestive information with a large performance discrepancy from being visible even if light is mistakenly emitted from the first light emitting unit due to noise or malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies in presentation, accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine F1,
The production means includes at least
A gaming machine F2 characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) for increasing the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 has the following effects. That is, the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit is at least increased by the directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a first suggestive presentation that can at least suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is lower than the second suggestive information, the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit can be accurately irradiated to the position where the first suggestive information is provided and does not or has difficulty reaching the position where the second suggestive information is provided, thereby preventing the second suggestive information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of presentation discrepancies can be suppressed, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The first suggestion information is
Gaming machine F3, characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410).

Gaming machine F3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F1 or F2. That is, the first suggestive information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guiding means. That is, the first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is lower than that of the second suggestive information is formed on the optical path of the light irradiated from both the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit. Here, even if the first suggestive information becomes visible due to the light for the second suggestive information, the light for the second suggestive information makes visible the second suggestive information that has a higher expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the first suggestive information, and even if the first suggestive information becomes visible when the second suggestive information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in the presentation. This has the effect of minimizing inconsistencies in presentation and providing a natural game experience to the player, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, by providing the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, at the intersection of the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light in the first direction for the first suggestion information.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
The gaming machine F4 is characterized by being provided with a second directivity improving means (e.g., a front downward focusing lens 414d) for improving the directivity of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting portion.

Gaming machine F4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, the directionality of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit is increased by the second directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a second suggestive presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information, the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit can be accurately irradiated to the position where the second suggestive information is provided, making the second suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine, thereby enabling information regarding the game to be accurately suggested to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
Gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a third upward diffusion lens 473) that diffuses the light irradiated from the second light-emitting portion beyond the width of the second light-emitting portion.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit is diffused by the diffusion means provided in the presentation means beyond the width of the second light-emitting unit. Here, even if the first suggestive information becomes visible due to the light for the second suggestive information irradiated from the second light-emitting unit through the diffusion means, the light for the second suggestive information makes the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the first suggestive information, visible, and even if the first suggestive information becomes visible when the second suggestive information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. As a result, the light from the second light-emitting unit is diffused and the diffused light is comprehensively irradiated onto the second suggestive information, making it possible to clearly recognize the second suggestive information, and even if the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, discrepancies in presentation can be minimized, and a game without discomfort can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5,
The light guiding means is
a first emission section (e.g., a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) that emits or easily emits the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light emitted in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine, and does not or has difficulty emitting light emitted in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first emission section provided in the light guiding means is configured so that the light irradiated in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the second direction is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the gaming machine. Also, the second emission section provided in the light guiding means is configured so that the light irradiated in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the presentation means, the first suggestive information is made visible by the light from the first direction while the second suggestive information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, and the second suggestive information is made visible by the light from the second direction while the first suggestive information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, so that even with one presentation means, multiple suggestive information can be expressed. As a result, even if multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, each piece of suggestive information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section, respectively. By making it possible to express multiple pieces of suggestive information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<Group G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, LED light path direction differs for each display object, few-direction areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and many-direction areas (two directions, bubble group) within one light guide plate, few directions are located in front of the displays (main display, main drum, main LCD)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group G were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
a suggestion information drawing means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing the execution of at least first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
and a performance means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The production means is
A first light emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
A second light emitting means (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guiding means (e.g., the front light guiding plate 410) that allows the first suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410), and that allows the second suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guiding plate 410);
The display means includes:
The gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the presentation means is arranged on the rear side when viewed from the front, at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Also, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the suggestion information lottery means selects the execution of at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded, or second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation that the predetermined gaming value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is configured to be executable by the performance means. Here, a first light-emitting means provided in the performance means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. Then, in the light-guiding means, when the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the performance means, at least a display means is provided on the rear side in a front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the display means that shows the display result of the dynamic display is provided at a position where the light of the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means do not overlap. This makes it possible to reduce the probability that the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information due to a malfunction is executed at the position where the display means showing the game result is arranged, even if the first light-emitting means or the second light-emitting means erroneously emits light due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, which has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
A display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined performance related to a game based on a result of the determination by the determination means,
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for lotterying the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting the expectation degree of a predetermined game value being given to a player based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
and a performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has: first suggestion information (e.g., the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded; and second suggestion information (e.g., the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information.
A first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guiding means (e.g., the front light guiding plate 410) that allows the first suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410), and that allows the second suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guiding plate 410);
The display means includes:
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the light guiding means is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front, at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine G1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. The display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance related to the game based on the judgment result by the judgment means. A predetermined gaming value is then awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the suggestion information lottery means selects the execution of a suggestion based on the suggestion information that can suggest to the player the expectation level at which the predetermined gaming value will be awarded, and the performance means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. As the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player the expected level at which the predetermined gaming value will be awarded, and second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expected level at which the predetermined gaming value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information are provided. Here, a first light-emitting unit provided on the presentation means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second presentation means also provided on the presentation means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. Then, a light-guiding means provided on the presentation means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident from a second portion different from the first portion. Here, the display means is disposed on the light-guiding means on the rear side of the gaming machine as viewed from the front, at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. This has the effect of increasing the presentation effect of the display means and presentation means, respectively, by arranging the display means capable of executing a predetermined presentation related to the game on the rear side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect, and configuring the predetermined presentation related to the game executed by the display means so as not to be hindered, while configuring the presentation means to be able to view the predetermined information, thereby increasing the attention paid to the game.

In the gaming machine G1,
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) that dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
a game value awarding means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) for awarding the game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means;
Equipped with
The display area is
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the light guiding means is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front, at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 has the following effects.
The dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result by the determination means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, the game value granting means can grant the game value to the player. The display area of the display means is disposed on the rear side of the gaming machine as viewed from the front at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guiding means. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effects of the display means and the presentation means, respectively, and increasing attention to the game by disposing the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating whether or not a game value is to be granted on the rear side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect in the presentation means. This has the effect of configuring the dynamic display executed by the display means not to interfere with the presentation, while configuring the presentation means to make the predetermined information indicating the expectation of the presentation of the game value visible.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2,
The production means includes at least
A gaming machine G3 characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) for increasing the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G1 and G2, gaming machine G3 has the following effect. That is, the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit is at least increased by the directivity improving means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a first suggestive presentation that can at least suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is lower than the second suggestive information, the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit can be accurately irradiated to the position where the first suggestive information is provided and does not or has difficulty reaching the position where the second suggestive information is provided, thereby preventing the second suggestive information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of presentation discrepancies can be suppressed, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3,
The first suggestion information is
The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410).

Gaming machine G4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the first suggestive information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guiding means. That is, the first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is lower than that of the second suggestive information is formed on the optical path of the light irradiated from both the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit. Here, even if the first suggestive information becomes visible due to the light for the second suggestive information, the light for the second suggestive information makes visible the second suggestive information that has a higher expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the first suggestive information, and even if the first suggestive information becomes visible when the second suggestive information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in the presentation. This has the effect of minimizing inconsistencies in presentation and providing a natural game experience to the player, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, by providing the first suggestion information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, at the intersection of the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light in the first direction for the first suggestion information.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4,
The second suggestion information is
A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect, and is provided on the front side of the display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine G5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the second suggestive information is provided on the front side of the display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, at a position in the light guide means where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction does not intersect with the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction. This makes it possible to execute both the display means capable of executing a predetermined presentation related to the game and the suggestive information indicating the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded, in the part on the rear side of the gaming machine where the optical path of the light in the first direction does not intersect with the optical path of the light in the presentation means, thereby making it possible to configure the predetermined presentation and the suggestive information visible within the same field of view, thereby enhancing the presentation effects of the display means and the presentation means, respectively, and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5,
The production means is
A gaming machine G6 is characterized by being provided with a second directivity enhancing means (e.g., a front downward focusing lens 414d) for enhancing the directivity of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine G6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G5. That is, the directionality of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit is increased by the second directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a second suggestive presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information, the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit can be accurately irradiated to the position where the second suggestive information is provided, making the second suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine, thereby enabling information regarding the game to be accurately suggested to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G6,
The light guiding means is
a first emission section (e.g., a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) that emits or easily emits the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
A gaming machine G7 is characterized by being equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light emitted in the second direction toward the front of the gaming machine, and does not or has difficulty emitting light emitted in the first direction toward the front of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first emission section provided in the light guiding means is configured so that the light irradiated in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the second direction is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the gaming machine. Also, the second emission section provided in the light guiding means is configured so that the light irradiated in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light irradiated in the first direction is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the presentation means, the first suggestive information is made visible by the light from the first direction while the second suggestive information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, and the second suggestive information is made visible by the light from the second direction while the first suggestive information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, so that even with one presentation means, multiple suggestive information can be expressed. As a result, even if multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, each piece of suggestive information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section, respectively. By making it possible to express multiple pieces of suggestive information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<H group: one light guide plate with a flat shape and a rounded shape, both shapes guide light from the flat part (do not guide light from the rounded part)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The H group invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A bent portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate portion,
The light emitting means is
The gaming machine H0 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the specified portion on the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H0, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-plate-shaped portion and a bent-shaped portion that is bent in a predetermined direction from the flat-plate-shaped portion, and the light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion of the flat-plate-shaped portion. This allows the light-emitting means to input light from a predetermined portion of the flat-plate-shaped portion of the light-guiding means to the light-guiding means, making the predetermined information visible, improving the design freedom regarding the light-emitting means, accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

A first performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of executing a first performance related to a game (e.g., a variation performance of a third symbol);
A second performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a second performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) related to the first performance,
The second production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a light emitting portion (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a front light guide plate 410) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a second decorative pattern group 411) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a front side portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the gaming machine front side from the first performance means,
The light emitting means is
The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the specified portion of the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first presentation means is configured to be able to execute a first presentation related to the game, and the second presentation means is configured to be able to execute a second presentation related to the first presentation. In addition, a light emitting section that emits light is provided in the light emitting means provided in the second presentation means, and when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion by the light guiding means also provided in the second presentation means, predetermined information related to the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the first presentation means. Then, the light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. In other words, the light guiding means is configured to be incident with light from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, not from a portion corresponding to the front side portion that exists on the front side of the first presentation means. This is because, when light is made incident on the light guide means from the front side, the direction of travel of the incident light changes due to the front side, and it may be difficult or impossible to express the specified information in the desired manner. In addition, the light emitting unit etc. must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side, which may reduce the design freedom. Furthermore, the front side is located on the front side of the first presentation means, and if the light emitting unit etc. is arranged to correspond to the front side, the design freedom of the second presentation means (light guide means) may be restricted. For this reason, in the second presentation means having a front side, by making the light incident from a part of the flat-shaped part that is not the front side, the above problem can be preferably solved and the design freedom of the second presentation means can be increased.

In the gaming machine H1,
The front side portion is
A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the first presentation means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the front side is formed as an external shape related part related to the external shape of the first performance means. This means that when light is made to enter the light guiding means from the external shape related part, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the external shape related part, and it may be difficult or impossible to express the specified information in the desired manner. In addition, the light emitting part or the like must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape related part, which may reduce the design freedom. Furthermore, the external shape related part is located on the front side of the first performance means, and if the light emitting part or the like is arranged to correspond to the external shape related part, the design freedom of the second performance means (light guiding means) may be restricted. This has the effect of preferably solving the above problem and increasing the design freedom of the second performance means by making light enter from a part of the flat plate shape part that is not the external shape related part in the second performance means having an external shape related part related to the external shape of the first performance means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The first production means is
The gaming machine H3 is characterized by comprising a display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means.

Gaming machine H3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines H1 or H2. That is, the display means provided in the first performance means is configured to be able to execute dynamic display of identification information based on the result of the determination by the determination means. As a result, when the external shape related portion of the second performance means that executes the second performance related to the dynamic display of identification information is formed in a shape related to the external shape of the display means capable of executing said dynamic display, the second performance means having the external shape related portion allows light to be incident from a portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, thereby advantageously solving the above problem and increasing the design freedom of the second performance means.

In the gaming machine H3,
The display means includes:
A reel (e.g., a left reel LR) on whose circumferential surface a plurality of types of identifiable identification information are arranged;
A cylindrical rotating body (e.g., a left reel unit 81a1) that is rotatable about a rotation axis that is concentric with the reel;
A gaming machine H4 characterized by having a driving means capable of rotating the rotating body.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the display means, a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, are arranged on the circumferential surface of the reel, and the display means is configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis concentric with the reel by a cylindrical rotating body, and the rotating body is configured to be rotationally driven by a driving means. That is, since the display means is formed in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis in order to rotate the reel, the external shape related part of the second performance means is also formed in a shape related to the cylindrical shape (for example, a curved shape). In this case, when light is to be made to enter the light guiding means from the external shape related part of the cylindrical shape, the direction of travel of the entered light is changed by the external shape related part, and there is a risk that it is not possible or difficult to express the specified information in a desired manner. Therefore, in the second performance means having a cylindrical external shape related part, by making light enter from a part of the flat plate shape, the above problem can be preferably solved, and the design freedom of the second performance means can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4,
An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit,
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
The outer shape related part is
Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, as the second presentation, it is configured to be able to execute first suggestion information (e.g., second decorative pattern group 411) as the specified information that can suggest the expectation of a specified gaming value being awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

Gaming machine H5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Also, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the external shape related section is configured to be able to execute first suggestion information as predetermined information that can suggest the expectation degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means as the second performance based on the judgment result by the judgment means. This has the effect of enhancing the performance effects of the first and second performance means, respectively, and increasing attention to the game by configuring the external shape related section of the second performance means associated with the external shape of the first performance means to be able to execute first suggestion information as the second performance indicating the expectation degree of the gaming value being awarded while performing the first performance in the first performance means.

In the gaming machine H5,
The flat plate-shaped portion is
Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, as the second presentation, it is configured to be capable of executing second suggestive information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) that can suggest that the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded to the player is higher than the first suggestive information.

Gaming machine H6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H5. That is, in the flat plate-shaped portion, as a second effect, second suggestive information is configured to be executable, which can suggest that the expectation of the player being awarded a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information. This has the effect of making it possible to express multiple pieces of suggestive information in the second effect means, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect means, and thereby increasing attention to the game.

<I group: R-shape/reverse R-shape, a preview display of 1 is displayed up to the switching point (design display area determination part), and no design is placed at the part where the R-shape switches>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group I were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A first bent portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate portion;
A second bent portion (e.g., a regular R-shaped portion) bent from the first bent portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine I0 is characterized in that the switch is provided at a position that avoids the transition portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I0, the performance means performs a predetermined performance as the game progresses. In addition, the light emitting means provided in the performance means has a light emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guiding means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate shape portion, a first bent shape portion bent from the flat plate shape portion in a predetermined direction, and a second bent shape portion bent from the first bent shape portion in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction, and the predetermined information is provided at a position that avoids the transition portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion. As a result, by not arranging the predetermined information at the transition portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion, where the reflection of the light irradiated into the light guiding means may change irregularly, it is possible to suppress the predetermined information from being unintentionally seen from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the specified information and execute a performance that does not cause inconsistencies, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

A presentation means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) for performing a predetermined presentation (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) in accordance with the progress of a game,
The production means is
A light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
A first bent portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the flat plate portion and bent in a predetermined direction (e.g., toward the front of the gaming machine);
A second bent portion (e.g., a regular R-shaped portion) is formed continuously from the first bent portion and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (e.g., toward the rear of the gaming machine),
The light guiding means is
The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the predetermined information is positioned at a position that avoids the transition portion (e.g., transition point P) between the first curved shape portion and the second curved shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I1, the presentation means performs a predetermined presentation as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-plate-shaped section, a first bent-shaped section formed continuously from the flat-plate-shaped section and bent in a predetermined direction, and a second bent-shaped section formed continuously from the first bent-shaped section and bent in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. Here, the predetermined information is arranged at a position that avoids the transition section between the first bent-shaped section and the second bent-shaped section in the light-guiding means. This is because the reflection angle of the light guided in the light guide means is not uniform on either side of the light guide means at the transition between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion, and the amount of colliding light tends to be sparse (sparse), and even if the predetermined information is arranged at the transition portion, the predetermined information may not be properly expressed, and the predetermined information may not be visible at the appropriate time from the front side of the gaming machine. In addition, while the predetermined information is configured to be visible only by light from a specified direction, if the predetermined information is arranged at the transition portion, the predetermined information may be visible from the front side of the gaming machine by irradiation of light from a direction that would not be visible otherwise, and the predetermined information may be visible at an unintended timing, which may cause discrepancies in the performance content. Therefore, by not arranging the predetermined information at the transition portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion, where the reflection of the light irradiated into the light guide means may change irregularly, and arranging the predetermined information at a position that avoids the transition portion, it is possible to suppress the predetermined information from being unintendedly seen from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the specified information and execute a performance that does not cause inconsistencies, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine I1,
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine I2, characterized in that first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first curved portion.

Gaming machine I2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I1. That is, first predetermined information is arranged as predetermined information across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent portion of the light guiding means. The light guided within the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guiding means tends to have an even reflection angle, and the light guided from the flat plate-shaped portion is guided relatively evenly evenly in the first bent portion formed continuously from there. As a result, there is an effect that the predetermined information can be appropriately expressed and information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
The light guiding means is
A second predetermined information (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) different from the first predetermined information is arranged on the second bent shape portion,
The second predetermined information is
A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 and I2, the gaming machine I3 has the following effect. That is, in the light guiding means, second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second bent shape section, and the second predetermined information is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape section. The reflection angle of the light guided through the second bent shape section of the light guiding means is likely to be stable, while the reflection angle of the light guided from the continuously formed first bent shape section through the switching section tends to be uneven and the amount of colliding light tends to be sparse (sparse), as described above. Therefore, the second predetermined information arranged within the range of the second bent shape section, where the reflection angle of the guided light is stable, is appropriately expressed, and information related to the game is accurately suggested to the player, thereby increasing the attention to the game.

In the gaming machine I3,
A predetermined information selection means (e.g., MPU 221) for selecting execution of a suggestion based on the predetermined information based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
The light guiding means is
The device is configured to be able to execute a suggestion based on the predetermined information based on a result of the selection by the predetermined information selection means,
The predetermined information is
The second predetermined information is configured to suggest to a player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined information,
The light emitting means is
A first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction,
The light guiding means is
When the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light-guiding plate 410), the first predetermined information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light-guiding plate 410), the second predetermined information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The production means includes at least
Gaming machine I4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting section.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the execution of the suggestion based on the predetermined information is selected by the predetermined information selection means based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, the light guide means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the lottery result of the predetermined information selection means. Also, it is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the second predetermined information has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first predetermined information. Here, the first light emitting unit provided in the light emitting means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting unit also provided in the light emitting means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. Also, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. The directivity improving means provided in the presentation means increases at least the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light emitting unit. As a result, when a plurality of pieces of predetermined information are provided in the light guiding means, even when the light guiding means executes a suggestion by the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is lower than that of the second predetermined information, the light irradiated from the first light emitting unit can be accurately irradiated to the position where the first predetermined information is provided and does not or has difficulty reaching the position where the second predetermined information is provided, thereby preventing the second predetermined information from being visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of presentation discrepancies can be suppressed, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines I2 to I4,
The first predetermined information is
Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410).

Gaming machine I5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines I2 to I4. That is, the first predetermined information is provided in the light guide means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect. That is, the first predetermined information, which can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is lower than that of the second predetermined information, is formed on the optical path of the light irradiated from both the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit. Here, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible due to the light for the second predetermined information, the light for the second predetermined information makes the second predetermined information, which has a higher expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded than the first predetermined information, visible, and even if the first predetermined information becomes visible when the second predetermined information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in the presentation. This has the effect of minimizing inconsistencies in presentation and providing a natural game experience to the player, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, by providing first predetermined information with a lower expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the second predetermined information at the intersection of the optical path of the second-direction light corresponding to the second predetermined information and the optical path of the first-direction light corresponding to the first predetermined information.

In the gaming machine I4 or I5,
The production means is
Gaming machine I6 is characterized by having a second directivity improving means (e.g., a front downward focusing lens 414d) that improves the directivity of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine I6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines I4 or I5. That is, the directionality of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit is increased by the second directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when a plurality of predetermined information is provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a second predetermined presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined information, the light irradiated from the second light-emitting unit can be accurately irradiated to the position where the second predetermined information is provided, making the second predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine, thereby accurately suggesting information regarding the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines I4 to I6,
The light guiding means is
a first emission section (e.g., a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) that emits or easily emits the light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit the light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine I7 is characterized by being equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light emitted in the second direction toward the front of the gaming machine, and does not or has difficulty emitting light emitted in the first direction toward the front of the gaming machine.

According to gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines I4 to I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first emission section provided in the light guiding means is configured so that light irradiated in the first direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light irradiated in the second direction is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the gaming machine. Also, the second emission section provided in the light guiding means is configured so that light irradiated in the second direction is emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and light irradiated in the first direction is not emitted or is difficult to emit to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, in the presentation means, the first predetermined information is made visible by light from the first direction while the second predetermined information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, and the second predetermined information is made visible by light from the second direction while the first predetermined information is made invisible or difficult to be seen, so that multiple predetermined information can be expressed even with one presentation means. As a result, even if multiple pieces of specified information are provided in the presentation means, each piece of specified information can be distinguished and made visible by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section, respectively. By making it possible to express multiple pieces of specified information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<J group: Cover to prevent abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong notice light guide plate (sunfish / bubble light guide plate, slit part of the display area forming member)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group J was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A first performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) that performs a first performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses;
A second performance means (e.g., a confirmation lamp unit 310) for performing a second performance (e.g., turning on or off a confirmation lamp 311) different from the first performance as the game progresses,
The first production means is
A first light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion.
The second production means is
A second light emitting means (e.g., a confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit (e.g., an LED that lights up the confirmation lamp 311) that emits light is provided;
A gaming machine J0 characterized in that a cover portion (e.g., lens cut 432) for reducing light from the second light-emitting means to the light-guiding means is provided between the specified information and the second light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine J0, the first presentation means performs a first presentation as the game progresses. The second presentation means performs a second presentation different from the first presentation as the game progresses. The first light-emitting means provided in the first presentation means has a first light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The second light-emitting means provided in the second presentation means has a second light-emitting section that emits light. Here, the light from the second light-emitting means to the light-guiding means is reduced by a cover section provided between the predetermined information and the second light-emitting means. This makes it possible to suppress malfunctions of the predetermined information caused by the light from the second light-emitting means being irradiated onto the predetermined information, and by suppressing the occurrence of presentation discrepancies due to abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information related to the game to the player and increase attention to the game.

In a gaming machine equipped with a first performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a first performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting a first decorative pattern group 421) as a game progresses,
The first production means is
A first light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion;
A gaming machine J1 characterized by having a cover portion (e.g., lens cut 432) that reduces the amount of light at the position where the specified information is arranged in the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first presentation means is configured to be able to execute the first presentation as the game progresses. In addition, a first light-emitting unit that emits light is provided on the first presentation means, and when light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the first light-guiding means provided on the first presentation means makes predetermined information related to the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the cover portion reduces the light at the position where the predetermined information is arranged on the first light-guiding means. This has the effect of suppressing malfunction of the predetermined information caused by light from other than the first light-emitting means being irradiated onto the predetermined information, and by suppressing the occurrence of presentation discrepancies due to abnormal expressions, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine J1,
The game device includes a second presentation means (e.g., a confirmation lamp unit 310) capable of executing a second presentation (e.g., turning on or off a confirmation lamp 311) different from the first presentation as the game progresses, and the second presentation means includes:
A second light emitting means (e.g., a confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit (e.g., an LED that lights up the confirmation lamp 311) that emits light is provided;
The cover portion is
A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it is disposed between the second light-emitting means and the specified information.

Gaming machine J2 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J1. That is, the second effect means is configured to be able to execute a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Also, a second light-emitting unit that emits light is provided on the second light-emitting means provided on the second effect means. Then, a cover unit is disposed between the second light-emitting means and the specified information. This has the effect of preventing malfunction of the specified information caused by the light from the second light-emitting means being irradiated onto the specified information when the first light-emitting means is not emitting light, and by preventing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the effects caused by abnormal expressions, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine J2,
The second light-emitting means emits light having a brightness greater than that of the first light-emitting means when the second performance is executed.

Gaming machine J3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine J2. That is, when the second performance is executed, the second light-emitting means emits light with a stronger light emission brightness than the first light-emitting means. That is, when the second light-emitting means emits light, there is a possibility that the specified information in the first performance means will be affected. Therefore, when the first light-emitting means is not emitting light, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the specified information caused by the light from the second light-emitting means being irradiated onto the specified information, and by suppressing the occurrence of performance discrepancies caused by abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines J1 to J3,
The cover portion is
A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the first presentation means.

Gaming machine J4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J1 to J3. That is, the cover portion is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine from the first effect means. This has the effect of reducing light from the front side of the gaming machine that is irradiated by the lighting in the gaming hall or effects on other gaming machines using the cover portion, thereby suppressing malfunctions of the specified information caused by light other than the first light-emitting means being irradiated onto the specified information, and by suppressing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the effects caused by abnormal expressions, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In any one of gaming machines J1 to J4,
a third light emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a third light emitting portion (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
and a second light guiding means (e.g., a front light guiding plate 410) that allows a second predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a second decorative pattern group 411) to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident on a predetermined second portion,
The cover portion is the second light guiding means.

Gaming machine J5 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects of gaming machines J1 to J4. That is, the third light-emitting means is provided with a third light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the third light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second light-guiding means is configured to make the second predetermined information related to the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second light-guiding means is used as a cover section. As a result, the second light-guiding means configured to make the second predetermined information visible is configured as a cover section to reduce light to the position where the predetermined information is arranged in the first light-guiding means. As a result, the second light-guiding means provided with the second predetermined information can suppress malfunction of the predetermined information caused by light from other than the first light-emitting means being irradiated onto the predetermined information, and there is an effect that information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player while executing multiple performances, and the occurrence of performance discrepancies due to abnormal expressions can be suppressed, thereby increasing the attention to the game.

<K group: One light guide plate provides strong and weak effects, and at least the weak area illumination is highly anisotropic (good linearity, no diffusion, focusing lens)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group K was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a suggestion information drawing means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing the execution of at least first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
A performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
A first light-emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
A second light-emitting means (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (e.g., a front light guide plate 410) that allows the first suggestion information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and allows the second suggestion information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine K0 is characterized by being equipped with at least a focusing means (e.g., a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that focuses the light from the first light-emitting means and irradiates it on the first suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine K0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means selects at least the execution of first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, or second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, the performance means is configured to be able to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. Here, the first light-emitting means provided in the performance means is configured to be able to irradiate light onto the first suggestion information, and the second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means is configured to be able to irradiate light onto the second suggestion information. Then, when the first light-emitting means emits light, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light-emitting means emits light, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light-collecting means collects at least the light from the first light-emitting means and irradiates the first suggestive information. As a result, when the first suggestive information provided on one light-guiding means is made visible by the light emitted by the first light-emitting means, the light-collecting means can collect the light from the first light-emitting means and irradiate only the first suggestive information without irradiating the second suggestive information provided on the same light-guiding means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunction of the second suggestive information when the first suggestive information is made visible, and by suppressing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation due to abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for lotterying the execution of a suggestion based on suggestion information capable of suggesting the expectation degree of a predetermined game value being given to a player based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has: first suggestion information (e.g., the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded; and second suggestion information (e.g., the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information.
A first light-emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
A second light-emitting means (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (e.g., a front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine K1 is configured such that the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine K1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Also, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the suggestion information lottery means selects the execution of a suggestion by the suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, and based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the performance means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion by the suggestion information. And, as the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, and second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information are provided. Here, light is irradiated to the first suggestion information by the first light emitting means provided in the performance means, and light is irradiated to the second suggestion information by the second light emitting means also provided in the performance means. Then, by a light guiding means provided in the presentation means, when the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestive information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the directionality of the light irradiated from the first light emitting means is configured to be higher than the directionality of the light irradiated from the second light emitting means. When an attempt is made to make visible the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the second suggestive information, if the second suggestive information provided in the same light guiding means and which suggests a higher expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the first suggestive information becomes visible, there is a risk that an inconsistency will occur in the presentation content, and it will not be possible to realize gameplay according to the game specifications. Therefore, by increasing the directionality of light toward at least the first suggestive information, which has a low expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, and configuring the light to be irradiated toward the first suggestive information without diffusing it, it is possible to display only the first suggestive information at an appropriate time, which has the effect of making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

In the gaming machine K1,
The gaming machine K2 is characterized by being equipped with at least a first directivity improving means (e.g., a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting means and irradiates the first suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first directivity improving means at least increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestive information. When the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the second suggestive information, is made visible, if the second suggestive information, which is provided on the same light guiding means and suggests that the expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestive information, becomes visible, there is a risk that a discrepancy in the presentation content will occur and the playability according to the game specifications will not be realized. Therefore, by configuring the light for at least the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value, to be increased by the first directivity improving means and irradiated toward the first suggestive information without diffusing it, it is possible to display only the first suggestive information at the appropriate timing, and it is possible to make it difficult for a discrepancy in the presentation content to occur.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
A gaming machine K3 is characterized by being equipped with a second directivity improving means (e.g., a front downward focusing lens 414d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information.

Gaming machine K3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine K1 or K2. That is, the second directivity improving means increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. As a result, by configuring the light guiding means in which the two pieces of suggestive information are provided so that the light for each piece of suggestive information is not diffused by each light collecting means, each piece of suggestive information can be displayed at the appropriate timing, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

In the gaming machines K1 to K3,
A second performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined performance related to a game is provided,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a front side portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the gaming machine front side of the second performance means,
The first light emitting means is
The flat plate-shaped portion is provided at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion,
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine K4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion on the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the second performance means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance related to the game. Also, the light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second performance means. Then, the first light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. That is, the light guiding means is configured to be made to receive light from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, rather than the above-mentioned front side portion. This means that when light is made to be incident on the light guiding means from the front side portion located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second performance means, the direction of the incident light changes due to the front side portion, and it may be difficult or impossible to express the predetermined information in the desired manner. In addition, the light emitting means must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the design freedom. Therefore, by introducing light into each part of the flat plate-shaped portion in a light guiding means having a front side portion, the above problem can be effectively solved, and the design freedom of the light guiding means can be increased.

In the gaming machine K4,
The front side portion is
A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the front side is formed as an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second performance means. This means that when light is made to enter the light guiding means from the external shape related part, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the external shape related part, and there is a risk that the suggestive information cannot be expressed in the desired manner or is difficult to express. In addition, the light emitting part etc. must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape related part, which may reduce the design freedom. Furthermore, the external shape related part is configured to have a shape that follows the external shape of the second performance means, and if the light emitting part etc. is arranged to correspond to the external shape related part, there is a risk that the design freedom of the first performance means (light guiding means) will be restricted. As a result, in the first performance means having an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second performance means, the above problem can be preferably solved by making light enter from a part of the flat plate shape part that is not the external shape related part, and the design freedom of the first performance means can be increased.

<L group: 1 light guide plate for strong and weak effects, at least the strong area illumination is highly isotropic (diffusion lens, 3-way lens)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group L was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
a suggestion information drawing means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing the execution of at least first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
A performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The production means is
A first light-emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
A second light-emitting means (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (e.g., a front light guide plate 410) that allows the first suggestion information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and allows the second suggestion information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine L0 is characterized by being equipped with at least a diffusion means (e.g., a rear upper diffusion lens 423 or a rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine L0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestion information lottery means selects at least the execution of first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, or second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, the performance means is configured to be able to execute the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. Here, the first light-emitting means provided in the performance means is configured to be able to irradiate light onto the first suggestion information, and the second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means is configured to be able to irradiate light onto the second suggestion information. The light guide means allows the first suggestive information to be visible from the front of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and allows the second suggestive information to be visible from the front of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light. Here, the diffusion means at least diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. This ensures that the second suggestive information, which is important for the game, is illuminated with light and made clearly visible, thereby accurately suggesting information about the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means,
A suggestion information selection means (e.g., MPU 221) for selecting the execution of suggestion information that can suggest the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded to a player based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has: first suggestion information (e.g., the fourth decorative pattern group 413) capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded; and second suggestion information (e.g., the third decorative pattern 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level at which the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information.
A first light-emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
A second light-emitting means (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (e.g., a front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine L1 is characterized by having at least a diffusion means (e.g., a third upward diffusion lens 473) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine L1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Also, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the suggestion information lottery means selects the execution of a suggestion by the suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, and based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the performance means. And, as the suggestion information, at least first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, and second suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player that the expected degree of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information are provided. Here, light is irradiated to the first suggestion information by the first light emitting means provided in the performance means, and light is irradiated to the second suggestion information by the second light emitting means also provided in the performance means. Then, by a light guiding means provided in the presentation means, when the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestive information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestive information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means and irradiated onto the second suggestive information. Since the second suggestive information is a presentation that has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than at least the first suggestive information, it is necessary to comprehensively irradiate light onto the second suggestive information by the diffusion means so that the second suggestive information can be clearly recognized by the player. Furthermore, when the first suggestive information is made visible, if the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the first suggestive information, is also made visible, a discrepancy in presentation will occur. However, even if the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the second suggestive information, becomes visible when the second suggestive information is made visible, the player will focus on the execution of the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value, and will not pay as much attention to the execution of the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value, so a discrepancy in presentation is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by employing a diffusion means for the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value, the presentation effect of the light guiding means can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine L1,
The gaming machine L2 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (e.g., a third right-direction focusing lens 475b and a third left-direction focusing lens 476b) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the first suggestive information.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, the gaming machine L2 has the following effects. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is increased by the directivity improving means and is irradiated onto the first suggestive information. When attempting to make the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the second suggestive information, visible, if the second suggestive information, which is provided on the same light guiding means and suggests a higher expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the first suggestive information, becomes visible, there is a risk that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content and that the gameplay will not be achieved according to the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring at least the light for the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded, to be irradiated onto the first suggestive information without being diffused by the directivity improving means, there is an effect that only the first suggestive information can be displayed at an appropriate time, making it difficult for inconsistencies in the presentation content to occur.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2,
A second performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined performance related to a game is provided,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (e.g., an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a front side portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) that is formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the gaming machine front side of the second performance means,
The first light emitting means is
The flat plate-shaped portion is provided at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion,
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine L3 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion on the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L1 or L2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second performance means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance related to the game. Also, the light guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second performance means. Then, the first light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion of the flat plate-shaped portion. That is, the light guiding means is configured to receive light from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, rather than the above-mentioned front side portion. This means that when light is attempted to be incident on the light guiding means from a front side portion located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second performance means, the direction of the incident light changes due to the front side portion, and it may be difficult or impossible to express the predetermined information in a desired manner. In addition, the light emitting means must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the design freedom. Therefore, by introducing light into each part of the flat plate-shaped portion in a light guiding means having a front side portion, the above problem can be effectively solved, and the design freedom of the light guiding means can be increased.

In the gaming machine L3,
The front side portion is
A gaming machine L4 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the front side is formed as an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second performance means. This means that when light is made to enter the light guiding means from the external shape related part, the direction of travel of the incident light is changed by the external shape related part, and there is a risk that the suggestive information cannot be expressed in the desired manner or is difficult to express. In addition, the light emitting part etc. must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape related part, which may reduce the design freedom. Furthermore, the external shape related part is configured to have a shape that follows the external shape of the second performance means, and if the light emitting part etc. is arranged to correspond to the external shape related part, there is a risk that the design freedom of the first performance means (light guiding means) will be restricted. As a result, in the first performance means having an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second performance means, the above problem can be preferably solved by making light enter from a part of the flat plate shape part that is not the external shape related part, and the design freedom of the first performance means can be increased.

<Group M: Multiple light guide plates, at least a separate light guide plate with a diffusion means>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The M Group invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

a first performance means (e.g., a rear upper LED unit 422) for performing a first performance as the game progresses;
and a second performance means (e.g., a front right LED unit 415) for performing a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses,
The first production means is
A first light emitting means (e.g., a rear upward LED 422c) that emits light;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that allows a first predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine as the first performance when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion,
The second production means is
A second light emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c) that emits light;
and a second light guiding means (e.g., a front light guiding plate 410) that allows second predetermined information (e.g., a fourth decorative pattern group 413) related to the game to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine as the second performance when the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on a predetermined second portion,
The gaming machine M0 is characterized by being equipped with at least a diffusion means (e.g., a rear upper diffusion lens 423 or a rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second specified information.

According to the gaming machine M0, the first presentation means performs a first presentation as the game progresses, and the second presentation means performs a second presentation different from the first presentation as the game progresses. Here, when light is emitted by the first light-emitting means provided in the first presentation means, and the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the first light-guiding means from a predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the first presentation. Also, when light is emitted by the second light-emitting means provided in the second presentation means, and the light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident on the second light-guiding means from a predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the second presentation. Here, the light from at least the second light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means and irradiated onto the second predetermined information. This has the effect of making the second presentation related to the second predetermined information more spectacular by illuminating the light diffused by the diffusion means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

A first performance means (e.g., a front right LED unit 415) capable of executing a first performance as the game progresses;
and a second performance means (e.g., a rear upper LED unit 422) capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses,
The first production means is
A first light emitting means (e.g., a front right LED 415c) that emits light;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a front light guiding plate 410) that allows a first predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a second decorative pattern group 411) to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine as the first performance when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion,
The second production means is
A second light emitting means (e.g., a rear upward LED 422c) that emits light;
and a second light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that allows second predetermined information (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) related to the game to be visible from a front side of the gaming machine as the second performance when the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on a predetermined second portion,
The gaming machine M1 is characterized by being provided with at least a diffusion means (e.g., a rear upward diffusion lens 423) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates the second predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine M1, the first presentation means is configured to be able to execute a first presentation as the game progresses, and the second presentation means is configured to be able to execute a second presentation different from the first presentation as the game progresses. Here, when light is emitted by a first light-emitting means provided in the first presentation means, and the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the first light-guiding means from a predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the first presentation. Also, when light is emitted by a second light-emitting means provided in the second presentation means, and the light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident on the second light-guiding means from a predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the second presentation. Here, the light from at least the second light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means and irradiated onto the second predetermined information. This allows the second performance related to the second predetermined information to be performed in a flashy manner by irradiating the light diffused by the diffusion means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine M1,
The second performance is
The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the first presentation has a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded.

Gaming machine M2 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine M1. That is, the second presentation is set as a presentation with a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded than the first presentation. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the light guiding means and increasing attention to the game by employing a diffusion means for the second suggestive information with a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded.

In gaming machine M1 or M2,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the second light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the second light guiding means.

Gaming machine M3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines M1 and M2. That is, the specified portion is a specified end of the second light guiding means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed with the specified end of the second light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the second performance means by integrally forming the second light guiding means and the diffusion means, thereby reducing the number of parts in the second performance means.

In any one of gaming machines M1 to M3,
As the first performance,
A predetermined first predetermined performance (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
A first specific effect (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) having a higher expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the first specific effect,
The first production means is
The gaming machine M4 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (e.g., a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that enhances the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effect is achieved. That is, as the first effect, a predetermined first predetermined effect and a first specific effect that has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the first predetermined effect are provided. Then, the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting means is increased by the directivity improvement means provided in the first effect means. As a result, when the first effect means is configured to be able to execute a plurality of first effects, the light irradiated from the first light-emitting means can be accurately irradiated to the position where the desired first effect is provided and does not or makes it difficult to reach the position where the other first effects are provided, thereby preventing the light emitted from the first light-emitting means from making the undesired first effect visible. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of performance discrepancies can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

<N group: pseudo stop symbol display control corresponding to symbol arrangement>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The N Group invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means includes:
Three rotating members (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged,
A rotation drive means (e.g., a motor) for rotating each of the rotating members;
A drive control means (e.g., an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating member is
A common rotating member (e.g., a left reel LR and a right reel RR) configured only with the identification information common to the rotating members;
a non-common rotating member (e.g., a center reel CR) including non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member;
The drive control means
a step change means for gradually changing the previous stage identification information forming the combination of the identification information of the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display") (for example, changing a reach formation symbol from "5" to "6" to "7");
The step change means is
A gaming machine N0 characterized in that when the pre-stage identification information is changed in stages, the combination of the pre-stage identification information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information contained in the non-common rotating member.

According to the gaming machine N0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means performs judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Also, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members each having a plurality of types of identification information arranged thereon, and the rotating members are each rotationally driven by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. And, as the rotation means, the common rotating member is composed only of identification information common to the rotating members, and the non-common rotating member is composed of non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member. Here, the previous stage identification information forming a combination of identification information of a previous stage of a predetermined display result is changed in stages by the step change means provided in the drive control means. When the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by the stage change means, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so that the non-shared identification information included in the non-shared rotating member is not included. This has the effect of making it possible to execute a natural presentation that does not cause any inconsistencies in the presentation, thereby increasing the attention paid to the game.

<Na group: excluding reach formation patterns based on non-common identification information>
An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
A drive control means (e.g., an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating means is
A common rotation means (e.g., a left reel LR and a right reel RR) on which common identification information, which is the common identification information, is arranged;
a non-common rotating means (e.g., a center reel CR) on which the common identification information and non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common rotating means are arranged,
The drive control means
a step change means for gradually changing the previous stage identification information forming the combination of the identification information of the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display") (for example, changing a reach formation pattern from "1" to "2" to "3");
The step change means is
The gaming machine Na1 is characterized in that, when the pre-stage identification information is changed in stages, the combination of the pre-stage identification information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information contained in the non-common rotation means.

According to the gaming machine Na1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the performance means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the performance means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are each rotated by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. The rotation means is provided with a common rotation means in which common identification information, which is common identification information, is arranged, and a non-common rotation means in which the common identification information and non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common rotation means are arranged. Then, a previous stage identification information forming a combination of previous stage identification information of a predetermined display result is revealed by a previous stage appearance means provided in the drive control means, and the previous stage information is changed in stages by a step change means also provided in the drive control means. Here, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by the step change means, the combination of previous stage information is changed so as not to include non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means. This has the effect of preventing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation and preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game, by not revealing previous stage identification information based on non-common identification information that cannot exist anywhere other than the non-common rotation means when changing the previous stage identification information in stages.

In the gaming machine Na1, at least the common rotating means is
The identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
The gaming machine Na2 is characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Na1, gaming machine Na2 achieves the following effects. That is, at least the identification information is arranged on the common rotation means to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the combination of previous-stage identification information is changed by the step change means to correspond to the predetermined permutation. This has the effect of preventing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation and preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game by not revealing previous-stage identification information that is not possible anywhere other than the non-common rotation means when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages to correspond to the predetermined permutation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1 or Na2,
The dynamic execution means includes:
The gaming machine Na3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a dynamic continuation means which continues the dynamic display when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, regardless of which of the identification information appears in the common rotation means.

Gaming machine Na3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines Na1 and Na2. That is, regardless of which identification information is displayed on the common rotation means, if non-common identification information is displayed on the non-common rotation means, the dynamic display is continued by the dynamic continuation means provided in the dynamic execution means. This creates a gameplay in which the dynamic display continues depending on whether or not non-common identification information is displayed, and has the effect of drawing attention to the rotation mode of the non-common rotation means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Na3,
The dynamic display means includes:
A predetermined first performance,
A second performance in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first performance;
The dynamic continuation means includes:
The gaming machine Na4 is characterized in that, when the non-shared identification information appears in the non-shared rotation means, the second presentation is executed.

Gaming machine Na4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Na3. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first performance and a second performance in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first performance, and when non-shared identification information appears in the non-shared rotation means, the dynamic continuation means executes the second performance. This creates a gameplay in which the second performance in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear is executed depending on whether or not non-shared identification information appears, and has the effect of drawing attention to whether or not non-shared identification information appears in the rotation of the non-shared rotation means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4,
The dynamic execution means includes:
In the dynamic display, a plurality of pieces of identification information can be displayed in one of the rotation means, and a second common rotation means can be stopped before the non-common rotation means;
The common rotating means is
A gaming machine Na5, characterized in that the order of arrangement of the common identification information in one of the common rotation means (e.g., descending order) is reversed to the order of arrangement of the common identification information in the other common rotation means (e.g., ascending order).

Gaming machine Na5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Na1 to Na4. That is, in dynamic display, the dynamic execution means configures one rotation means to be able to produce multiple identification information, and the second common rotation means is configured to be able to stop before the non-common rotation means, and the common rotation means are arranged such that the order of arrangement of the common identification information in the first common rotation means is reversed to the order of arrangement of the common identification information in the other common rotation means. This has the effect of enabling the common rotation means that can stop first to produce multiple previous stage identification information, and enriching the variety of the appearance position of the first previous stage identification information, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5,
The non-common rotating means includes:
A gaming machine Na6, characterized in that the identification information is arranged in the same order (e.g., ascending order) as the arrangement order (e.g., ascending order) of the identification information in at least one of the common rotating means.

Gaming machine Na6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines Na1 to Na5. That is, in the non-shared rotation means, the identification information is arranged in at least the same order as the identification information in the one common rotation means. This has the effect of making it possible to standardize the order in which the identification information appears in the one common rotation means and the non-shared rotation means, making it easier for the player to recognize the order in which the identification information appears.

In any of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6,
The non-shared identification information is
The gaming machine Na7 is characterized in that it is arranged in the middle of the predetermined sequence in the non-common rotating means.

Gaming machine Na7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines Na2 to Na6. That is, the non-shared identification information is arranged in the middle of a predetermined sequence in the non-shared rotation means. This creates an element of surprise in the predetermined sequence of identification information in the non-shared rotation means with regard to the appearance of non-shared identification information that is not included in the common rotation means, thereby enriching the variety of the game and increasing the interest in the game.

<Nb group: excluding reach-forming symbols based on identification information that can provide a large profit to the player>
An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
A drive control means (e.g., an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
a previous stage display means for displaying previous stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information of a previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display");
A step change means for gradually changing the preceding step information (for example, changing the reach formation symbol from "1" to "2" to "3");
The identification information is
A first identification information (e.g., a “2” symbol) that can provide a player with a first predetermined benefit when the first identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result;
and a second identification information (e.g., a "7" symbol) which, when displayed as the predetermined display result, can give the player a second advantage greater than the first advantage;
The step change means is
The gaming machine Nb1 is characterized in that, in the course of gradually changing the previous-stage identification information, the combination of the previous-stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means performs a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the performance means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the performance means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. Also, a previous stage identification information that forms a combination of previous stage identification information of the predetermined display result is revealed by a previous stage appearance means provided in the drive control means, and the previous stage information is changed in stages by a stage change means also provided in the drive control means. Here, a first identification information is provided that can provide a player with a predetermined first benefit when the identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result, and a second identification information is provided that can provide a player with a second benefit greater than the first benefit when the identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result. The step change means changes the combination of previous-stage information so that the previous-stage information by the second identification information is not included in the process of the previous-stage identification information being changed step by step. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to feeling that the benefit that can be provided has decreased, and improving the enjoyment of the game, by not displaying the second identification information that can provide a player with a greater benefit than the first identification information during the process of the previous-stage identification information being changed step by step.

In the gaming machine Nb1, the rotating means is
The identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb2 characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

Gaming machine Nb2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Nb1. That is, the identification information is arranged in the rotating means to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the combination of previous-stage identification information is changed by the step change means to correspond to the predetermined permutation. This has the effect that when the previous-stage identification information is changed step by step to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the second identification information that can give the player a greater benefit than the first identification information is not displayed at the intermediate stage of the previous-stage identification information that can change step by step, thereby suppressing the player's loss of interest in the game due to feeling that the benefit that can be given has decreased, and increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2,
The rotating means is
A gaming machine Nb3 is characterized by being equipped with an alternating arrangement means for alternating the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the portion "1" → "2" → "3", or the portion "5" → "6" → "7" → "8").

Gaming machine Nb3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2. That is, the first identification information and the second identification information are alternately arranged in the alternating arrangement means of the rotation means. This allows the first identification information and the second identification information to appear alternately in the dynamic display, enriching the variety of the game, while when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, the second identification information, which can give the player a greater benefit than the first identification information, is not displayed in the middle of the previous stage identification information, which can change in stages, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to feeling that the benefit that can be given has decreased, and increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3,
The step change means is
at least a predetermined first previous stage identification information, which is the previous stage identification information, is displayed, and then the first previous stage identification information is rotated to display a second previous stage identification information which may constitute a part of the predetermined display result;
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb4 characterized in that the first pre-stage identification information is not displayed using the second identification information.

Gaming machine Nb4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3. That is, the stage change means is configured to rotate the first previous stage identification information, which is the previous stage information, so that the second previous stage identification information that can form a part of the predetermined display result can be displayed after the first previous stage identification information is displayed by the stage change means. The stage change means is configured not to display the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information as the first previous stage identification information. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to feeling that the profit that can be provided to the player has decreased by not displaying the second identification information, which can provide a greater profit to the player than the first identification information, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, thereby suppressing the player from losing interest in the game due to feeling that the profit that can be provided to the player has decreased, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb4,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nb5 characterized in that the second pre-stage identification information can be displayed using the second identification information as the second pre-stage identification information.

Gaming machine Nb5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Nb4. That is, the stage change means is configured to be able to make previous stage identification information based on the second identification information appear as the second previous stage identification information. When the second identification information can appear as previous stage identification information constituting a part of the predetermined display result, by making previous stage identification information based on the second identification information which has a large profit that can be awarded to the player appear, it has the effect of enriching the variety of the game while preventing the player from thinking that the profit that can be awarded has decreased, suppressing loss of interest in the game, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5,
The dynamic execution means includes:
When the determining means determines that the predetermined display result will not be displayed, the previous stage identification information is made less likely to be displayed by the second identification information,
A gaming machine Nb6 characterized in that it is configured to make it easier for the previous stage identification information to appear using the second identification information when the judgment means judges that the specified display result will appear.

Gaming machine Nb6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured so that when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result will not appear, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is unlikely to appear, and when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result will appear, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is likely to appear. This makes it possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the predetermined display result at the stage at which the previous stage identification information appears, and while enriching the variation of the game, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, by not allowing the second identification information, which can give the player a greater profit than the first identification information, to appear at the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages, it is possible to suppress the player's loss of interest in the game due to the player feeling that the profit that can be given has decreased, and to increase the interest in the game.

<Nc group: Excluding reach formation patterns based on identification information that triggers development performance>
An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
A drive control means (e.g., an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
a previous stage display means for displaying previous stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information of a previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display");
A step change means for changing the preceding step information step by step (for example, changing the reach formation symbol from "1" to "2" to "3");
The identification information is
The game machine includes development identification information (e.g., a "chance" symbol) that can become a previous stage information by the previous stage displaying means when the development identification information appears on a plurality of the rotation means,
The step change means is
The gaming machine Nc1 is characterized in that, in the course of gradually changing the previous-stage identification information, the combination of the previous-stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous-stage identification information due to the development identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means performs judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Also, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the performance means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the performance means is provided with at least two or more rotation means in which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. Also, the previous stage identification information that forms a combination of the identification information of the previous stage of the predetermined display result appears by the previous stage appearance means provided in the drive control means, and the previous stage information is changed in stages by the stage change means also provided in the drive control means. Here, when the identification information appears by the multiple rotation means, the previous stage appearance means provides development identification information that can become the previous stage information. Then, the stage change means changes the combination of previous stage information so that the previous stage information resulting from the development identification information is not included while the previous stage identification information is being changed in stages. This has the effect of preventing the development identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, from appearing as an intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game caused by the progress of the presentation becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the previous stage identification information was present, and increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine Nc1, the rotating means is
The identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc2 characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Nc1, gaming machine Nc2 provides the following effects. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotating means to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the combination of previous stage identification information is changed by the stage changing means to correspond to the predetermined permutation. This has the effect that when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the development identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, is not made to appear as an intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages, thereby suppressing loss of interest in the game caused by the progress of the presentation becoming unclear due to the development identification information appearing even though the stage identification information is appeared, and thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2,
The step change means is
at least a predetermined first previous stage identification information, which is the previous stage identification information, is displayed, and then the first previous stage identification information is rotated to display a second previous stage identification information which may constitute a part of the predetermined display result;
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc3 characterized in that the previous stage identification information is not revealed by the development identification information as the first previous stage identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines Nc1 and Nc2, gaming machine Nc3 has the following effect. That is, the stage change means is configured to rotate the first previous stage identification information, which is the previous stage information, so that the second previous stage identification information that may form a part of the specified display result can be displayed after the stage change means at least displays the first previous stage identification information, and the stage change means is configured not to display the previous stage identification information based on the development identification information as the first previous stage identification information. This has the effect of preventing the loss of interest in the game caused by the progress of the presentation becoming unclear due to the development identification information being displayed even though the stage identification information was displayed, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Nc3,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc4 characterized in that the stage identification information is not revealed by the development identification information as the second stage identification information.

Gaming machine Nc4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Nc3. That is, the stage change means is configured so that the previous stage identification information due to the development identification information is not revealed as the second previous stage identification information. This has the effect of preventing the development identification information, which is merely a part of the previous stage identification information, from appearing even as the second previous stage identification information, which is the final stage of the previous stage identification information that can change in stages, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game caused by the progress of the presentation becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the stage identification information was revealed, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4,
The step change means is
A gaming machine Nc5 characterized in that, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by omitting the development identification information.

Gaming machine Nc5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4. That is, when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by the stage change means, the combination of previous stage identification information is changed in stages by omitting the development identification information. This has the effect of preventing loss of interest in the game caused by the progress of the presentation becoming unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the previous stage identification information has been revealed, by changing the previous stage identification information by omitting the development identification information, which is only a part of the previous stage identification information, from the previous stage identification information that can be changed in stages, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5,
The dynamic display means includes:
A predetermined first performance,
A second performance in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first performance;
The dynamic execution means includes:
A gaming machine Nc6 characterized in that the second presentation is executed when the development identification information appears in all of the rotation means.

Gaming machine Nc6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first performance and a second performance that is more likely to produce a predetermined display result than the first performance, and when development identification information appears on all rotation means, the dynamic execution means executes the second performance. This creates a gameplay in which the second performance that is more likely to produce a predetermined display result is executed depending on whether development identification information appears on all rotation means, and has the effect of drawing attention to whether development identification information appears on all rotation means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nc6,
The dynamic execution means includes:
A gaming machine Nc7 is characterized in that when the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information, the game does not progress to the second presentation.

Gaming machine Nc7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine Nc6. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured not to progress to the second performance when the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured not to progress to the second performance unless the development identification information appears on all of the rotation means. This creates a gameplay in which the second performance, which is likely to produce a predetermined display result, is executed depending on whether the development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, and has the effect of drawing attention to whether the development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<O group: Delay synchronization control of the left pattern row during full rotation and time alignment with the sound>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine and a light-emitting unit that can change the color of the light or a single color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2018-126296)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group O was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means includes:
Three rotating members (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged,
A rotation drive means (e.g., a motor) for rotating each of the rotating members;
A drive control means (e.g., an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
A two-member synchronous drive means for synchronously driving the rotating members while the identification information of at least two of the rotating members is aligned (for example, synchronously changing the patterns of the center reel CR and the right reel RR by aligning the patterns);
a three-member synchronous drive means for synchronously driving the rotating members (e.g., for synchronously changing the patterns of the reels LR, CR, and RR) in a state where the identification information of the rotating members synchronously driven to rotate by the two-member synchronous drive means is aligned with the identification information of the remaining one of the rotating members,
The gaming machine O0 is characterized by being equipped with a music synchronization means (for example, music output at a temporary stop after full rotation) that outputs music in accordance with the rotational drive of the rotating member, which is driven synchronously by the three-member synchronization drive means.

According to the gaming machine O0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means performs judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. Also, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members, each of which has a plurality of types of identification information arranged thereon, and the rotating members are each rotationally driven by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. Then, in the drive control means, the two-member synchronous drive means drives the rotating members in a synchronized manner with the identification information of at least two rotating members aligned, and the three-member synchronous drive means drives the rotating members in a synchronized manner with the identification information of the rotating members rotated and driven in a synchronized manner by the two-member synchronous drive means aligned with the identification information of the remaining one rotating member. Here, the music synchronization means outputs music in time with the rotation of the rotating members, which are driven synchronously by the three-member synchronization drive means. This has the effect of creating a rhythmic, fast-paced, and powerful performance, which can increase the attention to the game.

An acquisition means (e.g., a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (e.g., a value of a jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that performs a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
a dynamic execution means (e.g., a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (e.g., a drum display device 81) based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
A drive control means (e.g., an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
A first rotating means for rotating at least one of the rotating means (e.g., rotating the center reel CR and the right reel RR);
a second rotating means (for example, rotating a left reel LR) for rotating one of the rotating means after the first rotating means has rotated the other rotating means,
The gaming machine O1 is characterized by being equipped with a music output means (for example, music output at a temporary stop during full rotation) that outputs music in response to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means.

According to the gaming machine O1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means performs judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the performance means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the performance means is provided with at least two or more rotation means on which multiple types of identification information are arranged, the rotation means are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. Also, at least one rotation means is rotated by the first rotation means provided in the drive control means, and the other rotation means are rotated by the second rotation means also provided in the drive control means after one rotation means is rotated by the first rotation means. Here, the music output means outputs music corresponding to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means. This has the effect of reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the rotation of the rotating means at different times, by outputting music in response to the rotation of each rotating means, and creating a sense of unity between the rotating means and the music being output.

In the gaming machine O1,
The first rotating means includes at least a two-means synchronous rotating means for rotating the two rotating means in a synchronous manner while aligning predetermined first identification information (for example, a synchronous change of the patterns of the center reel CR and the right reel RR).
The second rotation means is
a three-means synchronous rotation means for rotating the first identification information synchronously by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information of the other rotation means in an aligned state in synchronization with each other (for example, for synchronously changing the patterns of the reels LR, CR, and RR);
The music output means includes:
The gaming machine O2 is characterized by being equipped with a music synchronization means (for example, music output at a temporary stop after full rotation) that outputs music in response to the start of rotation of the rotation means, which is rotated synchronously by the two-means synchronization rotation means and the three-means synchronization rotation means.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the two-means synchronous rotation means provided in the first rotation means, at least the predetermined first identification information in the two rotation means is rotated in a synchronized state in which it is aligned. Also, by the three-means synchronous rotation means provided in the second rotation means, the first identification information rotated in a synchronized state by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information in the other rotation means are rotated in a synchronized state in which it is aligned. Then, by the music synchronization means provided in the music output means, music is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the rotation means rotated in a synchronized manner by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the three-means synchronous rotation means. As a result, by outputting music in a manner corresponding to the rotation of the rotation means rotated in a synchronized manner, and by executing a performance that has a sense of unity between the rotation means rotated in a synchronized manner and the output music, it is possible to suppress the discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotation means rotated at different timings, and to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2,
The first rotating means is
A gaming machine O3 characterized in that at least one of the rotating means is rotated from a state in which all of the rotating means are not rotating.

Gaming machine O3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines O1 or O2. That is, the first rotation means rotates at least one of the rotation means from a state in which none of the rotation means are rotating. This has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may arise from the rotation of the rotation means that rotate at different times, by outputting music in response to the start of rotation of one rotation means, outputting music in response to the rotation of each of the rotation means that are rotated, and executing a performance that has a sense of unity between the rotated rotation means and the output music, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3,
The music output means includes:
The gaming machine O4 is characterized in that a predetermined music piece is continuously output from the time when the first rotation means starts rotating the rotation means to the time when the rotation of all the rotation means stops.

Gaming machine O4 provides the following effect in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines O1 to O3. That is, the music output means continuously outputs a predetermined piece of music from the time when the first rotation means starts rotating the rotation means until the timing when all rotation means stop rotating. This creates a sense of unity between the rotation of the rotation means and the output of the music by outputting the predetermined music in response to the start of rotation of one rotation means and continuing the output of the predetermined music until the timing when all rotation means stop rotating. As a result, this sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that can be caused by the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different times, and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O4,
The music output means includes:
outputting a first sound constituting the predetermined music piece at a timing when the first rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means;
A gaming machine O5, characterized in that a second sound different from the first sound, which constitutes the predetermined music piece, is output at the timing when the second rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means.

Gaming machine O5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines O1 to O4. That is, the music output means outputs a first sound constituting the predetermined music at the timing when the first rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means, and outputs a second sound constituting the predetermined music, different from the first sound, at the timing when the second rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means. This allows the first sound constituting the predetermined music to be output in response to the start of rotation of one rotation means, and the second sound constituting the predetermined music to be output in response to the start of rotation of the other rotation means, creating a sense of unity by completing the music in response to the rotation of the rotation means. As a result, this sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of incongruity that may be caused by the rotation of the rotation means that rotate at different times, and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O5,
The music output means includes:
A gaming machine O6, characterized in that the first sound and the second sound are output in time with the beat (e.g., the first and second beats in a measure) of a predetermined tempo (e.g., 4/4 beats of BPM 120).

Gaming machine O6 provides the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine O5. That is, the music output means outputs a first sound and a second sound in time with the beat at a predetermined tempo. This allows the first sound constituting the predetermined music to be output in time with the beat at a predetermined tempo in response to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the second sound constituting the predetermined music to be output in time with the beat at a predetermined tempo in response to the start of rotation of the other rotating means, thereby creating a sense of unity in the music by completing a music piece of a predetermined tempo in response to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, this sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that rotate at different times, and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of the gaming machines O5,
The music output means includes:
A gaming machine O7, characterized in that the first sound and the second sound form a special sound (e.g., a chord) that creates a predetermined harmony.

Gaming machine O7 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine O5. That is, the music output means forms a special sound that creates a predetermined harmony between a first sound and a second sound. This allows a first sound constituting the special sound to be output in response to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and a second sound constituting the special sound to be output in response to the start of rotation of the other rotating means, creating a sense of unity by completing the special sound having a predetermined harmony in response to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, this sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may be caused by the rotation of the rotating means that rotate at different times, and increasing attention to the game.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine B0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine C0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine D0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine E0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine F0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine G0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine H0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine I0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine J0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine K0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, M0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine L0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, N0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine M0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, and O0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine N0.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, and N0 may be applied to any one of the configurations of the gaming machine O0.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B8, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C11, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D8, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E7, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F6, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H6, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I7, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J5, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines K0 to K5, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines L0 to L4, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines M0 to M4, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied.

Note that a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0-A9, B0-B8, C0-C11, D0-D8, E0-E7, F0-F6, G0-G7, H0-H6, I0-I7, J0-J5, K0-K5, L0-L4, M0-M4, O0-O7 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines N0, Na1-Na7, Nb1-Nb6, Nc1-Nc7.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines O0 to O7, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, and Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine A0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9.

The configuration of the gaming machine B0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine C0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11.

The configuration of the gaming machine D0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine E0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine F0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6.

The configuration of the gaming machine G0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7.

The configuration of the gaming machine H0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine I0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine J0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine K0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine L0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine M0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine N0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na7.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine N0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb6.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine N0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine O0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7.

In these cases, further benefits can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7. The basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, in which the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, provided that the determined identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize device (big prize opening) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to enter the game, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that in any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a gaming machine equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped by the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and stopped by the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, the definitive identification information at the time of stopping being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine using balls as gaming media, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
60a: First decorative pattern group on the board 60b: Second decorative pattern group on the board 81: Drum display device (part of the display means, part of the performance means, part of the second performance means)
110 Main control device 113 Audio lamp control device (part of sequential lighting means, part of music output means, part of music synchronization means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic execution means, part of drive control means, part of previous stage appearance means, part of stage change means)
201 MPU (part of the determination means)
203f reserved ball execution area (part of acquisition means)
221 MPU (part of the suggestion information lottery means)
222e: Light guide plate lighting pattern table 222f: Confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 223d: Light guide pattern lottery counter 223e: Confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 310: Confirmed lamp unit (part of the second performance means)
311 Confirmation lamp (part of the second performance means, part of the second light emitting means)
400 Light guide unit (part of the performance means, part of the first performance means)
410 Front light guide plate (part of the first performance means, part of the second light guide means)
411 Second decorative pattern group 412 Third decorative pattern (part of second suggestion information)
413 Fourth decorative pattern group (part of the first suggestive information, part of the second predetermined information)
414 Lower LED unit (part of light emitting means, part of first light emitting means)
414c Front lower LED (part of second light emitting means)
414d Front lower condenser lens 415 Front right LED unit (part of the second performance means)
415c Front right LED (part of the first light emitting means, part of the second light emitting means)
415d Front right condenser lens (part of condenser means)
416c Front left LED (part of the first light emitting means)
416d Front left condenser lens (part of condenser means)
420 Rear light guide plate (part of the light guide means, part of the second performance means, part of the first light guide means)
421 First decorative pattern group (part of the specified information, part of the third suggestive information, part of the first specified information)
422 Rear upper LED unit (part of the first performance means)
422c Rear upper LED (part of the first light emitting means)
423 Rear upward diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional illumination means)
424 Rear lower LED (part of light emitting part, part of first light emitting part, part of second light emitting part, part of third light emitting part)
425 Rear lower diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional illumination means)
425a Left direction diffusion section (part of the first direction irradiation section)
425b Front direction diffusion section (part of second direction irradiation section)
425c Right-direction diffusion unit (part of the third-direction irradiation unit)
430: Display area forming member 431: Central opening 432: Lens cut (part of cover portion)
C1 Jackpot Random Number Counter (part of special information)
CR center reel (part of the rotating means, part of the common rotating means, part of the second rotating means, part of the three-means synchronous rotating means)
LR Left reel (part of the rotating means, part of the non-common rotating means, part of the first rotating means, part of the two-means synchronous rotating means)
RR Right reel (part of the rotating means, part of the common rotating means, part of the first rotating means, part of the two-means synchronous rotating means)
600 Stepping motor (part of rotation drive means)

Claims (1)

a first performance means for performing a first performance by irradiating light from at least a predetermined direction as a game progresses;
A second performance means is provided on the predetermined direction side of the first performance means, and performs a second performance that emits light and is different from the first performance as the game progresses.
a first effect reduction means for reducing a range of the first effect during a predetermined period of time during which the second effect is being executed when the second effect is started by the second effect means during execution of the first effect by the first effect means;
and a reduction cancellation means for canceling the reduction of the performance range of the first performance by the first performance reduction means after the end of the predetermined period ,
The gaming machine includes:
A means for reducing the amount of light of the first effect being displayed;
A means for increasing the amount of light of the second performance during execution of the first performance by the first performance reduction means,
The second performance is
Can be executed when transitioning to a specified game state
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images